Dioptrica nova, A treatise of dioptricks in two parts : wherein the various effects and appearances of spherick glasses, both convex and concave, single and combined, in telescopes and microscopes, together with their usefulness in many concerns of humane life, are explained / by William Molyneux of Dublin, Esq. ...

I think this Book fit to be Printed .

Iune the 4th . 1690. JOHN HOSKYNS . V. P. R. S.

DIOPTRICA NOVA . A TREATISE OF DIOPTRICKS , In Two PARTS . Wherein the Various Effects and Appearances OF Spherick Glasses , BOTH Convex and Concave , Single and Combined , IN TELESCOPES and MICROSCOPES , Together with Their USEFULNESS in many Concerns of Humane Life , ARE EXPLAINED .

By WILLIAM MOLYNEUX of Dublin Esq Fellow of the ROYAL SOCIETY .

Ex Visibilibus Invisibilia .

London : Printed for BENJ. TOOKE , MDCXCII .

To the ILLUSTRIOUS The Royal Society .

THE Design of the ensuing Treatise being the Promotion of a Part of Physico-Mathematical Knowledge in the English Nation ; I know not to whom I can more properly present it , than to that noble Body of English Philosophers , whose Foundation by the Royal Charter of King Charles II. is to this very purpose . How far , and how successfully you have hitherto prosecuted the end of this excellent Institution , 't is needless for me to declare : since the literate World is already so abundantly stored with your learned Labours , and useful Discoveries ; whereof I could here recount a List of many Hundreds published by several Members of the Society . But I design not a Panegyrick , but an humble Address for your Favour and Countenance to my present Endeavours : And this I hope for , with the more Assurance , having already seen your favourable Acceptance of many Offerings of this kind , and your ready Incouragement of all such Philosophical Inquiries , as tend to the use of Life , or Advancement of Arts and Sciences .

And on this Occasion I cannot omit expressing my Sence of that excellent Method of Experimental Philosophy , which now , by your Example and Incouragement , does so universally prevail , and is so highly advanced all over Europe , and other Parts of the World .

'T is wonderful to consider , how the Schools were formerly over-run with a sensless kind of Iargon , which they call'd Philosophy ; and which men studied with the greatest Labour and Assiduity , that they might attain the name of Wise and Learned . This certainly was the greatest Cheat was ever imposed on the mind of Man : But why say I , imposed ? Men drew it on themselves , and run their own Heads into the Noose : and when they had intangled themselves in a thousand ridiculous Disputes about empty Questions , they vainly thought they had attained the Perfection of Philosophers ; whilst they had no Ideas in their Minds answerable to those Noises they made with their Tongues ; but took more pains to deceive both themselves and others , than is requisite for the Propagation of true Knowledge . And indeed we may well imagine , that , had the former Ages of the World been at half that Labour and Study for the Advancement of real Knowledg , which they spent in promoting verbose Stuff ; Manking by this time might have been by many Degrees more wise , and consequently more happy even in this Life ; for Wisdom only makes men so .

But in this last Age the generous Undertakings of the Philosophick Societies of Europe ( to whom your Institution has shewn the way , and been an illustrious Example ) have dissipated these dark Mists , and have abdicated this kind of empty Stuff ; which had crept into even Natural Disquisitions ; and like a Leprosie had quite over-run the whole Body of Philosophy , deforming its Beauty , and ruining its Strength . Men are not satisfied now with noisy Words , and nothing else ; but require more solid Foundations of Knowledge , and believe no farther than they can find good Proofs .

This great Change , which Philosophy or the Prosecution of Knowledg in general has received of late years , is manifest in all its Parts ; but in none more than in natural Enquiries . To these you have given a clearly new Turn , wholly different from the Methods , by which they were formerly prosecuted in the Schools . And how advantageously the Change has been made , will be evident to any that considers the one and t'other Method .

The Commentators on Aristotle , ( who was certainly himself a most diligent and profound Investigator of Nature ) have rendred Physicks on heap of froathy Disputes , managing the whole Knowledge of Body and Motion , Consult Magirus , Eustathius , Zanardus , Col. Complutensis Com. &c. the common Natural Philosophy Books read in our Colleges . of Animals , Plants , and Minerals ; of Celestial , Aerial and Terrestrial Bodies ; by Hypothetical Conjectures , confirm'd by plausible Arguments of Wit and Rhetorick , ordered in a Syllogistical form ; and answering Objections in like manner : But never studied to prove their Opinions by Experiments . By which Method they were as ignorant of the Properties and Affections of Natural Bodies , as if they were not at all the Subject of their Disquisitions . And yet these were the great Dictators of Physicks for many Ages in our Colleges and Schooles ; and no one was accounted worthy the Name of a Philosopher , that would not on their Authority Jurare in verba . He that could Dispute and distinguish , about Sympathy , Antipathy , occult Qualities , Antiperistesis , and a Thousand such other fantastick Terms , was reputed a great Proficient , and deeply vers'd in Natures Secrets : tho all the while perhaps he knew not any one of the admirable Phaenomena of the Magnet , or was not at all versed in the History of any one Branch in Nature . They 'd rumble out indeed the Definition and Divisions of Comets ; but knew nothing of the Laws of their Motions , or other Affections . They 'd tell you the Tides depend on the Influence of the Moon ; and when you proceed farther , and ask , what is this Influence ? They 'll yet give you a Word for it , and say , 't is an occult Quality : If you inquire , what an occult Quality is ? They 'r at a Stand , and having no farther hard Word here to fly to , are forced to confess 't is a Quality they know nothing of . Had they not better at first have plainly confest , they know not the Cause of the Tides ? no surely ; For tho this had been more becoming modest Philosphers , it would not so well captivate the Vulgar , and gain to themselves the Repute of deep Knowledge .

Yet this verbose Philosophy is that , which for many Generations prevail'd in the World : This it is , which is injoyn'd to be read and studied in our Colleges and Academies , by the Statutes and Charters thereof : which in this Particular , to the apparent Hindrance of the Advancement of real and useful Knowledge , do yet remain unaltered in our Universities : wherein the first years of young Students may be imploy'd with much more Advantage by prosecuting other Methods . And , My thinks , it were now full time ( after so happy a Reformation of our Errors in Religion , and purging our Seminaries of Learning from the Fopperies and Superstition of a false Worship ) to begin a Reformation of our Human Literature , by establishing more useful Methods of Education , especially for the Employment of our more tender years .

But tho this weighty Undertaking has hitherto been deferr'd in them ( the Reason whereof I leave to the Consideration of the learned and reverend Heads of our Universities ) yet the strong Wits of many in this last Age have broken all these Fetters ; And have happily advanced the true Method of prosecuting Knowledge upon solid Foundations .

This is manifest in every Branch of Learning . Logick has put on a Countenance clearly different from what it appeared in formerly : How unlike is its shape in the Ars Cogitandi , Recherches de la Verite , &c. from what it appears in Smigletius , and the Commentators on Aristotle ? But to none do we owe for a greater Advancement in this Part of Philosophy , than to the incomparable Mr. Locke , Who , in his Essay concerning Humane Understanding , has rectified more received Mistakes , and delivered more profound Truths , established on Experience and Observation , for the Direction of Man's mind in the Prosecution of Knowledge , ( which I think may be properly term'd Logick ) than are to be met with in all the Volumes of the Antients . He has clearly overthrown all those Metaphysical Whymsies , which infected mens Brains with a Spice of Madness , whereby they feign'd a Knowledge where they had none , by making a noise with Sounds , without clear and distinct Significations .

Natural Philosophy is now prosecuted by Observation , Experiment , and History thereof . And indeed if we consider it rightly , there is really no other sort of Natural Philosophy , but this only . For by Natural Philosophy , or Physicks , do we mean any thing else , but the Knowledge of the Properties and Affections of Natural Bodies ? And is this to be obtain'd any otherwise , than by Experiment and Observation ? Can any Man Dispute me into the Knowledge of the Magnet's Attraction , Direction and Variation ; or of the Phaenomena of the Mercurial Baroscope without Tryal and Experiment ? Can any Arguments prove that a little Sulphur , Nitre , and Charcole should produce such a quick and strong Blast as Gunpowder , before they be actually put together and tryed ? Men might have disputed to all Eternity , before their Gibberish could discover the Use of that ordinary despicable Substance , Iron-Ore : To which , for ought I see , ( as a most ingenious Author has observ'd ) we are beholding for all the Politure and Plenty ; all the Learning , State , and Magnificence of the World , beyond the Rudeness , Wants , and Ignorance of the ancient savage Americans : Whose Natural Endowments and Provisions equal those of the most flourishing and polite Nations ; But they wanted the Advantagious Uses of this contemptible Mineral . So that he , who first discovered the Use of that one poor Mine ; or Tubalcain , that first taught the way of working in Iron , may be deservedly celebrated as the Father of Arts , and Author of most of the Conveniences of Human Life .

I know some will say , that by Natural Philosophy is meant not only the Knowledge of the Properties and Uses of Natural Bodies ; but also the Assgning the true Reasons or Causes of these Properties . But in this Particular we are to proceed with great Caution . I know the Mind of man is of that inquisitive , prying Nature ; that upon any Appearance offer'd to the Senses , it immediately falls to the search after the Cause producing this Effect . But indeed in Natural Disquisitions , 't is generally ( I may say almost alwayes ) to no purpose . We may make plausible Conjectures , and some sort of feasible Guesses ; but others perhaps may make others , and these also equally probable . But these deserve not the Name of Natural Philosophy ; they serve only for Chat and Diversion . For the omnipotent Contriver of the Universe has order'd Natures Operations to be performed by such ●ine Springs , secret Motions , and inexplicable Ways ; that Man in this Life may well despair of attaining the intimate Knowledge thereof ; and must therefore content himself with the Contemplation of plain matter of Fact , in which he cannot be deceived . But yet , that we may not wholly suppress this inquisitive Humour , but may only keep it within just Bounds : It will be granted , That whatever immediate Cause can be assigned to an Effect ; and it can be proved so to be by some convincing Experiments ; and these be often repeated , and diligently examn'd , and found to agree and conspire together ; we may be allow'd to found thereon an Hypothesis or Supposal of this Cause , but no more . We must not positively establish it as the undoubted , adequate Cause ; for this we may miss after our most diligent Inquiry . However the Experiments we use and demonstrate to sense , for the establishing our Hypothesis , shall be allowed as unquestionable Verities ; and shall be embraced as so many Steps of Advancement in the Knowledge of Nature .

But of the Uncertainty of Assigning Natural Causes I shall give but one Instance , and that perhaps as strong as any we shall meet with in Philosophy . We are apt to think , that the Cause of the Suspension of the Mercury in the Torricellian Experiment is undoubtedly the Gravitation of the Air : And we prove it by a most convincing Experiment ; for putting the Baroscope into the Pneumatick Engine , exhaust the Air , and the Mercury immediately subsides . But when we consider it a little farther , we shall find , That hereby we have obtaind little more certain Knowledge , than plainly the matter of Fact of this latter Experiment , and not the adequate Cause of the first Experiment enquired after . For we can only conclude from hence , that the Equipoise of Liquors is the Cause of the Mercury's Suspension : But what is the Cause of this Equipoise of Liquors , or the Cause of the Gravitation of any Liquors , or any Bodies ? That is , What is the Cause of Gravity in general is clearly unknown to us ; and consequently the ultimate Cause of the Mercury's Suspension is not hereby discovered . 'T is true indeed , by this Experiment we have most probably arriv'd at the Knowledge of one Link more in the Chain of Natural Causes ; but this is not conclusive ; this puts not an end to the Enquiry : For so if one looking at a Pendulum Clock should enquire , Why the Pendulum does not cease by degrees from vibrating ? And he were answered , That it is kept in motion by the next immediate Wheel that beats on the Pallats : And this were offer'd to be proved by Experiment ; for stop the motion of this Wheel , and the Pendulum soon ceases : Would he not presently be satisfied , and go away secure , that he had discovered the Cause of the Continuation of the Pendulum's Motion ? And yet certainly he has mistaken one single Link for the whole Chain . For if he proceeded farther ; and had enquired , What moved this Wheel ? He would find , the next Wheel , and so onwards to the Weight or Spring . But here he 's at a Loss ; for what moves them , is absolutely unknown .

As to most other Reasons in Natural Philosophy , that usually pass as satisfactory , and are received as Accounts of Nature's Proceedings : We shall generally find them little more , than farther Illustrations of the Matter enquired after in some different Words . Thus if it be asked , What is the Reason the Sun casts a shadow from some Bodies , viz. those we call opaque , and none from others , viz. Transparent Bodies ? 'T is answer'd , Because by the opaque Body the Rays of the Sun are stopt in their Progress , and hindred from enlighting that Part of the Ground or Floor that is behind the Body : In the Transparent Body the Rays pass freely . This would be taken by several as deep Reasoning ; and yet is really no more than Tautology ; as if we should say , the Sun casts a Shadow , Because he casts a Shadow . But it gives no Account of the Opacity of one Body , and Transparency of another , which truly the Question requires . If we ask , How Fire burns ? 'T is answered , by exciting a violent Motion in the Parts of the Combustible Matter : Which indeed is no more than the same thing in different Words . But how Motion is excited or communicated by one Body to another , is absolutely inexplicable . Yet these Kind of Verbal Reasons do generally pass in Talk , and serve to amuse as well as the best .

Since therefore we cannot expect to arrive at the intimate Knowledge of Natures Operations : Let us apply our selves to know as much of Her , as we may be certain of . And this only is in Matters of Experiment and Tryal ; wherein by the infallible Guidance of our Sences , we cannot be deceived . For tho , Experimentum periculosum , be an ancient Aphorism ; yet we must consider of what Experiments it was pronounced , viz. of those in Medicine and Disease . It agrees not to all , when diligently enquired into , and often repeated . But when we meet with any Experiment that is thus fallacious , we are not to rely on it ; yet of this we may be sure , and lay it down as a discover'd Certainty , that sometimes it hits , sometimes it misses ; and in this Truth we cannot be deceived , seeing we have so often found it .

But I have lanch'd out thus far , before I was aware : I must recover my self , and beg Pardon both for this Digression , and for telling you Things which you very well know already , at the same time when I offer you a Petition . But my Desire of propagating this useful Method of Philosophy will excuse my Fault , and at the same time will recommend me the more to your Favour , who are the great Patrons thereof , and in Account whereof your Name is deservedly celebrated all over Europe .

Permit me therefore to lay this Offering at your Feet , it being the Explication of one of the most noble Instruments of Experimental Philosophy . Not that I think thereby to add any think considerable to the vast Treasure of Curiosities you already possess : But that I may have an Opportunity of declaring to the World , how much I am

Your Devoted Humble Servant , WILLIAM MOLYN●UX . April 17. 1690.

ADMONITION TO THE READER .

BEFORE the Reader proceed to the following Sheets , I desire he may take notice ;

First , That he is not to expect Geometrical Strictness in several Particulars of this Doctrine . I say , in several Particulars ; For many there are , which will bear the most precise Exactness : Kepler , Cavallerius , Herigon , Dechales , Honoratus Faber , Gregorius , Barrow , and other Authors have taken this Liberty ; as being more desirous of shewing in gross the Properties of Glasses and their Effects in Telescopes , than of affecting a Nicety , which would be of little Use in Practice . Thus we shall find in what follows , that many Lines are supposed equal , which strictly taken are really not so ; but yet are so very little different , that for all use , and ease of Demonstration , they may be taken as equal . Thus also we suppose very small Angles and their Sines to be proportional ; which precisely is not so , but is so to the smallest and most insensible Difference . Thus likewise , we sometimes consider not the Glasses Thickness , but suppose it of the least Thickness imaginable , or of no Thickness at all ; which yet is false , but does hardly prejudice any Demonstration . For Dioptricks being a part of mixt Mathematicks , conversant about material Lines ( or Rays of Light ) and the refractive Power of a corporeal Glass , cannot be delivered with that 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 Geometrica requisite in abstracted Mathematicks .

Secondly , The Reader will find some Corollaries and Scholiums hereafter delivered , which of themselves more properly might have constituted Propositions . But these did not occur so readily in the course of the Work , And therefore I chose rather to add them as Corollaries than change the number of Propositions and Citations . Of this kind are Corol. ad Prop. 8. Corol. ad Prop. 15. &c.

Thirdly , I have presumed to intitle this Work Dioptrica Nova , as being indeed almost wholly new . Very little being borrowed from others , but what is requisite to shew the former Methods of Authors in demonstrating their Propositions , and to keep up the Consecution and Series of the Propositions of this Book . Besides , I can say , that the Geometrical Method of calculating a Rays Progress , which in many particulars is so amply delivered hereafter , is wholly new , and never before publish'd . And for the first Intimation thereof , I must acknowledg my self obliged to my worthy Friend Mr. Flamsteed . Astron. Reg. who had it from some unpublished Papers of Mr. Gascoignes .

Lastly , I declare , That if in any thing hereafter delivered , I have made any Mistakes , or not so clearly expressed my self upon Intimation thereof , I shall be most ready to retract . And therefore if in any thing I have slip'd , or made a false Step , I desire the ingenious and candid Reader either to inform me thereof , and upon Conviction , I shall submit ; or else that he would freely pardon the Error ; Humanum est .

Tho I had begun , and made some Progress in this Work in Latin ; yet I thought it convenient ( at least for the present ) to alter my Design : There being nothing in this Part of Mathematicks ever yet publish'd in English . And I am sure there are many ingenious Heads , great Geometers , and Masters in Mathematicks , who are not so well skill'd in Latin .

If Forreigners may think this Work deserves their Perusal ; in time perhaps I may satisfie them .

And because I have studied to be as plain as possibly I could , I have chosen rather to be prolix in many Particulars , than leave any Ambiguity to the most ordinary Mathematician . And therefore in demonstrating , I often repeat several Steps tho the least altered ; that all things may lye as plain as possible . And on this Account I hope , the curious and profound Geometers will pardon me ; I know they are used to what is concise and closely put together , much expressed in a little : But this Method suits not every Reader : And I have chosen to accommodate mine to the plainest Capacities .

Lastly , in this practical kind of Mathematicks , I desire the Reader to have frequent recourse to Experiments , for these illustrate the Theory and make many things clear , which otherwise will pass obscurely .

I use the common Notes of Algebra , with two or three new ones introduced by Branker or Dr. Pell , such as

÷ Signifies Divided by , ÷ 2 signifies Divided by 2.

2 With a Line over it signifies the absolute Number 2.

* Is the Note of Multiplication or drawing into .

In the Demonstrations the larger and lesser Margins or Columns are of the same use as is expressed in Dr. Pell's Algebra . To which I refer the Reader .

April 17. 1690. WILL . MOLYNEUX .

DIOPTRICKS .

Definitions .

1. TAb. 1. Fig. 1. Tab. 1. Fig. 1. A B C D is a Body of Glass , E F M is perpendicular to A B : suppose G F a Ray of Light falling inclined on the Glass A D , the Point F is called the Point of Incidence ,

II. The Angle E F G comprehended between the Perpendicular and the Ray , is the Angle of Incidence ( with Barrow , &c. ) tho by many Dioptrick Writers 't is called the Angle of Inclination ; and its Complement A F G , is usually by them called the Angle of Incidence . But I shall use the Terms Inclination and Incidence promiscuously , always designing thereby the Angle comprehended between the Perpendicular E F and the Ray GF .

Experiments .

I. GF is a Ray of Light falling inclined on the Glass ABCD ; this Ray coming out of a Rare Medium , as Air , into a Dense Medium , as Glass , does not proceed on its direct Course in a streight Line towards I ; but at the Point of Incidence F 't is bent or refracted towards the Perpendicular F M , and becomes the refracted Ray FH .

II. At H is its Point of Incidence again , from Glass a Dense Medium to Air a Rare , and in this Passage , 't is refracted from the Perpendicular H Z ; so that instead of proceeding directly strait in F H L , 't is refracted from the Perpendicular H Z , and becomes H K : So that if the Surface A B be parallel to the Surface D C , the Ray becomes again as if it had not been refracted ; for now HK runs parallel to G F. The natural Reason of this Refraction is variously assigned by divers , and is properly of a Physical consideration ; and what is offered therein , is little more than Hypothetical Conjecture . I shall not therefore mix Guesses with Demonstration : The Matter of Fact is manifest from Ten Thousand repeated Experiments , and this is sufficient to my purpose . But yet there is such an ingenious Hypothesis concerning this Matter , published in the Acta Eruditorum Lipsi●e , Anno 1682. Mens . Iunii , pag. 185. by the Learned and Ingenious G. G. Lebnutzius , that I cannot omit inserting it in the Second Part of this Work , Chap. 1.

III. The Ray that falls perpendicular ( as suppose E F a Ray ) passes unrefracted , but all inclined Rays are refracted .

Definitions .

III. The Angle I F H , Ta 1. Fi. 1 and K H L comprehended by the Ray directly prolonged , and the refracted Ray is the Angle of Refraction .

IV. The Angle HFM or ZHK comprised between the refracted Ray and Perpendicular is the refracted Angle .

V. Diverging Rays are those that spread and separate the farther from each other , as they flow farther from the Object , Ta. 1. Fig. 2. Ta. 1. Fi. 2. B is a radiating Point , A B , D B , C B , E B , are diverging Rays .

VI. Converging Rays are those that approach nigher each other , till they cross , and then become Diverging . Tab. 1. Fig. 3. Tab. 1. Fi. 3. A , B , are two Radiating Points in the Object AB , the Rays CA , CB , do Converge , till they cross in C , and then they become Diverging D C , E C.

VII . Parallel Rays are those that flowing from one and the same Point of a remote Object pass at the same distance , as to sense : But this is not to be strictly taken ; for then the Rays flowing from one and the same Point of an Object , cannot be parallel , for they always diverge : Yet when an Object is at such a great distance , and that parcel of Rays which is considered , is so small , that their Divergence is little or nothing considerable , these Rays are said to be parallel , Tab. 1. Fig. 4. Ta. 1. Fi. 4. A is a Point in an Object sending forth its diverging Rays A D , A B , A C , A E ; let B C be the breadth of the Pupil or breadth of an Optick Glass : Here if the Point A be so remote , and B C be so small , that the Parcel of Rays B A C , do insensibly run parallel , then these are said to be parallel Rays .

VIII . Those radiating Points or Objects are said to be remote , whose distance from the Eye or Glass is so great , that the breadth of the Pupil or Glass , in respect thereto , is inconsiderable .

IX . Those radiating Points or Objects are said to be nigh , when there is a sensible proportion between the Pupils or Glasses breadth , and the distance ; so that the Rays flowing from any single Point thereof do not run parallel to each other , but diverge considerably in respect of the Pupils or Glasses breadth .

Experiments .

V. Ta. 1. Fig. 5. Tab. 1. Fi. 5. Z X Y is a Body of Glass , H B G is perpendicular to Z X , A B is a Ray falling on this Glass , and the Angle of Inclination or Incidence is H B A = D B G , Kepler tells us , that under 30 deg , of Inclination from Air to Glass , the Angle of Refraction D B C is ● of the Inclination , therefore the refracted Angle CBG is ⅔ of the Inclination . Wherefore we lay down the following Proportions , as confirmed by Kepler's Experiments , and usually retain'd by most Optick Writers .

∠ Inclination DBG : refracted ∠ CBG : : 3 : 2

∠ Inclination DBG : ∠ Refraction DBC : : 3 : 1

∠ Refraction DBC : refracted ∠ CBG : : 1 : 2

V. But suppose the Ray CB to proceed from Glass to Air ; at B 't is refracted from the Perpendicular B H , and becomes B A ; here the Inclination is C B G = H B I , and then

∠ Incidence H B I : refracted ∠ H B A : : 2 : 3

∠ Inclination HBI : ∠ Refraction IBA : : 2 : 1

∠ Refraction I B A : refracted ∠ H B A : : 1 : 3

These Propositions in the 4th . and 5th . Experiments we shall retain in the following Demonstrations , for the Ease and Plainness thereof . But in Calculation we shall observe the Proportion that follows in the 6th . Experiment .

VI. But the most Learned and Ingenious Mr. Isaac Newton of Cambridge discovered by most accurate Experiments , that these Proportions of Kepler were not sufficiently exact : For Des Cartes first found , that Refractions were not to be measured by the Proportion of Angles , but by the Proportion of Sines . See his Dioptricks Cap. 2. Sec. 7. And therefore Mr. Newton apply'd himself to discover the Proportion of the Sines , and found , That from Air to Glass , the Sine A K or D F of the Angle of Incidence A B K or D B G : is to the Sine I H or C G of the refracted Angle C B G or I B H : : As 300 to 193. ( or near , as 14. to 9. ) And on the contrary , that from Glass to Air , the Sine of the Incidence : Is to the Sine of the refracted Angle : : as 193 : to 300 , or as 9 to 14. But the same Mr. Newton in his Dissertations concerning Colours and Light , publish'd in the Philosophical Transactions , has at large demonstrated , that the Rays of Light are not all Homogeneous , or of the same sort , but of different Forms and Figures , so that some are more refracted than others , tho they have the same or equal Inclinations on the Glass : And therefore there can be no constant Proportion setled between the Sines of the Incidence and of the refracted Angles . But the Proportion that comes nearest Truth , for the middle and strong Rays of Light , is nearly as 300 to 193 , or 14 to 9.

VII . As the Sine of the Angle of any one Inclination : To the Sine of its refracted Angle : : So is the Sine of any other Inclination : To the Sine of its refracted Angle . Therefore by Experiment , finding the Proportion of the Sines of any one Inclination , and of its correspondent refracted Angle , this Proportion will hold in any other Inclination or Incidence . See Des Cartes Dioptr. Cap. 2. Sec. 7. Mersenni Optic . Lib. 7. Prop. 12. Dechales Dioptr. Lib. 1. Prop. 1 , 2 , &c. See also Cap. 1. Sec. 4. Part 2.

Wherefore the Incidence or Inclination of a Ray being given , 't is easie finding the refracted Angle ; for the Proportion is , as 300 : To 193 : : ( or as 14 to 9 ) So the Sine of the Incidence : To the Sine of the refracted Angle , from Air to Glass .

Or Mechanically thus , A B K being the given Angle of Incidence , by a Sector make the Sine there of K A or D F 300 parts ( or 14 ) and take 193 ( or 9 ) of the same parts , and make therewith C G or H I the Sine of the refracted Angle ; then draw B C , this is the progress of the Ray A B after it enters the Glass .

VIII . The Progress of Light through different Mediums is reciprocal : That is , Tab. 1. Fig. 1. Ta. 1. Fi. 1 Suppose the luminous Point G in Air , to send from it the Ray G F upon the Glass A D ; this Ray by the Glass is refracted into F H within the Glass . Let us now imagin the Point H within the Glass , to be a luminous Point , ●ending out from it self the Ray H F : This Ray upon its Emersion from Glass into Air , instead of proceeding directly to N , is refracted into F G. And so likewise supposing the Luminous Point G , to send its Ray G F , which after a double Refraction on each Surface of the Glass proceeds first in F H , and afterwards in H K ; if we conceive K a Luminous Point , sending its Ray K H on the Glass ; this Ray after a double Refraction on the two Surfaces of the Glass shall be refracted first into H F and then into F G ; taking the same reciprocal Progress in both Cases .

And this is not so properly proved from Experiment ( tho that also does abundantly and most exactly confirm this Truth ) but 't is manifest and self-evident from the very Nature of the thing . For whatever physical Reason there is , which causes the Ray G F proceeding from Air into the Glass A D to be refracted from its direct Course F I into F H ; the same reason there must needs be to cause the Ray H F , proceeding from the Glass A D into the open Air , to be refracted from its direct Course F N into F G. For doubtless the Refraction proceeds from the Disparity of the Mediums ( but how or in what manner t is needless to enquire in this place ) . Now the difference of the Mediums on their two determining Surfaces , or a● the Point of Incidence F , continues the same , let the Ray proceed from which of them soever . For there is as great a reciprocal Difference between Glass and Air , as between Air and Glass ; and consequently the Refraction must needs be reciprocal . Vid. Barrow , Lect. Opt. 3. Sect. 3.

Definitions .

X. Whatever Line is perpendicular as to the Tangent of any Curve Line at the point of Contract , is said to be perpendicular to the same Curve , Tab. 1. Fig. 6 Ta. 1. Fi. 6 D E being a Tangent to the Arch of a Circle A B C , and F G being perpendicular to D E at the point of Contract F , the Line F G is also perpendicular to the Curve A B C.

XI . A Line that is inclined to the Tangent of any Curve , is inclined to the Curve ; and the Angle of Inclination to the Curve , is the same with the Angle of Inclination to the Tangent , F H is inclined to the Curve A B C , by the Angle H G F , according to which Angle the same Line H F is inclined to the Tangent D E.

XII . K being the Centre of the Circle A B C , draw B K parallel to H F , the Arch BF measures the Inclination of the Line H F to the Curve A B C , or to the Tangent D E : For the Angle B K F is equal to the Angle H F G. ( Pr. 29. 1. Eucl.

XIII . The Rays that proceed from the middle Point of an Object , when the Glass is exposed directly before it , are said to fall directly on the Glass ; but the Rays that flow from the Collateral Points of an Object , are said to fall obliquely on the Glass . Ta. 2. Fig. 1. Tab. 2. Fi. 1. ABC is a distant Object , sending parallel Rays from each of its Points on the Glass G K , exposed directly before it . Here the Rays flowing from the Point B , are said to fall directly on the Glass , as B G , B H , B K. But the Rays flowing from the Point A , or any other Collateral Point , are said to fall obliquely on the Glass , as A G , A H , A K. And here 't is to be noted , that the Point B is said to be directly exposed to the Glass , when the Axis of the Glass EHB directly produced , meets this Point B : But all other Points in the Object are Collateral Points ; for tho they may be directly exposed to some other Points in the Glass , yet direct and collateral , are here to be understood only in respect of the Glass Axis or Vertex . Or in short , that Point in an Object is said to be direct , the Axis of whose Cone of Rays is coincident or the same with the Axis of the Glass ; that Point in an Object is said to be oblique or collateral , the Axis of whose Cone of Rays falls obliquely to the Axis of the Glass . Vid. Def. 17. 18.

XIV . Suppose the Glass GK exposed in the Hole of a Shutter in a dark Room , and that thereby the Object ABC were represented on a white Paper in FED ( how this is done we shall see hereafter . ) From each Point of this Object there falls a parcel of Rays on the Surface of the whole Glass ; thus from the Point B , there falls B G , B H , B K. This parcel of Rays is called A Cone of Rays , having its Vertex in the Point of the Object B , and its Base on the Glass .

XV. To this Cone of Rays there is another Correspondent on tother side the Glass G E K , which has its Base likewise on the Glass , and its Vertex in a correspondent Point E of the Representation .

XVI . Both these Cones together ( that is B G E K ) are called A Pencil of Rays .

XVII . Each Pencil of Rays has one Ray amongst the rest , which is called its Axis . The Axis of the direct Pencil B G E K is the Ray B H E , which falls perpendicularly on the Glass , and passes through it unrefracted . But the Axis of any of the oblique Pencils , as A G F K is some certain Ray , as A H F , which , tho it fall obliquely , and consequently is refracted by the Glass , yet being refracted from the perpendicular at its Egress from the Glass , as much as it was refracted towards the Perpendicular , at its Ingress into the Glass ; it may be taken as not refracted at all ; but that part of this Axis which is before the Glass ( viz. AH between the Object and Glass ) and that part of it which is behind the Glass ( viz. HF between the Representation and the Glass ) do run parallel to each other , or rather in one Right Line ; that part of it only which is within the Glass , being bent out of its strait Course . And that in each oblique Pencil of Rays ( for of the direct Pencil 't is manifest ) there is such a certain Ray thus affected , shall appear more fully hereafter . And here we are to distinguish between the Axis of a Pencil of Rays , and the Axis of the Glass . See Def. 18.

The Pencils of Rays from various Points are expressed differently in the Schemes ( viz. by Lines or small Points ) for better Illustration , and easier distinguishing their Progress .

XVIII . Tab. 2. Fig. 3. Tab. 2. Fig. 3. A E is a Body of Glass , whose Surface A C D is the Segment of a Sphere , the Centre whereof is F. K B a Ray falling on the Glass ; through the Centre F draw C F R parallel to K B , C F R is the Axis , and the Point C the Pole or Vertex of the Glass : Or more generally thus , The Axis of a Glass is that Right Line , which , being produced both ways , falls on the Centres of the Two Spherick Surfaces ( if the Glass be a double Convex , or double Concave ) or which being produced both ways , falls on the Centre of the Spherick Surface , and perpendicular to the plain Surface , ( if the Glass be a Plano-Convex , or Plano-Concave . ) So that the Axis of a Convex-Glass passes perpendicular to the thickest part of the compleat Glass ; and of a Concave to the thinnest part of the compleat Glass . Why Compleat is added , vid. Second Part , Chap. 4. Sect. 4. The Poles of a Glass are those two Points in the Glass through which the Axis passes .

'T is needless to define what is meant by a Convex or Concave-Glass , &c. for every one knows this already .

XIX . The Ray K B falling on the Convexity A C D , parallel to the Axis C R , and being refracted to B R ; so that now it runs no more parallel , but crosses the Axis in R : the Point R is called the Point of Concourse , or of Convergency , or the Focus .

1. Supposition .

That from every Physical Point in an Object Rays of Light are diffused in direct Lines through the Hemisphere round it . Tab. 2. Fig. 3. Ta. 2. Fi. 2. Thus the Point b in the Object a b c projects from it the Rays b d , b d , b d , wherever they are not hindered by some Opaque Body intervening . And these Rays are strait Lines , whilst they pass through a Diaphanous Uniform Medium . But here we are to conceive a radiating or luminous Point , not in a strict Mathematical Sense , but in a Physical , considering it as the least part imaginable in an Object .

2. Supposition .

That the Axis of the Eye , Glass , or Glasses , exposed before an Object be Perpendicular to the Plane of the Object ; or that the Eye , Glass , or Glasses exposed before an Object , are supposed directly exposed thereto .

3. Supposition or Admonition .

Because in many Authors of Opticks , much Perplexity and Error arises from their confused mentioning of Rays , and applying to them the Epithets of Diverging , and Converging , and Crossing ; without expressing clearly whether they mean Rays from one and the s●me Point in an Object , or from Different Points . Therefore we are to consider in the ensuing Doctrin , whether the Name Rays do relate to those from one and the same Point , or from different Points . And that this may be the more easie , I do generally express the Rays from the same Point to be such , that is , I call them Rays from the same Point .

PROP. I. PROBL.

Tab. 2. Fig. 3. A E is a Body of Glass , whose Surface A B C D is the Segment of a Sphere , the Centre whereof is F. K B is a Ray of Light parallel to the Axis C F R. There being given C F the Radius of the Convexity , and B O the Distance of the Ray from the Axis ; 't is required to find the Point R , wherein this Ray , after one sole Refraction at the Point of Incidence B , crosses the Axis C R.

Produce K B at pleasure to H , and draw B F X at pleasure .

1. In the Right Angled Triangle B O F , we have given B O and B F , whence we may find the Angle B F O = H B F , which is the Incidence .

2. Then say , as 300 : to 193 : : ( or as 14 to 9 ) so the Sine H I of the Incidence H B F : to the Sine Z L of the refracted Angle R B F ; then H B F − R B F = H B R = B R F , which is the Angle of Refraction .

3. In the Triangle R B F , all the Angles and one of the Sides B F are known , whence we may find F R : Which was required .

Example .

FB = FC = 2 Inches , or 20000 Parts , an Inch being 10000. B O = ½ an Inch , or 5000 such Parts . The Angle of Incidence or Inclination B F O = H B F will be found 14° 29 ' . And the refracted Angle FBR shall be 9° 15 ' . Wherefore B R F = H B R = 5° 14 ' . Whence the Line FR is found 35341. Then R F + F C = 35341 + 20000 = 55341 = C R.

Corollary .

From this Calculation 't is manifest , That in this Case the Point of Concourse R is distant from the Pole of the Glass C , almost a Diameter and half of the Convexity : For a Diameter and half is 60000 , and CR is 55341 , which wants only about ● of 60000.

Scholium 1.

This Proposition is the 34th . of Keplers Dioptricks , and in him and other Opticians , 't is usually thus expressed and demonstrated .

The Rays that are parallel to the Axis , and fall so on the Convex Surface of a Glass , and at their Ingress are refracted , and so pass forward in Glass only , are united with the Axis at the distance of almost a Diameter and half of the Co●vexi●y , supposing the Glass to be a Portion of no more than abo●● to degrees of its Convexity , or ( which is the same thing ) supposing the Inclination of the most extreme Ray to be but 15 degrees .

This Limitation of 15 degrees Inclination is added , because above 15 degrees Sines and Angles are not proportional , but under 15 degrees they are nighly proportional , a double Angle having a double Sine , a treble Angle a treble Sine , &c.

Wherefore they thus demonstrate this Proposition . Tab. 2. Fig. 3. Ta 2. Fi. 3. B F C = H B F is the Inclination , H B R = B R F is the Angle of Refraction , R B F the refracted Angle . But by Experiment 4. R B F the refracted Angle : is to B R F the Angle of Refraction : : as 2 to 1. Therefore the Sines of these Angles , being under 15 degrees , shall be as 2 : to 1. But in plain Triangles the Sines of the Angles and the Sides subtending these Angles are proportional ; therefore the Side R F is double F B or F C. Wherefore R C is thrice F C , or equal to three Semidiameters : Which was to be demonstrated .

Scholium 2.

But a neater way of Expressing and Demonstrating this Proposition is thus .

When a Ray falls on a Spherick Glass , and afterwards it being but once refracted , crosses the Axis . It shall be , as the Sine of the Angle of Refraction : to the Sine of the Angle of Inclination : : so the Radius of the Glass's Sphere : to the refracted Ray.

Tab. 3. Fig. 1. Ta. 3. Fi. 1. Let b e ● be the Convex Surface of the Glass A D E , k b a Ray of Light , f the Centre of the Convexity , b f c the Angle of Inclination , b o the Sine of the Inclination , b r the refracted Ray meeting the Axis in r , h b r = b r c = to the Angle of Refraction ; draw f e parallel to b r , then e f c is equal to b r c , and e c is the Sine of the Angle of Refraction . And by reason of the similar Triangles b r o , e f c , it shall be e c : b o : : e f : b r. Which was to be demonstrated .

Wherefore supposing that from Air to Glass , the Sine of the Angle of Inclination : be to the Sine of the refracted Angle : : as 300 : to 193 : then the Sine of the Inclination shall be : to the Sine of the Angle of Refraction : : as 300 : to 300 − 193 = 107. Because the Angle of Refraction is equal to the difference between the Angle of Inclination and the refracted Angle ▪ And Sines and Angles being ( in these small Angles ) proportional . It shall be , As 107 : 300 : : so Radius of the Convexity : to the Concourse of the refracted Ray with the A●is .

It shall also be , As 107 : 193 : : so the Radius of the Convexity to the Concourse of the refracted Ray beyond the Centre of the Sphere .

For Tab. 3. Fig. 2. Ta. 3. Fi. 2. 1 e a c : f a c : : 300 : 193 Dividing the First 2 e a c − f a c : f a c : : 300 − 193 : 193 That is 3 e a f : f a c : : 107 193

Moreover , 4 e a f = f b c = Angle of Refraction . From 3 and 4 5 f b c : f a c : : 107 : 193 But in the ▵ a b c 6 f b c : f a c : : R a d. = a c : c b From 5 and 6 7 107 : 193 : : a c : c b = To the Concourse of the Ray beyond the Centre of the Sphere c. Which was to be demonstrated .

PROP. II. PROBL.

A Plano-Convex Glass a f b Tab. 4. Fig. 1. Ta. 4. Fi. 1. being exposed to a distant Object with its Convex side towards it , and receiving the Ray cd parallel to the Axis ez , 't is required to determin the Point of Concourse z , from these Data , f h the Glasses thickness , q f the Radius of the Convexity , and d g the distance of the Ray c d from the Axis e z.

The same Problem is proposed from the same Data , for the plane Side towards the Object .

But first for the Convex-Side to the Object : The Mechanical Construction is thus , Tab. 4. Fig. 1. Produce the Ray c d through the Glass at pleasure to m. And from d the Point of Incidence draw the Line d q to the Centre of the Convexity ; this is the Perpendicular , and the Angle q d m the Incidence or Inclination . On d as a● Centre at any distance strike the Arch m o q , in which make mn the Sine of the Angle of Incidence , to o p the Sine of the refracted Angle , as 14 to 9 ( or o p 9 such parts as m n is 14 , which is easily done by the Sector ) the Line d k o shall be the Line in which the Ray would proceed ; if the Medium of Glass were continued so far .

But because in this Line at k the Ray emerges from the plain Surface of the Glass a dense Medium into Air a rare Medium , from k raise k x perpendicular to the plain Surface a h b , and on k , as a Centre at any distance strike the Arch x u s ; then the Angle x k u is the Incidence of the Ray passing from Glass to Air.

Making therefore t u the Sine of this Angle , to r s the Sine of the second refracted Angle from the Perpendicular as 9 to 14 , the Line drawn from k through the Point s , and produced to the Axis at z , shews the Progress of the Ray in the Air after its Emersion from Glass : Wherefore the Point z is determined in the Axis .

Trigonometrical Calculation .

But this Point z , or the Measure of the Line f z may be found more accurately by Calculation thus . In the Triangle qdg Right Angled at g are given q d and d g , to find the Angle of Incidence d q g , and the Side q g. Then q f − h f = q h , and q g − q h = h g = d i.

First then , because the Ray passes at d from a rare Medium into a dense , it shall be refracted towards the Perpendicular d q. Wherefore the Analogy is , As 14 : to 9 : : so the Sine of the Angle of Incidence d q f ( = m d q ) : to the Sine of the refracted Angle o d q ( that is k d l ) . But m d q ( = i d l ) − k d l = i d k = x k u , d m and k x being parallel : ) And this is the Angle of Incidence as the Ray passes from Glass to Air.

Secondly , In the little Right Angled Triangle i d k , the Side d i , and the Angle i d k are known ; whence the Side i k may be found , then ih ( = dg ) − i k = k h.

Thirdly , Because at k the Ray emerges from a Dense into a Rare Medium , it shall be refracted from the Perpendicular kx ; and the Analogy shall be , as 9 : to 14 : : so the Sine of the Angle of Incidence x k u : to the Sine of the Second refracted Angle x k s ( = k z h , k x , and h z being Parallel )

Fourthly , In the Right Angled Triangle k h z , the Side k h , and all the Angles are known , whence the Side h z , and consequently f z ( = f h + h z ) the Distance of the Point of Concourse from the Pole of the Glass f is discovered .

When the plain Side is turned to the Object , the Method is the same , only shorter ; for Tab. 5. Fig. 1. Ta. 5. Fi. 1. in the Right Angled Triangle q d g , we have q d and d g to find d q g = u d x , the Incidence , and the Side q g : Then q f − q g = g f. Next , As 9 : to 14 : : ( or as 193 : to 300 : : ) so the Sine of u d x : to the Sine of s d x. Ta. 4 Fi. 1. But s d x − u d x = s d u = d z g. Then in the Right Angled Triangle d z g we have d g , and the Angles to find g z. And g z − g f = f z. Which was to be found .

Scholium .

In the little Tables inserted in Tab. 4. and Tab. 5. I have given Examples at large of the Calculation of the Progress of the Ray cd , which I presume is pretty truly wrought : But if perhaps any Errors do intervene , they are easily corrected .

By these Tables we may perceive , that the Point of Concourse z is distant from the Pole of the Glass f about a Diameter of the Convexity , but not fully so much .

'T is also to be noted in Tab. 4. Fig. 1 That the Point of Concourse z , shall be less or more removed from the Pole f , according as we give the Glass less or more thickness . For 't is manifest , that the farther we let the Ray run in the Medium of Glass , after it enters it at d , before it emerges into Air at k , the farther the Point of Concourse z shall be protracted from f. Ta. 6. Fi. 1. For we may imagin the Medium of Glass continued below the Diameter of the Convexity , and then 't is evident that the Point of Concourse z shall be much more below it . But it can be no more below it than a Diameter and half . By the First Proposition hereof .

This our Second Proposition is usually found in Dioptricks thus expressed and demonstrated .

Parallel Rays falling on a Plano-Convex-Glass , are united with the Axis about the distance of a Diameter of the Convexity from the Pole of the Glass , if the Segment be but 30 Degrees .

Demonstration .

First for the plain Side towards the Object . Tab. 6. Fig. 1. Tab. 6. Fig. 1. AB is a Ray of Light falling on the Glass GL parallel to the Axis C D. C is the Centre of the Convexity G P L. Joyn C B ; the Angle of Incidence or Inclination is BCD , the Angle of Refraction is E B D or B D C.

Wherefore in the Triangle B C D , the Angle B C D being double the Angle BDC ( For by Kepler's Experiments , which are follow'd by most Authors , from Glass to Air , the Angle of Incidence : is to the Angle of Refraction : : as 2 : to 1. ) the Side B D shall be double the Side B C ; the Angles and Sides or Sines under 15 Degrees being proportional ; but D P is almost equal to B D ( for the Thickness and Breadth of the Glass , in Optick Glasses especially in Glasses of Long Foci , are inconsiderable ) , therefore D P is double C P. Which was to be Demonstrated .

Secondly , for the Convex-side towards the Object . Tab. 6. Ta. 6. Fi. 2. Fig. 2. A B C D is a Plano-Convex Glass ( I have here expressed it of this thickness , to shew the Angles and Progress of the Ray more plainly , tho really this great Thickness hinders the Exactness of the Demonstration ; for the Glass is to be supposed of the most inconsiderable Thickness ) F is the Centre of the Convexity . K H is a Ray falling thereon , parallel to the Axis E G. This Ray , ( after it has suffered a Double Refraction , one at its Ingress from Air into Glass at H towards the Perpendicular H F , by which it becomes the Refracted Ray H M , and another Refraction at its Egress from Glass to Air at M from the Perpendicular P M , by which , instead of going forward towards R , it becomes the Refracted Ray M G ) at G crosses the Axis , so that G E is the Diameter of the Convexity A E B.

For the Incidence or Inclination of the Ray K H is L H F , of which Angle there is taken off ⅓ L H M , for the Angle of Refraction from Air to Glass is ⅓ of the Incidence ( by Exper. 4. ) If therefore the Ray had proceeded onwards in Glass towards R , it had crossed the Axis at a Diameter' and half ( by the foregoing Proposition ) , but at its egress into Air at M , it is again refracted from the Perpendicular P M by the Angle R M G = ½ P M R. The Angle of Refraction R M G from Glass to Air , being ½ the Incidence P M R ( by Exper. 5. ) But P M R is equal to L H M. Wherefore the first Angle of Incidence LHF by this Double Refraction , has lost first ⅓ of it self LHM , and again ½ of this Third RMG : But ● and of ● is equal to ½ , wherefore the Angle of Incidence is diminished by its Half .

Let us therefore consider the Glass A. B , Tab. 6. Fig. 3. Ta. ● Fi. 3. without respect to its Thickness , or to the Refraction the Ray suffers at its egress on the lower side of the Glass into Air. But let us imagin , that by the first Refraction , the Ray were brought nigher the Perpendicular H F by half the Angle of Incidence L H F , and we shall find , that then the Ray shall cross the Axis at G ; so that GE shall be the Diameter of the Convexity . For LHG or G H F is equal to ½ LHF or HFE the Incidence , but H F E is equal to G H F + H G F ( 32. 1. Eucl. ) therefore GHF and HGF are equal , each of them being ½ HFE , and consequently their opposite Side H F and G F are equal . Wherefore GE is the Diameter of the Convexity A E B. Which was to be Demonstrated .

Corollary .

In Plano-Convex Glasses , As 300 − 193 = 107 : To 193 : : So Radius of the Convexity : To the refracted Ray taken to its Concourse with the Axis ; which in Glasses of large Spheres and small Segments is almost equal to the Distance of the Focus taken in the Axis . Tab. 6. Fig. 1. Ta. 6. Fi. 1.

Demonstration .

The Inclination = A B C = O B E = B C D = 193. Refracted Angle = O B D = 300 Angle of Refraction = E B D = B D P = O B D − O B E = 300 − 193 = 107.

In the ▵ B D C : s ∠ B D C : s ∠ B C D : : Rad. = B C : B D. That is , 107 : 193 : : BC : BD = PD in Glasses of large Spheres . Which was to be Demonstrated .

PORP . III. PROBL.

In a Double Convex-Glass ab , Tab. 7. Fig. 1. Ta. 7. Fi. 1. of equal or unequal Convexities ; Let the Centres of the Spherical Surfaces be k and q ; cd a Ray falling parallel to the Axis kqz , and being Refracted at its Ingress at d , and at its Egress at i ; 'T is required to determin the Point of its Concourse with the Axis at z , from these Data , the Radii ky , qw , of the Convexities , and gd the Distance of the Point of Incidence from the Axis .

This is so easily done by Scale and Compass from what foregoes , that I shall not insist on a farther Explication thereof , but shall shew the more certain Method of tracing the Progress of this Ray by Calculation .

Produce c d directly to e , and d i to m. We have k y + q w − w y = k q.

First therefore in the Right-angled Triangle q d g , g d and q d being given , we may find the ∠ g q d = q d e and the side q g. Then k q − q g = k g.

Secondly , In the Right angled Triangle k g d , there being given k g and g d , we may have the ∠ g k d = k d c , and the side k d.

Thirdly , As 300 : to 193 : : so S. ∠ q d e : to S. ∠ q d i.

Fourthly , q d e − q d i = e d i. And 180 − k d c − e d i = k d i.

Fifthly , In the Triangle k d i , the Angle k d i and the Sides k i , k d , being known , we have the Angle k i d = m i l. And the Angle i k d. Then g k d − i k d = q k i.

Sixthly , As 193 : to 300 : : so S. ∠ kid : to S. ∠ zil , then zil − qki = kzi.

Lastly , In the Triangle z k i , k i and all the Angles being known , we find k z , from which subtracting k y , there remains z y , which was required .

If by this Method we calculate the Progress of a Ray●through a Double Convex-Glass of equal Convexities ; and the Thickness of the Glass be little or nothing in comparison of the Radius of the Convexity ; and the Distance of the Point of Incidence from the Axis be but small , we shall find the Point of Concourse to be distant from the Glass about the Radius of the Convexity nearly .

This our Third Proposition in most Dioptrick Writers is usually thus expressed .

Parallel Rays falling on a Double Convex-Glass of equal Convexities on both sides , are united with the Axis , about the Distance of the Radius of the Convexity from the Pole of the Glass , if the Segment be but 30 Degrees .

But their Demonstrations of this Proposition are usually perplexed enough , by reason of the smallness and multiplicity of Angles , which are expressed in their Figures , as also by the Thickness of the Glass , which they are forced to represent , and yet is to be neglected in their Demonstrations . I shall give as short a Demonstration as I can , after their Method , as follows .

Tab. 7. Fig. 2. Ta. 7. Fi. 2. Let a be the Centre of the Convexity b k l , h the Centre of the Convexity b i l , d b a Ray of Light produced directly to f parallel to the Axis a h , a b e is a Right Line , and h b c is a Right Line . The first Angle of Inclination is c b d = h b f = e b f , and the perpendicular is h b. By the first Refraction the Ray is deflected from its straight course b f and becomes b g , approaching the perpendicular b h by the Angle f b g , which is ⅓ of the Inclination e b f. Produce g b directly to z. Now the Angle of Incidence on the lower Convexity bkl from Glass to Air is a b z = e b g , and the Perpendicular is a b or b e : Wherefore the Ray instead of going forwards in b g is now , by its Emersion into Air , refracted from the Perpendicular b e , by the Angle g b h , which is therefore to be equal to ½ the second Angle of Incidence e b g. by Exper. 5. and that g b h is equal to ½ e b g , I thus demonstrate ; By the Supposals in the Prop. and Common Geometry . — 1 e b f = f b h By the Fig. — 2 g b h = f b h − f b g From 1 and 2 — 3 g b h = e b f − f b g Doct. Refract . Exper. 4. — 4 f b g = e f b ⅓ e b f From 3 and 4 — 5 g b h = e b f − ⅓ e b f = ⅔ e b f Moreover by the Scheme — 6 ½ e b g = ½ e b f + ½ f b g 4 ÷ 2 — 7 ½ f b g = 16 e b f From 6 and 7 — 8 ½ e b g = ½ e b f + 16 e b f = ⅔ e b f From 5 and 8. — 9 g b h = ½ e b g

Which was to be Demonst.

Therefore it follows that the Ray by this second Refraction proceeds in hh , crossing the Axis in h the Centre of the Convexity . Which was to be demonstrated .

See the Demonstrations of this Proposition Kepleri Dioptri . Prop. 39. Herigon . Prop. 15. Dechales Pr. 21. lib. 13. Hon. Faber Prop. 43. Sec. 8. Cherubin de Orleans la Dioptr. Oculair , Prop. 2. Zahn Telescop . Fund 2. Syntag. 1. Cap. 4. Prop. 8.

Of Glasses of unequal Convexities .

As for double Convex Glasses of unequal Spheres on each Side , the foregoing Method of Calculation determines the Point of Concourse exactly in them also : But the shorter Rule laid down by most Optick Writers , is this .

As the Sum of the Radii of both Con●exities : to the Radius of either Convexity : : So the double Radius of the other Convexity : to the Distance of the Focus . Vid. Corol Pr. 16.

Demonstration .

T. 7. F. 3. T. 7. F. 3. Let the Axis of the Glass ib be g k , d l a Ray of Light Parallel thereto , g the Centre of the Convexity i f b , b the Centre of the Convexity i c b , g i l and h in are right Lines . The first Angle of Inclination is d i● = ●h c , and by the first Refraction the Ray is deflected into i k , crossing the Axis in k , so that k c is equal to 3 c h. The second Angle of Incidence from Glass to Air on the Surface i f b is the Angle lik : I say kim being made ½ of lik , the Ray crosses the Axis in m , and it shall then be ( according to the Rule ) g h : 2 f g : : c h : m c. Which I thus Demonstrate . In the ▵ kim 1 ∠ k i m : ∠ k : : k m : m i = m f in large Spheres . Double the Antecedents 2 2 ∠ k i m = l i k : ∠ k : : 2 k m : m f : : km : ½ mf = ½ m c : Divide the second Step. 3 ∠ l i k — ∠ k = ∠ g : ∠ k : : k m — ½ m c : ½ m c. Then in ▵ g i k it shall be 4 ∠ g : ∠ k : : i k = k c : i g = f g. From 3 and 4 5 k c : f g : : k m − ½ m c : ½ m c Compound the 5th . 6 k c + f g : f g : : k m : ½ m c Double the Consequents 7 k c + f g : ● f g : : k m : m c. Compound the 7th . 8 k c + 3 f g : 2 f g : : k m + m c = k c = 3 c b : m c That is otherwise 9 3 c h + 3 f g : 2 f g : : 3 c h : m c. Divide the Ant. by 3. 10 c h + f g = g h : 2 f g : : c h : m c.

Which was to be Demonstrated . Vid. Cherubin Dioptt● . Ocul . pag. 61 , 62. Hon. Faber Synop. Opt. Prop. 43. Sec. 8 , 9. Dechales Prop. 23 , 24. Zahn Telescop . Fund . 2. Cap. 9. Prop. 38.

But this Rule will need but little farther Demonstration , if we consider , that it holds even ●n double Convexes of equal Convexities ; for in them , as the Sum of the Radii of both Convexities : to the Radius of the Convexity : : so the double Radius of the Convexity : to the Distance of the Focus . And 't is the same in Glasses of unequal Convexities , for these refract in the same Proportion to their Curvities as the other .

Wherefore from these three foregoing Propositions we lay these down as General Rules , That the Point of Convergency for Parallel Rays falling on a Plano Convex● Glass , is distant about the Diameter of the Convexity . On a double Convex of equal Convexities , 't is about the 〈◊〉 Diameter of the Convexity . And on a Double Convex of unequal Convexities , the Rule for finding it is what we have laid down before .

Scholium .

Before I proceed , it will be requisite here to note , That the Rays which fall nigher the Axis are not united thereto so near the Pole of the Glass , as those that fall farther from it ; and the difference of the Points of Concourse is not so great , when the Convex side of a Plano-Convex Glass is turned to the Object , as when the Plain side is towards the Object .

For this observe Tab. 8. F. 1 , 2 , 3. Ta. 8. Fi. 1 , 2 , 3. in each of which , the Radius of the Convexity cv is 2 Inches , or 20000 Parts ( an Inch being 10000 Parts ) the Arch rvr in the first and second Figures is a Quadrant , and consequently the Thickness of the Glass vz in each is 5858 , being the versed Sine of 45° to the Radius 20000. But in the double Convex Fig. 3. the thickness of the Glass vz is 110 of an Inch or 8000 such Parts a b in each is a Ray falling on the Glass Parallel to the Axis c v , at the distance of 112 of an Inch or 1000 such Parts as c ● is 20000 de a like Ray falling 〈…〉

Parts distant from the Axis , i is the Point wherein the Ray a b meets the Axis , ● the point in which d e crosses the Axis . Here I call hi the Depth of the Focus , which we see is greater in the second Figure , wherein the plain side is towards the Object , than in the first Fig. wherein the Convex Surface is towards the Object . For Proof of this , let the Angles of Incidence be to the refracted Angle ( according to Kepler ) as 3 to 2 , Expressed in the first Column of the following Table ; or let the Sines of the Incidence be to the Sines of the refracted Angles , as 300 to 193 ( according to Mr. Newton ) as is expressed in the second Column of the Table . Then by the foregoing Method of Calculation , delivered in the second and third Propositions , we shall find as in the following Table . 1st . Column . 2d . Column . 3 : 2 : : Inclin : Ref. 300 : 193 : : Inc. Ref. For the Plano-Convex with the Convex Side to the Object . Tab. 8. Fig. 1. vi = 4 ▪ 1930 vi = 3 ▪ 4762 vh = 4 ▪ 1230 vh = 3 ▪ 4112 hi = 700 hi = 650 For the Plano-Convex with the plain side to the Object . Tab. 8. Fig. 2. vi = 3 ▪ 9910 vi = 3 ▪ 5957 vh = 3 ▪ 7140 vh = 3 ▪ 3259 hi = 2770 hi = 2698 For the Double Convex of equal Convexities . Tab. 8. Fig. 3. vi = 1 ▪ 841 vi = 1 ▪ 762 vh = 1 ▪ 685 vh = 1 ▪ 653 hi = 156 hi = 109

From this Table 't is manifest , first that the Ray ab , which falls nigher the Axis v c , is not united thereto so near the Pole of the Glass v , as the Ray d e , which falls farther from the Axis ; for a b is united to the Axis at the Distance v i , and d e is united to the Axis at the Distance v h , but v i is greater than 〈◊〉

Secondly , 'T is evident that the Focal Depth h i is not so great in a Plano-Convex Glass , when the Convex Side is towards the Object , as in Fig. 1. Tab. 8. as when the plain Side is towards the Object , as in Fig. 2. Tab. 8. for by the Table hi is in the former but 650 , but in the latter posture 't is 2691 , that is more than four times greater .

Whence I deduce this , that in viewing an Object by a Plano-Convex Glass , 't is best turning the Spherical Side to the Object ; and so likewise for burning by such a Glass , 't is best turning the Convex Side towards the Sun .

Of OBLIQUE RAYS . Premises to the Fourth Proposition .

Hitherto I have consider'd only the Direct Rays . I come now to the Consideration of Oblique Rays : And for this we must have Recourse to our foregoing 13th . and 17th . Definitions ; as also to the first and second Experiments : By the 13th Definition , we know what Oblique Rays are : And by the 17th Definition , we learn that in every Parcel of Oblique Rays , flowing from the same Point of an Object upon a Glass ; there is one certain Ray , which may be called the Axis , and that this Axis is as it were not at all refracted . But for a farther Declaration hereof , Tab. 9. Fig. 1. Ta. 9. Fi. 1. Let a b c be a Plano-Convex Glass , with the Convex Side towards the Object , d b the Axis of the Direct Cone of Rays , e b a Ray of the Oblique Cone , falling on the Vertex of the Glass at b , I say , this is the Axis of an Oblique Cone , and after its Double Refraction ; first at its Ingress at b , and then at its Egress at f , it becomes f g Parallel to e b. This is Evident , if we imagine the Ray e b to fall on the Plane Glass amnc , for 't is refracted the same way in one Case as in t other . Wherefore the Ray e b f g , is as it were st●a●t , as e b h or k f g ; so likewise we may imagine the Plane Side of this same Glass a c turn'd towards the Object , then p b d is the Axis of the Direct Cone , and g f the Axis of an Oblique Cone . We see therefore that a Plano-Convex Glass , being exposed with its Convex Side to the Object , the Rays that fall from the several Points of the Object , whose Ingress is at the Glasses vertex b , are the Axes of the respective Cones . But the Plane Side being towards the Object , the Rays from the several Points , which have their Egress at the Glasses vertex b , are the Axes of the respective Cones . And that amongst the Infinite Rays that proceed from a Collateral Point of an Object , and form an Oblique Cone , falling on the Plano-Convex Glass ; there is some one certain Ray , that falls on the Vertex , and has its Ingress at b ; Or ( if the Plane Side be towards the Object ) has its Emersion at b , is manifest from this Reason only , that the Rays compounding such a Cone , are spread over the Whole surface of the Glass , and are as it were Infinite or Indefinite .

In like manner , Tab. 9. Fig. 2. a b c k Ta. 9. Fi. 2. is a Double Convex of Equal Convexities , d b k p the Axis of the Direct Cone of Rays , e h a Ray of an Oblique Cone , which at its Ingress at h is refracted into h f , in such manner that it makes the Arches b ● , k f , equal ; then at its egress it becomes f g , Parallel again to e h , as if it had not been at all refracted , but had passed directly forward , or through a Plane Glass . This also will be manifest , if at the Point of Incidence h , and at the Point of Emersion f , we draw the Tangents mn , or ; for these Tangents are Parallel when h b and f k are equal Arches ; and the Ray e h is no otherwise refracted by the Convex Glass , than if it had fallen on the Plane Glass mnor .

And that amongst the Infinite Rays that proceed from a Collateral Point of an Object , and form an Oblique Cone , falling on the Double Convex abck ; there is some one certain Ray , that has its Incidence so , that after its Refraction at its Ingress , it may proceed so in the Glass , as to cut off equal Arches b h , k f , may be easily conceived ; because the whole surface of the Glass is occupy'd by each Cone from each Point ; so that the Point h ( for instance ) cannot miss of having amongst the rest its Ray , which must necessarily be so refracted .

What has been said concerning a Double Convex of Equal Convexities Tab. 9. Fig. 2. may be accommodated to a Double Convex of unequal Convexities Tab. 9. Fig. 3. Ta. 9. Fi. 3. For as in Fig. 2. the Arches b h , k f , are to be equal ( the Convexities being Equal ) so in Fig. 3. the Arches b h , k f , are to be Similar ; that is to say , bh is to be as many degrees of its Circumference , as k f is of its Circumference . Thus suppose in the same Fig. 3. The Arch a b c to be struck with a Radius of two Inches , and the Arch a k c to be struck with the Radius 4 Inches ; these Radii being to each other as 2 to 1 , k f must be to b h as 2 to 1 , for then they shall be of equal degrees , each in its own respective Circumference , for here likewise in this third Fig. the Tangents at h and f , run Parallel to each other .

The Axes of all the Radious Cones , falling on a Plano-Convex with its Convex Side to the Object , Cross each other in the Vertex of the Convex surface , at their Ingress into the Glass , as in Tab. 9. Fig. 1. Ta. 9. Fi. 1. at b ; but if the Plane Side be turned towards the Object , they Cross in the Vertex of the Convex surface at their Egress from the Glass , as in the same Fig. 1. at b.

The Axes of all the Radious Cones , falling on a Double Convex of Equal Convexities , Cross each other in the Middle or Centre of the Glasses Axis . Thus in Tab. 9. Fig. 2. Ta. 9. Fi. 2. d b p is the Line , which produced , would pass through the Centres of the two Convex surfaces ; this Line I call the Axis of the Glass , ●et b q be equal to k q , then q is the Point wherein the Axes of all the Radious Cones Cross each other .

The Axes of all the Radious Cones , falling on a Double Convex of unequal Convexities , Cross each other in a Point within the Glass in its Axis , which divides the said Axis in the Proportion , that the Radius of one Convexity has to the Radius of t'other . Tab. 9. Fig. 3. Ta. 9. Fi. 3. Let the Radius of the Convexity a k c be to the Radius of the Convexity a b c , as 2 to 1. Let b k the Axis of the Glass be divided in q , so that k q may be to b q as 2 to 1 , then q is the Point wherein the Axes of all the Radious Cones Cross each other .

The same may be understood of Concave Glasses .

And this is sufficient for explaining what I mean by the Axis of an Oblique Cone of Rays .

I come now to the Fourth Proposition .

PROP. IV.

The Parallel Rays that proceed from each Collateral Point of an Object , and fall Obliquely on a Glass , are united with their Axis at the same Distance , as the Direct Parallel Rays are united with their Axis , viz. By a Plano Convex about the Distance of the Diameter ; by a Double Equal Convex about the Distance of the Radius ; and by a Double Unequal Convex , as is before determin'd .

From these things given , 't is required to find the Point l in the Axis , where the Ray mi crosses it . For the Discovery whereof we proceed thus .

Draw ik Perpendicular to zq , then in the Right-angled Triangle kqi , we have q i , and the Angle k q i to find k q and k i ; then q f − f g = q g. And k q : k i : : q g : g h.

Produce r f to p , then in the Right-angled Triangle f g p , we have f g , and the Angle g f p = r f z to find the Side p g ; or thus , the Triangles g f p , g q h are Similar , then g q : g h : : g f : g p. Say then , as 300 : to 193 : : so S. ● g f p : to S. ● g f d.

In the Right-angled Triangle f g d , we have f g , and the ● g f d , to find the Side d g , then dg + g h = d h.

Draw ho and dx Perpendiculars to ec , say then , as 193 : to 300 : : so S. ● o h q = g q h : to S. ● o h l. But 90° − ohl = d h l. And 90° + x d l or z f r = h d l.

Lastly , In the Triangle hdl , we have the two Angles d h l and h d l , and the Side h d to find the Side d l ; which was required .

I have said before , that the same Calculation may be performed for any other Ray Parallel to r f , falling at any distance ki from the Direct Axis z f q a ; supposing with the former Data ( instead of the Angle f q i ) ( Tab. 10. Fig. 1. ) the Distance ki ( Tab. 10. Fig. 2. ) be given . For then in Tab. 10. Fig. 2. T. 10. Fi. 2. draw n i b Parallel to z q , and produce q i to x , then nim = r f z. In the Right-angled Triangle q k i , having k i and q i , we get the Angle kqi = n i x , and the Side k q. And n i x − n i m = m i x = to the Angle of Incidence . And q f − q k = f k , f g − f k = k g = i b , by which in the several small Triangles within the Glass , we may find the Angle of the Rays Incidence from Glass to Air , as in the immediate foregoing Example , and so onwards in like manner .

And thus much for the backward Operation , which we have Instituted to find a proper Ray to work with , that is , to find the Axis of an Oblique Cone , and its Angle of Inclination .

Let m i be another Ray Parallel to r d , and falling on the Glass at i , so that g i , may be given 5000. 'T is required to determine the Point l , where the Ray m i , after a Double Refraction at its Ingress at i , and at its Egress at h , meets the Axis r d f l.

Produce r d directly to p , and m i to b , and make s i Perpendicular to ec ; Seeing therefore that m i is Parallel to r d , the refracted part i h , shall be Parallel to the refracted part d f , and the Angle x d r ( = p d f ) shall be equal to b i h , and the Angle k d r is equal to s i m. Joyn f h.

Then in the Right-angled Triangle q g i , we have q g and g i to find the Angle g q i = q i s , and the Side q i : But q i s + s i m = m i q , and 180° − m i q = q i b. And q i b + b i h is equal to q i h.

Therefore in the Triangle q i h we have the Sides q i and q h , and the Angle q i h , to find the Angles i q h and q h i. But g q i − i q h is equal to g q h or f q h.

Then in the Isosceles Triangle f q h , we have f q and q h equal to each other , and the Angle f q h to find the Side f h , and the Angle f h q = q f h.

Produce q h directly to ● , then as 193 : To 300 : : So Sine Angle q h i : To Sine of the Angle o h l. But 180° − o h l − f h q = f h l. Also 180° − q f h = h f a. And h f a + l f a = h f l.

Lastly , In the Triangle h f l , we have f h and all the Angles to find the Side f l , which was required .

Common Demonstration .

I shall now Demonstrate this Proposition the usual Way . Tab. 12. Fig. 1. agb Tab. 12. Fig. 1. is a Plano-Convex , let the Plain surface ab be first turn'd to the Object : And let the two Parallel Rays c d , e f , fall Obliquely on the Plane surface ab , I say , that these Rays shall be united in l , so that hl shall be near equal to the Diameter of the Convexity , which we 'll suppose g k.

Secondly in Tab. 12. Fig. 2. T. 12. Fi. 2. Let the same Glass a b be turned with its Convex-Side to the Object , and thereon let the Parallel Rays c d , e f , fall obliquely to the Axis . These Rays shall be united together behind the Glass almost at the distance of the Diameter of the Convexity .

For amongst the parallel Rays that fall on the Glass , let us conceive one e f , that after its first Refraction at f , passing in the Glass in the Line f h , and being produced directly , would pass through the Centre of the Convexity i. If we conceive the Medium of Glass continued , we know that these two Rays e f , c d , would be united in k at the distance of a Diameter and half from the Glass ( by Prop. I. ) . From the point k draw k n perpendicular to the plane surface of the Glass a b , and let the Ray n o be drawn parallel to e f , c d ; this Ray n o shall also , by its first Refraction , be directed towards the Point k ; and because within the Glass the Ray n m is perpendicular to the plain Surface a b , it shall proceed unrefracted through m l k. I shall now shew that f h by its second Refraction at its egress at h is refracted to l. Draw h l , and through h draw q h p perpendicular to a b. The Angle of Inclination within the Glass is f h q = p h k = h k l. And now I shall prove that the Angle k h l is ½ the Angle of Inclination p h k or h k l. In the Triangle h k l , s. ● h k l : s. ● k h l : : h l : k l ( or k r , for they are nearly equal ) , but h l is almost double k l or k r , therefore the Angle h k l is almost double k h l. Which was to be Demonstrated . And therefore the parallel Oblique Rays have the Point of Concourse at the distance of a Diameter almost from a Plano-Convex Glass . Which was to be Demonstrated . Vid. L'Optique de Pierre Ango Livre 3. Sec. 69. &c.

Thirdly , In Tab. 13. Fig. 1. T. 13. F i. 1. z x is a double Convex , c is the Centre of the Convexity z a x , y the Centre of the Convexity z b x , c y s the Axis of the Glass . 'T is evident by what foregoes , that whatever Rays fall on this Glass parallel to the Glass's Axis are united thereto , at the distance of the Focus , ( viz. about the Semidiameter in equal Convexities ) as suppose at m. Wherefore let us consider two other Rays , parallel between themselves , but oblique to the Glass's Axis c s , such as f g , h i , I say these likewise , after a Double Refraction do concur about the distance of the Principal Focus ( for so I call the Focus of the Rays parallel to the Glass's Axis . )

Seeing there are infinite parallel Rays , that fall thus obliquely on the Surface z b x , most certainly there must be one amongst the rest , which so falls thereon , that being produced directly , shall pass through the Centre y of the Convexity z b x : Let us conceive f g to be this Ray , so that f g y is a Right Line ; let it be produced to l , so that y l may be equal to double gy .

From the Point l to c the Centre of the Convexity z a x draw the Right Line l c , and where this Line cuts the Surface z b x , as in i , let the Ray h i fall parallel to f g. 'T is evident , that by the first Refraction the Ray h i suffers on the Convexity z b x , it will concur with the Ray f g in l at the distance of a Diameter and half , for now f g d y l may be considered as the principal Axis .

Let us suppose the principal Focus of this Glass to be at m. From the Centre c strike the Arch m k cutting c l in the Point k. The Ray h i shall be refracted at i , but the refracted Ray i r ( seeing it is perpendicular to the Surface z a x by Construction ) shall proceed unrefracted directly to k ; but the Ray f g d being refracted in the Point d shall proceed refracted , and shall be united with the Ray i k in k. Which I thus prove ,

From c draw the Line cdp , the Angle p d y is equal to the Angle of Inclination g d c in the Glass ; and therefore if d k be truly the refracted Ray , the Angle p d y ought to be double the Angle y d k , and that it is so I thus prove .

Let us suppose the Ray o e Parallel to the principal Axis c s , this Ray by the first Refraction it suffers at e is directed to the Point s , so that b s is a Diameter and half , or triple by , and therefore equal to g l. The same Ray o e being refracted at e to n , and at n suffering a second Refraction is brought to concur with the Axis c s in m , the principal Focus by Supposition . In which Case , the Angle of Inclination in the Glass shall necessarily be e n c , which is equal to q n s , and the Angle of Refraction shall be s n m ; and therefore the former q n s shall be double the latter s n m. But I say , as qns is double of snm : : so p d l is double of l d k. Which I thus prove , In the Triangle n c m 1 s. ∠ c n m = s ∠ q n m : s ∠ n m c : : c m = ck : nc = cd Also in the Triang . d c k 2 s. ∠ c d k = s ∠ p d k : s ∠ d k c : : k c : c d. From 1 and 2 3 s ∠ q n m : s ∠ n m c : : s ∠ p d k : s ∠ d k c. Then Sines and Angles being proportional 4 q n m : n m c : : p d k : d k c By the Scheme 5 q n m = q n s + s n m. Also p d k = p d l + l d k. From 4 and 5. 6 q n s + s n m : n m c : : p d l + l d k : d k c. Alternando 6. 7 q n s + s n m : p d l + l d k : : n m c : d k c. Moreover in ▵ nms. 8 s. ∠ s m n = s. ∠ n m c : s. ∠ s n m : : n s = d l : m s = k l Also in Triang . d k l 9 s. ∠ d k l = s. ∠ d k c : s. l d k : : d l : k l From 8 and 9 10 s. ∠ n m c : s. ∠ s n m : : s. ∠ d k c : s. ∠ l d k Sines and Angles prop. 11 n m c : s n m : : d k c : ld k Alternando 11 12 s n m : l d k : n m c : d k c From 7 and 12 13 q n s + s n m : p d l + l d k : : s n m : l d k Alternando 13 14 q n s + s n m : s n m : : p d l + ld k : l d k. Dividendo 14 15 q n s : s n m : : p d l : l d k.

From which 15th Step if follows , that if q n s be double of s n m : : so p d l is double of ldk. Which was to be Demonst.

Note , In this Demonstration we assume n s and d l to be equal , and m s and k l to be likewise equal , whereas they are not so exactly , for the Thickness and Breadth of the Glass causes some little difference , but in Glasses of small Segments and large Spheres , and where the Rays do not fall very obliquely , this Difference is so very inconsiderable , that in a Demonstration relating to a Physico-Mathematical Matter , th●y may well be considered as equal .

Scholium .

But tho the Proposition expresses , that the Parallel Rays which proceed from each collateral Point of an Object , and fall obliquely on a Glass are united with their Axis at the same distance , as the direct Parallel Rays ; yet this is to be understood with some Limitation : For if the Rays fall very obliquely , their Union with the Axis is not so exact , but they are scattered and the Focal Depth is very great . As will appear by Calculation .

Of the Representation of outward Objects in a Dark Chamber ; by a Convex-Glass .

First therefore for the Rays that flow from the Point A. By what forgoes we know that the Axis of this Cone A H , after it has passed the Glass proceeds directly towards F , as if it were not at all refracted ; and that the Rays A G , A K , are united with this Axis in a Point ( suppose at F ) distant from the Glass about the Diameter of its Convexity ( the Glass being a Plano-Convex ) and what is said of the Rays A G. A K , being united with their Axis , must be conceived of all the Rays that make up the whole Cone flowing from this single Point A : and they are all united likewise with the Axis in the Point F , forming another correspondent Cone G F K , having its Base on the Glass , and its Vertex in the Point F , making the Pencil of Rays F G A K F.

And so likewise , what is declared of the Point A , and the Rays that flow from it , and of their being united together in F , may be easily conceived of the Rays flowing from the middly Point B , and their being united in E ; and may be also understood of the Rays flowing from C , and their union in D ; and so of the Rays proceeding from any other Point in the Object A B C , and their being united in a correspondent Point in F E D. And this F E D we call the Distinct Base , Focus , or Burning Point . 'T is called the Distinct Base , because therein is a Distinct Representation of the Object . And supposing the Glass G K in the Hole of a dark Room , so that the Representation F E D may be disturbed by no other luminous rays from outward Objects , and a Paper were placed at D E F , there to receive the Image , we should thereon see the Object most livelily painted in its exact Shape and Colours . 'T is called the Focus , or Burning Point , because the Glass being exposed to the Sun , it there collects the Rays from each Point of the Sun's Body , and paints its Image there most vividly , exciting a violent Heat , even to the inflaming of combustible Bodies .

But whereas in a Scholium after the Third Proposition , it is observed , that the Rays falling nigh the Axis are not united thereto so near the Glass , as the Rays that fall farther from the Axis . And consequently that all the Rays from one Point in the Object , do not united a correspondent Point in the Distinct Base , but that ( as we have noted before ) the Focus has some Depth , and consists not in an Indivisible Point . Yet this hinders not the Representation in the Distinct Base to be very lively and exact . For tho all the Rays from each Point are not united in an answerable Point in the Image , yet there are a sufficient quantity of them to render the Representation very perfect . And tho some Rays from other adjacent Points may a little intermix with those from its neighbouring Parts , yet these are so few , that they make no great disturbance .

Moreover in a Scholium following the Fourth Proposition , N. B. 't is observed , that when the Incidence of the oblique Rays is very oblique , that then their Concourse with their Axis is not so very regular . From , hence it proceeds , that the Representation in the Distinct Base is not so clear and exact towards the Extremes , as towards the Middle .

As for the reason of this surprizing Appearance in a dark Chamber , wherein there is a small Hole armed with a Convex Glass ; it will be manifest , if we consider , that from every Point in the inverted Representation on the Paper , the Rays proceed to the Eye that looks at it , exactly in the same manner , as from the Object it self . For let us imagin the Point A to be Blue , B to be Yellow , and C Red. Because all the Rays flowing from A are separated by themselves , and fall in the Image on the Point F , where no other Rays intermix with them no disturb them , they must needs there represent Blue . For passing through the Glass , it being a Diaphanous Colourless Medium , does not at all alter them ( notwithstanding the Appearance of the Prisme , ) and the Point F in the Paper being e●lightened only with Rays of Blue Light , and of it self being White , indifferent to all Colours , or rather indeed of no Colour , must needs represent Blue ; and so E Yellow , and D Red. As to the Shape of the Object , it must needs be expressed exact likewise ; for every Physical Point in the Object sending out a Cone of Rays falling on the Glass , and these being formed into another Correspondent Cone on the other side the Glass , determining their Vertices in Correspondent Points of the Image ; the Eye must necessarily perceive on the Paper the lively Image of the Object , being it is affected in the same way by This , as by the Object it self . for from the Object it self the Eye receives only a Cone of Rays from each of its Points , and so it receives a Cone of Rays form each Point in the Image on the Paper ; each Point in the Image on the Paper being enlightened by the Rays it receives through the Glass ; and consequently the Paper , being an Impolite Surface , reflects these Rays into the whole circumjacent Medium . Vid. Schol. Prop. 52. Gregorii Optic . Promot .

And now that I am on the Consideration of this Appearance , it may not be improper to consider the Effect of a Plain small Hole without a Glass in a dark Room . Tab. 14. Fig. 2. Tab. 14. Fig. 2. represents a dark Chamber , in whose side there is a small Hole g k , ½ an Inch wide ; a b c is a distant Object . Now because there is no Glass in the Hole g k , the Rays from each Point of the Object pass through the Hole directly strait , and represent on the Wall within , at dedfef , a faint and confused Image of the Object : Because here by the narrowness of the Hole , the Rays from some Points are hindred from intermixing with the Rays from some other Points ; as here the Rays from the Point a do not intermix on the Wall with the Rays from the Point c ; for we see d d do not intermix with f f. But then the Representation is confused ; for tho some Rays are hereby hindred from intermixing with some other Rays , yet other Rays from nigh adjoyning Points do intermix with their neighbouring Rays , as here the Rays from a , and those from b are blended together in f e , and so those from c and b in d e. And if the Hole be made so narrow as to hinder this communication of Rays in a great measure ( for 't is absolutely impossible to hinder it altogether ) then the opening ad mits so few Rays from each Point , that the Image is obscure and imperceivable .

There is another Particular relating to this Appearance in a dark Chamber , which seems not so clearly treated of in those Optick Writers which I have consulted . Particularly Zahn in his Ocul . Artif . Fund . 1. Synt. 3. Cap. 2. Sec. 8. gives no satisfactory Account thereof . The Matter is thus ; in Tab. 14. F. 1. Tab. 14. Fig. 2. if the Image D E F in the dark Chamber be received on a Speculum or Looking Glass instead of a White Paper , the Eye perceives a most dilute and faint Image on the Speculum : But if the Speculum be placed any where between G K and D E F , and a Paper placed as far distant from the Speculum before it , as the distinct Base D E F is behind the Speculum ; then the Speculum shall reflect on the Paper the distinct Image of the Object .

The dilute and very faint Image , which the Eye perceives on the Speculum in the first Case , proceeds from the Imperfect Politure of the Speculum ; For if it were a most exquisitely smooth Surface , even that faint Image it self would not appear . But as 't is impossible by the Industrly of Man to procure such , and all Miroirs partake in some measure of a little Roughness , therefore it is that we have that dilute Image . And the reason we have no such vivid Representation from a Speculum ( considered as a perfectly polish'd Surface ) as from a Paper , as also the reason of the appearance in the second forementioned posture of the Speculum , does so depend on the Doctrine of Reflection or Catoptricks , that I shall pass it over in this place , it being manifest to any one meanly versed in that Doctrine . Vid. Schol. Prop. 52. Gregorii Optic . Promot .

Of Nigh Objects , or Diverging Rays .

We have hitherto considered the Radiating Points of Distant Objects both Direct and Oblique , the Rays from each single Point whereof do proceed as it were Parallel . I come now to the Consideration of Nigh Objects or Diverging Rays , and for these let us look back on the 5th , 6th , 7th , 8th , and 9th Definitions .

When the Rays from each Point of an Object run as it were Parallel , we may imagin that they may be sooner or easier brought together , than when they Diverge considerably , by coming from a nigh Object . And that therefore a Convex Glass unites the Parallel Rays nigher to it self , than Diverging Rays . Tab. 14. Fig. 3. a b , c d T. 14. Fi. 3. are Parallel Rays flowing from one Point of a distant Object , these are united in the Point k , farther from the Glass than the Point f.

For we may conceive ( to omit the farther Proof of this by Geometrical Calculation ) , that the Parallel Rays have not so great a Reluctancy to be brought together , as the Diverging Rays ; and therefore the Refractive Power of the Glass has not so much to do to bring those together , as to bring these . And consequently it performs the First sooner than the Latter , or in a shorter space , after the Ray's Emerge from behind the Glass . And this the more , according as the Object g approaches nigher and nigher to the Glass , till at last it be so nigh , that the Rays , after they have passed the Glass , become Parallel or Diverging , as I shall shew in the following Propositions .

Definitions .

The Focus wherein the Parallel Rays of a Distant Object are united , I call the Focus , simply without any Addition , sometimes the Absolute Focus , or Solar Focus .

The Focus wherein the Rays from a Nigh Object , or the Diverging Rays are united , I call the Respective Focus .

The foregoing Precepts , which I have given for calculating teh Progress of a Ray through a Spherical Glass , are abundantly sufficient to find the Point of Union of Rays form Nigh Objects , or of Diverging Rays ; The Distance of the Object or point of Divergency from the Glass ( together with the foregoing Data ) being given . I shall not therefore inlarge thereon , but Instead thereof I shall give these following short Rules in this Matter .

PROP. V.

In Convex-Glasses , When a Nigh Object a Placed more Distant than the Focus , The Rule for Determining the Distant Base , or Respective Focus is This ,

As the Difference , between the Distance of the Object , and Focus :

Is To the Focus , or Focal Length : :

So the Distance of the Object from the Glass :

To the Distance of the Respective Focus or Distinct Base from the Glass .

Demonstration .

In Tab. 11. Fig. 2. Let ed be a Plano-Convex Glass , whose absolute Focus we know is about a Diameter of the Convexity , Let sd be this Diameter . a is a Radiating Point , f the Centre of the Convexity , fe the Radius of the Convexity produced directly to q. ae a Ray falling on the Glass , produced directly to y. Here we see the Angle of Inclination , or Incidence of the Ray a e is q e a. Let it then be made — I say k is the respective Focus of the Ray a e. 1 a s : s d : : a d : d k Let k l be made = ½ k d. I shall first Demonstrate , that by virtue of the first Refraction which the Ray suffers at its entrance on the Convex-Side of the Glass at e , 't is directed as if it proceeded strait towards l. For to the Consequents of the Analogy in the first step add their Halfs , and it shall be — 2 a s : s f : : a d : d l And compounding the 2d — 3 a f : s f : : a l : d l Here we see s f is equal to three Semidiameters of the Convexity , that is , to thrice f e. The Angle of Refraction is y , if therefore we prove that y is of qea the Angle of Incidence , it will be manifest , that by the first Refraction the Ray is directed towards l. In order to the Proof hereof , we lay down these Suppositions . 1. In the Triangle a e l we suppose le and l d equal , because we suppose the Glass of the least Thickness imaginable , and the Segment of a large Sphere . 2. We suppose likewise , that the Angles of Incidence are all very small , that so Sines and Angles may be proportional . Tho we could not express this truly in the Figure . Wherefore , for the Demonstration of the forgoing Position , in the Triangle a e l it is — 4 a l : l e = l d : : s ∠ a e l : s ∠ a But the Angle a e l is the Complement of the Angle y e l to 180° Therefore the Sine of the Angle a e l is equal to the Sine of the Angle y e l. Wherefore the 4th Step runs thus 5 a l : l d : : s. ∠ y e l : s. ∠ a But in these small Angles , as the Sines are , so are the Angles . Therefore the 5th stands thus — 6 a l : l d : : ∠ y e l : ∠ a Then from 3 and 6 it follows — 7 ∠ y e l : ∠ a : : a f : s f = 3 e f Then in the 7 Triple the Antecedent on this side , and subtriple the Consequent on the other side , and it will be — 8 3 ∠ y e l : ∠ a : : a f : e f Moreover , in the ▵ aef it is — 9 a f : e f : : s ∠ a ef : s ∠ a But the Sine of the Angle a e f is equal to the Sine of the Angle qea , being Complements to 180° . Wherefore the 9 may stand thus 10 a f : e f : : s ∠ q e a : s ∠ a But Sines and Angles in these small Angles being proportional , it follows from the 8th and 10th . Steps , That 11 3 ∠ y e l : ∠ a : : ∠ q e a : ∠ a.

Wherefore from the Analogy in the 11th , it is evident , that the Angle of Inclination or Incidence q e a is thrice the Angle of Refraction y e l ; seeing three times the Angle y e l , and the Angle q e a , bear the same Proportion to the same Angle a. And this was the first thing to be proved ; and consequently the Ray a e by its first Refraction at its Point of Incidence is directed towards the Point l

It remains to be Demonstrated secondly , that the Ray , at its Eruption on the plain side of the Glass into Air , is refracted into e k.

For the Proof of this draw rem Parallel to the Axis . Now the Angle of Incidence from Glass to Air shall be m e l , the Angle of Refraction l e k , which we shall prove to be half the Angle of Inclination m e l ; or we shall prove that the Angle m e k is thrice the Angle of Refraction l e k. Which being Demonstrated , 't is certain the Ray is refracted into e k. For the Demonstration hereof we retain the Series of our former Steps , and in the Triangle l e k we have it 12 l e = l d : l k : : s. ● e k l : s ● l e k But s. ● e k l is equal to s. ● e k f being Complements to 180. Therefore the 12th . Analogy may stand thus 13 l d : l k : : s ● e k f : s ● l e k And the Angle e k f is = ● m e k Wherefore 14 l xd : l k : : s ● m e k : s ● l e k

Now the Angles being as the Sines , and l k being by Construction the third Part of l d , it follows from the 14th Step , that the Angle l e k is the third Part of the Angle m e k. Wherefore the Angle l e k is the Angle of Refraction agreeable to the Angle of Inclination m e l. Which was to be Demonstrated .

Example of this Rule .

Of this Rule I shall give this short Example . Let the Focus of a Glass be 48 Inches ; the Distance of the Object 156 , their Difference is 108. Then 108 : 48 : : 156 : 69 = to the respective Focus .

By this Rule we may view very nigh Objects with long Telescopes , converting them as it were into Microscopes , only by lengthning them . But of this more hereafter .

Also from hence I shall deduce a Method of measuring distances at one Station : but hereof also more hereafter .

PROP. VI.

An Object being placed in the Focus of a Convex-Glass , the Rays from each Point thereof , after passing the Glass become Parallel ;

Tab. 14. F. 4. Tab. 14. Fig. 4. ABC is an Object placed in the Focus of the Glass RS. The Rays form each Point of this Object ●low upon the Glass , as here we have expressed those Points after passing the Glass become Parallel , those from A being a a a , from B b b b , from C c c c. For let us imagine a distant Object to send its Parallel Ray , a a a from its upper Point , b b b from its middle Point , c c c from its lower Point : These ( by what foregoes ) shall be formed by the Glass into the distinct Base A B C. Let us now conceive this distinct Base , A B C , to be made the Object ; and the Case is most plain , that its Rays must needs ●e remitted back again in the same manner as they were received

from the distant Object on the side a b c , that is , Parallel . For the Progress of a Ray is reciprocal . per Exp. 8. Vid. Prop. XXVII .

PROP. VII .

If an Object be placed nigher a Convex-Glass than its Focus , the Rays from each single Point thereof after they have passed the Glass , do proceed onwards diverging ; But do not diverge so much as before they entred the Glass .

For if it be as much as the Glass can do , by its refractive Power to reduce to a Parallelism the diverging Rays from an Object placed in its Focus ; it must needs be more than it can do , to reduce to a Parallelism the Divergency of the Rays , from an Object placed nigher to it than its Focus ; The Divergence in this latter Posture being much greater than in the former , and consequently not so easily reduced by the refractive Power of the Glass . Tab. 15. Fig. 1. In Tab. 15. Fig. 1. cd is a Convex-Glass in whose Focus at a there is a radiating Point , from which proceed the Rays a c f , a d m , which meeting with the Glass , instead of going onwards to f and m , are reduced thereby to c h , d k , Parallel to each other . b is another radiating Point nigher the Glass than its Focus a , we may plainly perceive the Rays b c , b d , diverge more than the Rays a c , a d. Wherefore b c , b d , instead of proceeding directly onwards to e and n , are reduced to c g , d l ; But c g and d l do yet diverge , but not so much as b c , b d.

Definition . Imaginary Focus .

In the same Figure , draw g c , l d , directly to Cross in x , I call x the Imaginary Focus ; which is determined by the following Proposition .

PROP. VIII .

In Convex-Glasses when an Object is placed nigher the Glass than the Focus , the Rule for finding the Imaginary Focus is this ,

As the Difference between the Distance of the Object from Glass , and the Glasses Focus :

Is to the Glasses Focus : :

So the distance of the Object from the Glass :

To the Distance of the Imaginary Focus from the Glass .

Demonstration .

In Tab. 15. F. 2. Let e d be a Plano-Convex-Glass , whose absolute Focus is a Diameter of the Convexity , let s d be this Diameter ; a is a rediating Point , f the Center of the Convexity f e ( = f d ) the Radius of the Convexity produced to q , a e a Ray falling on the Glass produced directly to i.

We here suppose the Thickness of the Glass to be inconsiderable ; and also , that the Breadth of the Glass is so little , that the Angles of Incidence shall be so small , that Sines and Angles may be proportional .

Let it then be made according to the Rule , a s : s d : : a d : d k. I say k d is the Distance of the Imaginary Focus of this Ray a e , after it has passed the Glass : That is , it shall be refracted , and proceed onwards in e h , as if it came directly from the Point k , k e h being a strait Line .

Let k l be made = ½ k d. I shall first Demonstrate , that by virtue of the first Refraction the Ray suffers at its Entrance on the Convex-Side of the Glass at e , 't is refracted so as if it proceeded directly from l , that is to say , 't is refracted into e g , l e g being a Right Line .

'T is first manifest , that the Angle of Incidence is q e a ; if therefore we prove , that the Angle of Refraction i e g = l e a is ● of q e a , we shew hereby , that by the first Refraction , the Ray is broken as if it proceeded directly from l.

That we may prove this , add to the Consequents of the foresaid Analogy their Halfs , — 1 a s : s d : : a d : dk And it shall be — 2 a s : s f : : a d : d l Inverting , and Dividing this Second — 3 s f − a s : s f : : d l − a d : d l That is by the Scheme — 4 a f : s f : : a l : d l Moreover in the Triangle a e f it is 5 af : e f : : s ● f e a : s ● e a f But s ● f e a is = s ● q e a being Complements to 180° — 6 a f : e f : : s ● q e a : s ● e a f And in these small Angles , Sines and Angles being proportional , the 6th shall be — 7 ● q e a : ● e a f : : a f : e f Subtriple the Antecedent on this side , and triple the Consequent on t'other — 8 ● q e a : e a f : : a f : 3 e f = s f Then from the 4th and 8th Steps it follows — 9 ● q e a : e a f : : a l : d l Moreover in the Triang . e l a it is 10 a : l e = l d : : s ● l e a : s ● l a e But s ● l a e = s ● e a f being Complements to 180° — 11 l a : l d : : s ● l e a : s ● e a f And Signs and Angles being proportional 12 a l : d l : : ● l e a : ● e a f From the 12th and 9th Steps 't is manifest that — 13 ● q e a : e a f : : l e a : e a f

Wherefore from the 13th Step 't is evident that ● q ea is equal to l e a , they having the same Proportion to the same Angle e a f.

Which was the first thing to be proved : and consequently 't is manifest that the Ray a e , by its first Refraction at its Incidence on e , is refracted into e g , as if it came directly from l , l e g being a Right Line .

It remains to be Demonstrated secondly , that the Ray upon its Eruption on the plain side of the Glass into Air is refracted into eh , as if it proceeded directly from k , k e h being a Right Line .

Draw mer Parallel to the Axis lf . Now the Angle of Incidence from Glass to Air is g e r = m e l = e l a. The Angle of Refraction is g e h = l e k , which I shall prove to be half the Angle of Inclination m e l ; Or I shall prove that the refracted Angle m e k = r e h is thrice the Angle of Refraction l e k.

Which being Demonstrated , 't is certain the Ray is refracted into e h , as if it came directly from k , and consequently k is the Imaginary Focus of the Ray a e. But this we shall thus Demonstrate .

In the Triangle lek — 14 l e = l d : lk : : s ● l k e : s ● l e k But s ● l k e = s ● e k f being Complements to 180° . — 15 l d : l k : : s ● e k f : s ● l e k But ● e k f = ● m e k therefore , the 15th is — 16 l d : l k : : ● m e k : l e k

And by Construction l d was put equal to 3 l k , therefore from this 6th step 't is manifest , that the Angle m e k is equal to Thrice the Angle l e k. Which was to be Demonstrated .

Corollary . Concerning Convex-Glasses exposed to Converging Rays .

Hitherto we have spoken of Convex-Glasses exposed either to Parallel or to Diverging Rays . Let us now consider their Property exposed to Converging Rays . Tab. 15. Fig. 2. T. 15. F. 2. Let h e be a Ray of Light falling on the Convex-Glass e d , and converging directly towards the point k ; d k the distance of this Point of Convergence from the Glass , and s d the Focal length of the Glass being given , 't is required to find d a , the distance at which this Ray converges after passing the Glass .

We know that the Progress of a Ray is reciprocal ( by Exp. 8. ) and therefore , that if the Ray a e be refracted into ● h , the Ray he shall be refracted into e a.

Wherefore it being by Prop. VIII . — d s — d a = a s : s d : : a d : d k

Alternating we have it — s d : d k : : d s — d a : a d

And Compounding — s d + d k : d k : : d s : a d

From which last Analogy this Rule arises , for solving the Problem in the Corallary .

As the Sum of the Focal Length of the Glass and the distance at which the strait Ray converges directly — d s + d k :

To the said Distance at which the strait Ray converges d k : :

So the Focal Length of the Glass — d s :

To the Distance at which the refracted Ray converges — a d :

Observation .

Dechales in his first Book of Dioptricks , Prop. 48. gives a Rule for solving this 8th Proposition : But therein he is the most egregiously mistaken as ever Man was , that pretended to Demonstration , and commits the most notorious Error that can be imagined . And yet herein he wants not his Followers , for Zahn in his Telescopium Fundam . 2. Syntag. 1. Cap. 4. Prop. 13 transcribes Dechales , and copies out even his Errata Typographica , besides the chief and great Error of the whole Solution . Which shews that Zahn was either very careless , or else that he understood nothing of the Matter , as indeed he seems to do very little , for he is a mere blind Transcriber from others .

Dechales Rule in his fore-cited Proposition is this . As the Sum of the Distance of the Object from the Glass , and half the Glass's Focus : Is to the Glass's Focus : : so the Distance of the Object from the Glass : to the Distance of the Imaginary Focus beyond the Distance of the Object : That is , in Tab. 15. F. 2. a f : s d : : a d : a k. Tab. 15. Fig. 2. But how false this is , shall appear not only from his mistaking one Angle for another in his Demonstration , but from the following Examples , which I have taken the pains to calculate for a more full Confutation of Dechales , and Illustration of my own Rule .

1. Example . Given in T. 15. F. 2. inch . Plan. -Conv . Gl. Foc. 144,00 = s d = 2 e f Rad. of the Convexit . 72,00 = e f = f d Distance of the Object 48,00 = a d = a z ● Breadth of the Glass 1,00 = e z By my Rule d k = 7200 k l = 3600 d l = 10800 = d k + k l a l = 6000 = d l − d a By Dechal . Prop. 48. dk = 10560 k l = 5280 d l = 15840 = d k + k l a l = 11040 = d l − d a

Let us now try by Calculation , which of these is the Truth . Tab. 15. Fig. 2. Tab. 15. Fig. 1.

In the Right-angled Triangle e f z , we have the Sides e f and e z , to find the Angle e f z = 0° 47 ' 40 ' ' and its Complement to 90° f e z = 89● 12 ' 20 ' ' .

Then in the Right-angled Triangle e a z , we have a z , and e z to find the Angles and Side a e.

Thus ● e a z = 1° 11 ' 40 ' '

● a e z = 88 48 20

a e = 4801

Then a e z + f e z = a e f = — 178 0 40

And Compl. a e f to 180° = q e a = Incl. = 1 59 20

Then as 3 : 1 : : s ● q e a : s ● i e g = l e a = 0°39 ' 50 ' ' Ang. of Ref.

Moreover , eal = 180 − e a z = — 178 48 20

And e l a = 180 − e a l − l e a = m e l = g e r = 0 31 50

Then in the Triangle e a l , we have two Angles , l e a and e l a , and the Side a e , to find the Side a l. Thus ,

As s●ela = 0° 31 ' 50 ' ' Log. C. Ar. 2.0333979726

To ae = 4801 — 3.6813317060

So s ● l e a = 0° 39 ' 50 ' — 8.0639630497

To a l = 6007 — 3.7786927283

which is sufficiently agreeable to my

a l = 6000 , but differs vastly from Dechales al = 11040.

I now proceed to find the Side d k , which by my Rule is 7200 , but by Dechales is 10560.

∠ q e z = q e a + a e z = 1° 59 ' 20 ' ' + 88 ' 48 ' 20 ' ' = 90° 47 ' 40 ' '

∠ q e m = q e z ∠ 90 = — 0 47 40

●mel = a l e = g e r = — 0 31 50 ,

This is the Angle of Inclination or Incidence from Glass to Air , on the plane side of the Glass .

Then , As 2 : 3 : ● s ● g e r = 0● 31 ' 50 ' ' : s ● h e r = m e k = e k d = 0° 47 ' 40 ' ' .

And k e z = 90 − e k d = 89● 12 ' 20 ' ' .

Then in the Triangle k e z , all the Angles , and the Side e z are given , to find k d or k z ( we supposing the Thickness of the Glass inconsiderable ) . Thus ,

Rad —

To e z = 100 Log. 2.0000000000

So Tang. ●kez = 89° 12 ' 20 ' ' 11.8580312668

To k d = 7208 3.8580312668

Which k d answer sufficiently exact to what my Rule gives it 7200 , the Eight Parts coming in for the Thickness of the Glass , and the Angles not being calculated more accurately than to 10 " Seconds Numero rotundo . But this is much different from what Dechales Rule gives it 10560.

2. Example . Given in Tab. 15. F. 2. Glass Focus = 14400 = s d = 2 e f Rad. of the Conv. = 7200 = e f = f d Dist. of the Object = 5763 = a d = a z Bread . of the Glass = 100 = e z By my Rule d k = 9608 k l = 4808 d l = 14412 = d k + k l a l = 8549 = d l − a d By Dechales , 48 Prop. d k = 12165 k l = 6082 d l = 18247 = d k + k l a l = 12484 = d l − a d

The Thickness of the Glass z d is but 17200 and therefore inconsiderable , it being the Versed Sine of the Angle e f z. We suppose therefore k d and k z equal .

Then by Calculation , ex Datis , we find as follows ,

1 efz = 0° 47 ' 40 " 2 fez = 89 12 20 3 eaz = 0 59 40 4 aez = 89 00 20 5ae = 5764 6 aef = 178 12 40 7 qea = 1° 47 ' 20 " = Inclination 8 lea = 0 35 40 = Refraction 9 eal = 179 0 20 10 ela = 0 24 0 11 al = 8566

Which a l = 8566 is but 17 more than my Rule gives it , which ( considering the Inaccuracy of the Calculation of the Angles , being only Numero rotundo to about 10 " Seconds ) proves my Rule sufficiently true , and shews Dechales as false , which makes a l = 12484.

Moreover , By my Rule d k is = 9608 , and by Dechales 12165. The Angles requisite to find d k we have thus ,

Before found — 1 qez = 90° 47 ' 40 " 2 qem = 0 47 40 3 ale = 0 24 0 = ger = mel = Inclin . 4 mek = 0 36 0 = her = ekd. 5 kez = 89 24 0 6 kd = kz = 9550

Which k d = 9550 is but 58 less than my Rule gives it ; and this small Discrepancy may easily arise from the Error of 10 " Seconds in the Calculation of the Angles . But Dechales gives it 12165.

I have chosen a Plano-Convex Glass to demonstrate this Rule , which holds as true in double Convexes , but would in them be more difficult and intricate to demonstrate .

PROP. IX .

In double Convex-Glasses of equal or unequal Convexities , the Rays proceeding from the Distance of a Diameter of one Convexity , are united at the Distance of a Diameter of t'other Convexity .

In Tab. 15. Fig. 3. T. 15. F. 3. Let us conceive the Glass a b divided by the Pointed Right Line a b into two Plano-Convex Glasses a c b and a d b. Let the Point k be distant from the Glass a c b the Diameter of the Convexity a c b. By what foregoes , Prop. II. The Rays k a , k e , k c , k p , &c. shall be sent parallel through the Glass a c b , so that they shall become e g , c d , p q. Then falling Parallel on the Plano-Convex Glass a d b , they are united thereby in f , at the distance of its Diameter : By the foregoing Doctrine . Prop. II.

Of Concave-Glasses .

Hitherto we have treated of Spherical Convex Glasses only . We now proceed to the Consideration of Concave-Glasses .

Definition . Vertual Focus , or Point of Divergence .

In Tab. 15. Fig. 5. T. 15. F. 5. a b c is a Plano Concave Glass , whose Axis is d e , f g is a Ray falling thereon parallel to the Axis d e , d is the Centre of the Arch a b c. This Ray after it has passed the Glass at its Emersion at g , instead of proceeding directly to h , is refracted from the Perpendicular d g , and becomes g k. Draw g k directly to cross the Axis in e. I call the Point e the Virtual Focus , or Point of Divergence .

Concerning Concaves , there is little to be said after our foregoing Method for Calculating the Progress of a Ray falling on a Spherical Convex ; for this may easily be accommodated to Concaves .

I shall therefore slightly pass these over , and shall only lay down their Properties in brief , with their usual Demonstrations , referring to Calculation for a more accurate Scrutiny .

PROP. X

A Ray falling parallel to the Axis from Air , on the Concave Surface of a Glass Medium , has its Virtual Focus by its first Refraction at the Distance of a Diameter and half of the Concavity .

Tab. 15. Fig. 4. T. 15. F. 4. a b k h is a Glass Medium terminated by the Concave Surface a b , d e a Ray of Light falling parallel to the Axis g e x. I say the Ray d e , by its Refraction at the Point of Incidence e , is so refracted into e h , as if it proceeded directly from g the distance of a Diameter and half of the Convexity .

Let c be the Centre of the Concave-Arch a e b , draw c e directly to i , produce d e directly to f , and h e directly to g. The Angle c ed = f e i is the Angle of Inclination , the Perpendicular is e i. By what foregoes , the Ray passing from Air a Rare Medium into Glass a Dense Medium , is refracted towards the Perpendicular by the Angle f e h , which must be 1● of the Inclination f e i. Therefore f e h = d e g = e g c is half h e i = g e c. Wherefore in the Triangle c e g , the Angle c e g being double the Angle e g c , the Side c g that subtends c e g , shall be double the side c e that subtends e g c. For we suppose these Angles to be so small , that Sines and Angles , or Sides and Angles are proportional . Which was to be Demonstrated .

PROP. XI .

In Plano-Concave Glasses , when the Rays fall parallel to the Axis , the Point of Divergence or Virtual Focus is distant from the Glass the Diameter of the Concavity .

Tab. 15. Fig. 5. a b c is a Plano-Convex Glass , T. 15. F. 5. whose Axis e d , f g is a Ray of Light falling on this Glass parallel to its Axis . This Ray after it has passed the Glass at g , is so refracted into g k , that g k being produced directly backwards , it shall intersect the Axis in e , so that e b shall be the Diameter of the Cavity a b c.

First , Let the plain Side be turned towards the Object , as in Tab. 15. Fig. 5. Because the Ray falls perpendicular on the plain Superficies , it is not at all refracted at its Immersion into the Glass . But at g it emerges from the Concave Side of the Glass into Air ; and its Inclination is g d b ( d being the Centre of the Cavity a b c ) and 't is now refracted from the Perpendicular d g , by the Angle h g k , which is half the Inclination g d b. But h g k is equal to f g e = g e d. Wherefore in the Triangle g d e , the Angle g e d is half the Angle g d e , and therefore the Side g d is half the Side g e = e b in Glasses of large Spheres .

Corollary .

In Plano-Concave Glasses , as 300 − 193 = 107 : 193 : : So the Radius of the Concavity : To the Distance of the Virtual Focus .

Demonstration .

Tab. 15. F. 5. The Inclination is h g d = g d b = f g z = 193. T. 15. F. 5. Refracted Angle is z g e = k g d = 300. Ang. of Refr . k g h = k g d − h g d = 300 − 193 = 107 = f g e = g e d. In the Triang . g d e. As s ∠ g e d : To s ∠ g d e : : So Rad. = g d : To g e. That is — 107 : 193 : : g d : g e = e b in Glasses of large Spheres and small Segments .

PROP. XII .

In Double Concaves of equal Cavities , Parallel Rays have their Virtual Focus , or Point of Divergence at the Distance of the Radius of the Concavity .

Tab. 16. F. 2. ab is a Concave of equal Cavities , that is , Tab. 16. Fig. 2. m c the Radius of the Cavity e c , is equal to g n the Radius of the Cavity n i. Let the Ray d e fall thereon parallel to the Axis k c. This Ray , after it has suffered a double Refraction , shall proceed in i h , as if it came directly from m , the Centre of the Cavity .

Let c k be made three times c m , draw k e i l. By the first Refraction the Ray is propagated into e i , as if it proceeded from k ( by Prop. X. ) . From the Centre g draw the Perpendicular g i f. The Angle of Inclination of the Ray within the Glass is e i f = l i g. The Ray must therefore at its Egress at i be refracted , so that the Angle of Refraction h i l = k i m must be half the Inclination l i g. Wherefore in the Triangle k i g , As the Sine of the Angle k i g , or of the Complement to 180° viz. l i g : To the Sine of the Angle at g : : So k g = 4 : To i k or n k = 3. And as the Sines , so are the Angles , seeing they are supposed very acute : Therefore , As 4 : To 3 : : So ∠ lig : To the ∠ g : Add h i l = 2 to l i g = 4 , we have h i g = 6. Wherefore ∠ hig : Is to the Angle g : : As 6 : To 3 : : or 2 : To 1. But the Sine of the Angle h i g is equal to the Sine of the Angle g i m ; and consequently in the Triangle g i m , As Sine of the Angle g i m : To the Sine of the Angle g : : So g m : To i m. Therefore g m : Is to i m : : As 2 : To 1. So that neglecting the Thickness of the Glass , m i may be taken for the Radius of the Cavity , and g m is double thereto . Wherefore ●tis Demonstrated , that m is the Virtual Focus . Which was to be Demonstrated .

PROP. XIII .

In double Concaves of equal or unequal Concavities , the Virtual Focus or Point of Divergence of the Parallel Rays is determined by this Rule :

As the Sum of the Radii of both Concavities :

Is to the Radius of either Concavity : :

So the Double Radius of t'other Concavity :

To the Distance of the Virtual Focus .

Tab. 16. Fig. 3. f c is the Radius of the Concavity e c , T. 16. F. 3. make k c thrice f c , l o is the Radius of the Cavity o i ; let l m be put equal to l o , and m n be put = l m , that is , o n shall then be equal to thrice o l.

I say the Ray d e , after a double Refraction , shall proceed in i h , as if it came directly from g , and that it shall be , As s l the Aggregate of the Semidiameters ( neglecting the Thickness of the Glass ) : To f c the Radius of one Concavity : : So o m the Diameter of t'other Concavity : To g c the Distance of the Point of Divergence .

By the first Refraction the Ray proceeds in e i , as if it came directly from k , k e i p being a Right Line ( Prop. X. ) .

Then the Inclination within the Glass is q i e = p i l. And the second Angle of Refraction is p i h = g i k , which is to be half the Angle of Inclination p i l.

Wherefore Sines and Angles being proportional , and the Thickness of the Glass neglected , we thus proceed in the Demonstration . In the Triang . g i k we have it — 1 g i k = h i p : g k i : : k g : g i = g c Double the Antecedent on this side , and halve the Consequent on t'other — 2 2 g i k = p i l : i k l : : k g : ½ g c Dividing the Second — 3 p i l − i k l ( = i l k 32. 1 Eucl. ) : i k l : : g k − ½ g c : ½ g c Then in the Trian . k l i ● 4 i l k : i k l : : k i = k c : i l = l o From the Third and Fourth it follows — 5 k c : o l : : k g − ½ g c : ½ g c Compounding the Fifth 6 k c + o l = k l : o l : : k g : ½ g c Double the Consequents 7 k l : 2 o l = o m = l n : : k g : g c Compound . the Seventh 8 k l + l n = k n : o m : : k g + g c = k c : g c Alternate the Eighth — 9 k n : k c : : o m : g c But k n is equal to 3 f l , that is , thrice the Aggregate of the Semidiameters f c and l o. Also k c is equal to thrice the Semidiameter f c : and as the Triples are , so are their Thirds . Wherefore from the 9th . Step it follows - 10 f l : f c : : o m : g c. Which was to be Demonst.

Example .

Let f c be = 8 Feet or 96 Inches

l o = 10 Feet , or 120 Inches .

Then f l shall be = to 216 Inches .

Say then f l = 216 : f c = 96 : : 240 = 2 l o : 107 = g c.

Or thus , f l = 216 : l o = 120 : : 192 = 2 f c : 107 = g c.

Corollary .

It follows from the four last Propositions , that supposing a Ray falling on a Concave Glass , and tending towards the virtual Focus , after it has passed the Glass , it shall proceed Parallel to the Axis . Because the Progress of Light through Glasses is reciprocal . Vid. Prop. VI.

Scholium .

It is before Demonstrated in Prop. IV. that the Focus or Point of Convergence of a Convex-Glass , for the Parallel Rays that fall obliquely thereon is at the same Distance , as the Focus of the direct Parallel Rays . The same may be Demonstrated concerning the Virtual Focus or Point of Divergence in Concave Glasses ; but 't is sufficient only to illustrate this Matter by Tab. 16. Fig. 4. Tab. 16. Fig. 4. Let us imagine the uppermost Point of a distant Object to send the Parallel Rays g a , g b , g c , on the Concave-Glass a b c , and its middle Point to send the Rays h a , h b , h c ; and the lowermost Point to send the Rays i a , i b , i c. Here are therefore three Radious Cones , having their Vertices in their respective Points of the Object , and their Bases on the Surface of the Concave-Glass : the Axes of these Cones , are g d b k , h e b l , i f b m : These , by what foregoes preliminary to the Prop. IV. may be conceived to pass the Glass as it were unrefracted . But the other Rays of each Cone are refracted , that is , g a is so refracted at a into a k , as if it proceeded directly from d the Virtual Focus or Point of Divergence for this oblique Cone . And so g c is refracted at c into c k , as if it proceeded directly from d. And in like manner h a , h b , h c , are refracted into a l , b l , c l , as if they came from e. And the Rays i a , i b , i c , are propagated in a m , b m , c m , as if they proceeded directly from f. So that d e f is the Virtual Focus of the Glass exposed to the Object , that sends these direct and oblique Cones of Rays .

Converging Rays .

The Properties of Concaves exposed to Converging Rays are shewn in these two next following Propositions .

PROP. XIV .

In Concave Glasses , if the Point to which the incident Ray converges , be distant from the Glass farther than the Virtual Focus of Parallel Rays , the Rule for finding the Virtual Focus of this Ray , is this :

As the difference between the distance of this Point from the Glass , and the distance of the Virtual Focus from the Glass :

Is to the distance of the Virtual Focus : :

So the distance of this Point of Convergence from the Glass :

To the distance of the Virtual Focus of this Converging Ray.

Tab. 17. Fig. 1. a b is a Plano Concave Glass , T. 17. F. 1. d the Centre of the Concavity , d a o a right Line , c f the length of the Virtual Focus , which ( by what foregoes , Prop. XI . ) is equal to 2 a d or 2 d c ; so that f d is equal to 3 d c or 3 a d. Let n a be a Ray of Light converging directly towards the Point g. If it be made according to the Rule in the Proposition , g f : f c : : g c : ch. Then h shall be the Virtual Focus of the Ray n a , that is the Ray n a after the double Refraction it receives by the Glass shall proceed onwards in a m , as if it came directly from h , mah being a Right Line .

The Proof hereof is after the same manner with the Prop. V. beforegoing ; and we suppose ( as in that ) the Thickness of the Glass to be nothing in Comparison to the Focal Length ; and likewise that the Angles of Incidence are so small , that they are as the Sines ; also that the Breadth of the Glass is so little , that it makes the Angles a g c , a d c , a h c , a p c , &c. very small and Proportionable to their Sines .

Demonstration .

Let p h be made half h c , and consequently the third Part of p c. I say by virtue of the first Refraction which the Ray suffers at its entrance into Glass at a , 't is refracted into a k , as if it proceeded directly from p , p a k being a Right Line .

First therefore it is by Position 1 g f : f c : : c g : c h Add to the Consequents their Halfs — 2 g f : f d : : c g : c p = p a Compounding the second — 3 g f + f d = g d : f d : : c g + c p = g p : p a Also in the Triangle g a d — 4 g d : d a = d c : : s ∠ d a g = s ∠ n a d : s ∠ g And Sines and Angles being proportional , it follows from the 4th . — 5 ⅓ n a d : ∠ g : : g d : 3 a d = f d It then follows from the 5th . and 3d. — 6 ⅓ n a d : ∠ g : : g p : p a Moreover in the Triangle g a p 7 g p : p a : : s ∠ g a p = s ∠ n a p : s ∠ g And Sines and Angles being proportional — 8 g p : p a : : ∠ n a p : ∠ g. From the 6th and 8th it follows 9 1● n a d : ∠ g : : ∠ n a p : ∠ g.

From which 9th Step 't is manifest that the first Angle of Refraction , n a p , is equal to ⅓ of the first Angle of Incidence n a d. Which was first required to be Demonstrated .

We are secondly to Demonstrate , that by virtue of the second Refraction the Ray receives on the plane side of the Glass at its Egress into Air , 't is refracted into m a , as if it came directly from h. Draw i a l Parallel to the Axis h g , and Perpendicular to the plane side of the Glass ; The Angle of Incidence is l a k = i a p ; the Angle of Refraction is m a k = h a p ; the refracted Angle m a l = h a i.

We are therefore to prove , that the refracted Angle m a l is equal to triple the Angle of Refraction m a k.

In the Triangle p a h we have this Analogy p a = p c : p h : : s ∠ a h p = s ∠ a h c = s ∠ h a i = s ∠ m a l : s ∠ h a p = s ∠ m a k. But p c is thrice p h , therefore ( Sines and Angles being proportional ) the Angle m a l is thrice the Angle m a k. Which was to be Demonstrated .

PROP. XV.

In Concave Glasses a b ( T. 17. F. 2. ) if the Point d to which the Incident Ray c a converges , Tab. 17. Fig. 2. be nigher to the Glass than the Virtual Focus of Parallel Raysi ; the Rule to find where it crosses the Axis at h , is this ,

As the Excess of the Virtual Focus more than this Point of Convergency i d :

To the Virtual Focus i e : :

So the distance of this Point of Convergency from the Glass d e :

To the distance of the Point where this Ray crosses the Axis h e.

In the forementioned Figure a b is a Plano-Concave Glass , f the Center of the Cavity i e the Length of the Virtual Focus of Parallel Rays , which we know is a Diameter of the Cavity , that is , = 2 f e. On this Glass there falls the Ray c a converging directly to the Point d. If it be made i d : i e : : d e : h e , I say h is the Point in the Axis , where the Ray c a , after its double Refraction , crosses it .

Demonstration .

For the Proof thereof we suppose all that we laid down as supposed in the last Proposition . Draw f a directly to g , and make h k equal to ½ h e. I shall first shew , that by virtue of the first Refraction , which the Ray suffers at a , 't is refracted directly towards k. Here the first Angle of Incidence is c a f , = g a d. If therefore we prove that k a d is equal to ⅓ c a f , our first Position shall be manifest , that the Ray is refracted first towards k.

For by the Rule it is — 1 i d : i e : : e d : e h Add to the Consequents their Halfs — 2 i d : i f : : e d : e k Inverting and dividing the Second 3 i f − i d = d f : i f : : e k − e d = d k : e k Moreover in the Triang . d f a 4 d f : a f : : s ∠ f a d = s ∠ c a f : s ∠ a d f From the 4th Step it follows 5 ⅓ ∠ c a f : ∠ a d f : : d f : 3 a f = i f By the 3d and 4th it is — 6 ⅓ c a f : a d f : : d k : e k Also in the Triangle a k d — 7 k d : k a = k e : s ∠ k a d : s ∠ k d a = s ∠ a d f Sines and Angles being prop. 8 k d : k e : : ∠ k a d : ∠ a d f. From the 6th and 8th it follows 9 ⅓ c a f : a d f : : k a d : a d f

Wherefore from this 9th Step 't is manifest that k a d is equal to ⅓ c a f , which was first to be Demonstrated .

I shall next demonstrate , that by virtue of the second Refraction the Ray proceeds in a h.

Draw o a l Parallel to the Axis f k , and therefore ( by Supposition 2d ) perpendicular to the plane side of the Glass . Here the Angle of Incidence from Glass to Air shall be o a k. I am therefore to prove that the Angle of Refraction k a h is equal to ⅓ o a h the refracted Angle . Thus ,

In the Triangle k a h it is k a = k e : k h : : s ∠ a h k = s ∠ a h e , = s ∠ o a h : s ∠ k a h

And Sines and Angl. being prop. k e : k h : : o a h : k a h

But k h is ⅓ of k e and therefore the Angle k a h , is ⅓ of the Angle o a h. Which was to be Demonstrated .

DIVERGING RAYS .

Corollary . Concerning Concave-Glasses exposed to Diverging Rays .

The Virtual Focus of a Concave Glass exposed to Parallel Rays is found by Prop. X , XI , XII , XIII . And the Properties of a Concave exposed to Converging Rays are shewn in Prop. XIV . and XV.

Let us now consider a Ray Diverging from the Axis , as suppose a nigh Object ( T. 17. F. 2. ) in h , T. 17. F. 2. in h , whose Ray h a diverges from the Axis h e , and so falls on the Concave Glass a b. Let us conceive this nigh Object h either farther from , or nigher to the Glass , than the Glasses Virtual Focus . This Ray after passing the Glass diverges more , than before it entred it . And the Rule for determining the Point d , from which this Ray after passing the Glass does as it were directly Diverge , is this ,

As the Sum of the distance of the Object from the Glass and the Glass's Virtual Focus :

To the Distance of the Object from the Glass : :

So the Glasses Virtual Focus :

To the distance of this Point of Divergency from the Glass :

Demonstration .

By the foregoing XVth Prop. — i d : i e : : d e : e h

And Alternating — i e : e h : : i d ( = i e — d e ) : d e

And Compounding — i e + e h : e h : : i e : d e

PROP. XVI . PROBL.

The Focal Lengths of two Convex-Glasses being given , the longer being placed before the shorter at any given Distance less than the longer Focal Length ; 'T is required to determin the Distance of the Distinct Base from the shorter Glass .

This is solved from the VIII . Proposition hereof .

Tab. 18. Fig. 1. c x c is a Convex-Glass uniting the Parallel Rays , b c , b c , T. 18 , F. 1 in its Focus at k ; f d f is a shorter Convex uniting the Parallel Rays g f , g f , in its Focus at s. In the Problem , k x the longer Focal Length , and s d the shorter Focal Length , and d x the Distance of the Glasses , are given ; To find d a , the Point wherein the Rays c i , c i , are united with the Axis by the Glass f f.

By the 8th . Proposition preceding , the Focal Length d s of the Convex-Glass f f being given , and the Distance of an Object d a being given less than the Focal Length d s , to find the Distance d k of the Imaginary Focus ; the Rule is , As the Difference between the Distance of the Object d a , and the Focal Length d s , that is , d s − d a = a s : To the Focal Length d s : : So the Distance of the Object from the Glass a d : To the Distance of the Imaginary Focus from the Glass d k.

Now whereas in the 8th . Proposition d a is given , and d k sought ; in this Problem d a is sought , and d k is given ; for d k is equal to the Difference between the Focal Length of the longer Glass k x , and the Glass's Distance x d.

Wherefore by the foresaid 8th . Proposition , and its Corollary , it being d s − d a = a s : d s : : a d : d k. It shall be also alternando d s : d k : : d s − d a : a d. And Compounding d s + d k : d k : : d s : a d. But in this Problem the Three first Terms of this last Analogy are given , and the last a d required . Wherefore by this Analogy , the last Term a d is found . And according to the Analogy we frame this Rule for solving this Problem .

As the Focal Length of the shorter Glass + the Difference between the Focal Length of the longer , and the Glasses Distance :

To the Difference between the Focal Length of the longer and the Glasses Distance : :

So the Focal Length of the shorter Glass :

To the Distance of the Distinct Base from the Glass .

Example .

Let the longer Focal Length be x k = 20 , the shorter Focal Length d s = 8. The Distance of the Glasses d x = 15.

Then x k − d x ( = d k ) + d s : d k : : d s : a d

In Numb. 20 − 15 ( = 5 ) + 8 = 13 : 5 : : 8 : 3,07692 .

Schol. 1. The same Solution holds , if the shorter Glass be placed before the longer , and the longer Glass at any Distance from the shorter less than the Focal Length of the shorter .

Let the shorter Focal Length be = 8 , the longer = 20 , and the Glasses Distance = 6 ; then 8 − 6 = 2 ; and the Proportion is 8 − 6 + 20 = 22 : 2 : : 20 : 1,8182 = to the Distance of the Compound Distinct Bast ( for so I 'll call it ) of these two Glasses from the last and longer Glass .

Corollary .

From hence is manifest the Rule which is before laid down after our 3d Proposition for Determining the Focus of a double Convex-Glass . The Rule is this , As the Sum of the Radii of both Convexities : To the Radius of either Convexity : : So the double Radius of t'other Convexity : To the Distance of the Focus . For Example , Let the Radius of one Convexity be 20 , and of t'other 8. Then 28 : 8 : : 40 : 11 , 4286. Or , 28 : 20 : : 16 : 11 , 4286 = Focus . Let us then conceive this double Convex-Glass to be divided into two Plano-Convex Glasses , formed on the same Spheres as the two Sides of the double Convex , Viz. One on a Sphere whose Radius is 20 ; and t'other on a Sphere whose Radius is 8 ; and these two Glasses placed touching each other on their plain Sides , the larger Focal Length would be 40 , and the shorter Focal Length would be 16 , and the Distance of the Glasses would be Nothing . Then by the Rule of the XVI . Prop. 16 + 40 = 56 : 40 : : 16 : 11,4286 = To the Compound Focus .

Scholium 2.

By this Proposition , and by the Corollaries of Prop. XXVI . hereafter , the Eight first Propositions of Dechales Second Book of Dioptricks are manifestly solved .

Another Solution of the same Problem .

My esteemed Friend , the Learned and Ingenious Mr. JOHN FLAMSTEED , Reg. Astron , has very neatly solved this Problem , and communicated the Solution , thereof to me , as follows .

Tab. 18. Fig. 2. Let b p b represent a Convex-Glass , T. 18. F. 2. whose Focus is at f ; let a b be two Rays falling upon it parallel to the Axis c f , which shall therefore be collected in f ; let n f k be another Convex-Glass of any different Sphere , whose Focus is h , its Distinct Base i h i. 'T is required to find , at what distance from the Point f , the Distinct Base shall be formed , the Glass n f k being placed any where nearer the Glass b b ; as suppose in X , Y , or p.

Through the Points X , Y , p , draw the Lines EX e , DY d , T p , at Right Angles to the Axis . And from the Points E , D , T , wherein they cut the refracted Ray b f , draw the Lines E o , D m , T n , parallel to the Axis . And from the Points o , m , n , where they fall on the Glass n f k , draw the Lines o q , m r , n s , parallel to the refracted Ray b f ; these represent this Ray f b falling upon the Glass n f k placed at X , Y , p.

Produce b f through the Glass to the Distinct Base , which it cuts in i , we may now consider q o , r m , s n , as three parallel Rays proceeding from the same Point of an Object infinitely distant , which by the known Properties of Glasses , shall be collected into the same Point i of the Distinct Base with the Ray b f. Draw therefore the Lines o i , m i , n i , intersecting the Axis in the Points x , y , g. Now , because the Focus is that Point , where the Ray falling upon the outward Glass is by the second Glass collected or made to converge with the Axis , the Points x , y , g , shall be the Foci sought ; that is , f x shall be the Compound Focal Length for the Glass n f k placed in X , f y when 't is placed in Y ; and f g when 't is placed in p , or when both the Glasses touch .

Now that we may find these Focal Lengths f x , f y , f g , draw m k parallel to the Distinct Base i h i , and i k parallel to the Axis f h. We suppose the Thickness of the Glasses to be as little as possible , and therefore the Lines representing the Rays , passing through them , are strait , and not at all bent .

Wherefore the Triangles DY f , hif are similar . Also the Triangles mki , mfy are similar . It shall therefore be — 1 f Y : f b : : YD ( = m f ) : h i Converting and Compound . 2 f Y + f h : f Y : : m f + h i : m f But by the Scheme — 3 m f + h i = m k Therefore the 2d is thus — 4 f Y + f h : f Y : : m k : m f And by the sim , ▵ m k i , m f y — 5 m k : m f : : k i : f y From the 4th and 5th it foll. 6 f Y + f h : f Y : : k i : fy

Now by Position b f = p f is the longer Focal Length , and f h = k i is the shorter Focal Length , and Y p the Distance of the Glasses ; and therefore f Y = p f − p Y is the longer Focus , — the Distance of the Glasses ; and f y is the Distance of the Distinct Base from the inward Glass . From all which , the foregoing 6th Analogy , being resolved into Words , gives his Rule for solving the Problem ,

As the longer Focus - the Glasses Distance + the shorter Focus :

To the longer Focus - the Glasses Distance : :

So the shorter Focus :

To the Distance of the Distinct Base from the inward Glass .

Or thus ,

As the Aggregate of the shorter Focus and the Difference between the longer and the Glasses Distance :

To the Difference between the longer Focus and Glasses Distance : :

So the shorter Focal Length :

To the Distance of the Distinct Base from the inward Glass .

Which is the very same Canon with that I have given , deduced from the 8th Proposition hereof .

This Problem is of considerable Use in Dioptricks , being the Foundation of an excellent sort of Telescope much used in England for the Night . But it seems no Optick Writer has solved it . Honoratus Faber has clearly omitted it . And Dechales , though he offers at our foresaid VIII . Proposition , on which our Solution of this Problem is founded ; yet missing so enormously as he has done in that , he could not pretend to the Solution of this . And had he rightly solved our VIII . Propsition , I question whether he would have pushed it on so far as to solve thereby this Problem ; for in the two next succeeding Problems , he has rightly the Propositions on which their Solutions depend , but leaves the Problems themselves untouch'd .

PROP. XVII . PROBL.

A Convex-Glass being given , with a Concave of a larger Sphere , the Concave being placed behind the Convex , at any Distance less than the Focal Length of the Convex ; 'T is required to find the Place of the Compound Focus , or Distinct Base of these two Glasses .

This Problem is solved by the XV. Proposition hereof . Tab. 18. F. 3. T. 18. F. 3. The Convex-Glass x is placed so before the Concave-Glass e , that this Convex would unite the Parallel Rays b f , b f , in its Focus at d , and the Rays q d , q d , would cross the Axis in d , unless the Concave e were interposed . Which Concave is supposed to have its Virtual Focus at i more distant than d the Distance of the Focus of the Convex x.

Wherefore here is a Ray q incident on the Concave e , and converges towards a Point d , nigher the Glass e than the Virtual Focus of parallel Rays i ; and 't is required to determine the Point h , where it crosses the Axis . The Rule by the XV. Proposition is this ,

As the Excess of the Focus of the Concave more than this Point of Convergency id :

To the Focus of the Concave ie : :

So the Distance of the Point of Convergency from the Glass de :

To the Distance of the Point where this Ray crosses the Axis he :

Now in our present Problem , the three first Terms of this Analogy are given , and the last required . For the Problem gives d x the Focal Distance of the Convex , and i e the Focus of the Concave , and e x the Distance of the Glasses . Hence we have d e ( = d x − e x ) the Distance from the Concave of the Point d , to which the Ray converges . And we have i d ( = i e − d e ) the Excels of the Virtual Focus of the Concave beyond the Point of Convergency d.

Wherefore by the foresaid Analogy it being , As i d : i e : : d e : he . The Rule for Solving this Problem is this ,

From the Focal Length of the Convex subtract the Glasses distance . Mark the difference , then say ,

As the Focal Length of the Concave — this difference :

To the Focal Length of the Concave : :

So this difference :

To the distance of the Distinct Base from the Concave .

1. Example . 2. Example . Focus Convex = d x = 20 Focus Conv. = 12 Focus Concave = i e = 60 Focus Conv. = 15 Glasses Distance = e x = 10 Glasses Dist. = 2 Hence — = d e = 10 Diff. Hence d e = 10 Difference And — = i d = 50 And i d = 5 Then i d = 50 : i e = 60 : : d e = 10 : h e = 12. Then 5 : 15 : : 10 : 30 = h e.

PROP. XVIII . PROBL.

The Focal Lengths of a Convex-Glass and a Concave-Glass being given , and the Concave placed towards the Object , distant from the Convex , so that the Sum of the Concaves Focal Length and Glasses distance may be greater than the Focal Length of the Convex , and this distance of the Glasses being given also ; 'T is required to determin the distance of the Distinct Base from the Convex .

This is performed by the V. Proposition hereof . Tab. 18. Fig. 4. T. 18. F. 4. Let b z c be a Concave , on which there fall the parallel Rays n b , m c , which ar so refracted by this Glass , that after passing it , they proceed on in b e , c f , as if they came directly from the Point a the Virtual Focus of the Concave , ( by Prop. X. XI . XII . hereof ) but in e and f meeting with the Convex-Glass , whose Focus is on each side it as s , s , the Rays diverge not to i and g , but are refracted , so that they cross the Axis in k.

We may therefore conceive these Rays , not as passing through the Concave b c , but as proceeding directly from the ●igh Point a ; and then to determine the Point k , where the cross the Axis , the Rule is in the Prop. V. thus ,

As sa the difference between the Focus sd of the Convex-Glass ef , and the distance da of the Object from the Glass :

To the Focus sd of the Convex-Glass : :

So the distance da of the Object from the Glass :

To the distance of the respective Focus dk .

Now in this Problem , the three first Terms of this Analogy are given , and the fourth d k is required . For the Sum of the Concaves Focal Length and the distance of the Glasses , that is , z a + d z is equal to d a ; and d a — the Convex's Focal Length that is d a − s d is equal to s a.

Wherefore we solve the Problem by this Canon .

From the Sum of the Focus of the Concave and distance of the Glasses subtract the Focus of the Convex , that is , z a + d z − s d = sa . Keep this difference , then say ,

As this difference sa :

To the Focus of the Convex sd : :

So the Sum of the Concaves Focus and Glasses distance za + + dz = ad :

To the distance of the Focus from the Convex d k.

Another Solution of the Two last Problems in Prop. XVII . and XVIII .

These Two last Problems were likewise communicated to me , most ingeniously solved by my forementioned Honoured Friend Mr. J. FLAMSTEED . The Solutions I shall give in his own Words at large , as I have them in a Letter to me Dated from the Greenwich-Observatory , Ian. 17. 168● . as follows

The First Problem is this , A Convex Glass being given , with a Concave of a larger Sphere ; the Concave being placed at any distance less than the Focal Length of the Convex from it , and remoter from the Object ; To find the Place of the Focus or Distinct Base .

The Second Problem is , From the same Data ; the Concave being placed nigher the Object ; To find the Distinct Base .

For the First Problem , Tab. 19. Fig. 1. T. 19. F. 1. B is a Convex-Glass , P its Focus , m k a Ray of Light falling upon it parallel to its Axis , which will therefore converge into its Focus at P. G is a Concave-Glass of a larger Sphere , placed upon the Focus of the Convex ; CP the Radius of the Sphere whereon the Concave is formed . And we are always to conceive the Thickness of both these Glasses where the Rays of Light pierce them as small as possible .

Draw the Line k P , this shews the way of the Ray m k after its Emersion from the Convex B. Produce it both ways at pleasure to t and h. Then conceive the Concave G placed any where betwixt P and B , as in q , q ; From which Places draw the Lines q o , q o , at Right Angles to the Axis . And from the Points o , o , k , wherein they intersect the refracted Ray k P ; draw the Lines o b , o b , k b , falling on the Concave G in b , b , b. From these Points again draw the Lines b r , b r , b r , parallel to the refracted Ray k P ; these shall represent the Ray. k P falling on the Concave G placed at q , q ; and also when it touches the Convex B. Let these then be consider'd as so many parallel Rays , proceeding from the same distant Point . Wherever they shall intersect the Axis after they have passed the Concave , there shall be the true Focus for both Glasses , which I shall call the Compound Focus ▪ To find which we are to remember ;

That , as the Parallel Rays of Light falling on a Convex-Glass , are all collected very nearly in the same Point of the distinct Base ; so also the Rays of Light falling Parallel to each other on a Concave , after they emerge from it , diverge and separate , as if they had all proceeded from the same Point , which I therefore call the Point of Divergency ( This , in my foregoing Propositions , I term with most Optick Writers , the Virtual Focus ) Which Point in a Concave-Glass is just as far distant from it , as the Point of Convergency , or Focus of a Convex of the same Sphere or Spheres is distant from it . We know the Focal Point is some little nigher the Glass in the Parallel Rays that fall widest from the Axis , than in those that fall near it ; so is the Point of Divergency for Concaves . But the difference is so small in Glasses of a large Sphere ( such as in these Problems we suppose ) that for all Rays falling on the Glass Parallel to each other , it may be taken as a simple Point . Such therefore we are to conceive it ; and then to find this Point of Divergency , The Rule is ( Corol. Prop. XI . ) 300 − 193 = 107 : 193 : : So CP the Radius of the Plano-Concave-Glass : To P h : Which in Glasses of a large Sphere , and where the Inclination of P h is small , will be insensibly different from P g ; h g being perpendicular to the Axis . Or we may determine this Point of Divergence Geometrically thus , On the Centre P with any Radius P t , on the void side of the Figure , strike the Arch a t ; then make it 300 : 193 : : t s : au . Draw P a , and from C the Centre of the Concave draw C h Parallel to a P. The Point h , wherein it cuts the Line P k produced upwards , shall be the Point of Divergency sought .

Lay a Ruler over the Point h , and the Points b , b , b ; this , where it cuts the Axis g p produced , as in f , f , shall give all the possible Compound Foci

Then h g being perpendicular to the Axis , produce the Lines b o , till they cut it in d , d.

Then the Triangles h P g , o P q are similar : likewise the Triangles h f g , b f P are similar also . It will then hold o b similia Triangula h P g , o P q 1 h P o P : : h g : d g Dividing the First — 2 h P − o P : o P : : h g − d g : d g That is , — 3 h o : o P : : h d : d g = o q Moreover by Simil. Triang . h f g , b f P — 4 h d : d g : : h b : b f From the 3d and 4th it follows — 5 h o : o P : : h b : bf . And Compound the 5th — 6 h o + o P : o P : : h b + b f : b f That is , — 7 h P : o P : : h f : bf And Dividing the 7th — 8 h P − o P : o P : : h f − b f : b f That is , — 9 h P − o P : o P : : h b : b f : But h P = g P = h b , and so likewise o P = q P , ( the Inclination of k P , as is said before , being supposed very small ; and the Glasses of small Segments of large Spheres . ) Wherefore the 9th is thus — 10 g P - q P : q P : : g P : bf . But by Position Focus of the Concave 11 = g P = h P. Focus of the Convex 12 = z P. Distance of the Glasses 13 = z q. Fo. Convex - Gl. dist. = q P = z P − z q.

Wherefore the 10th . Analogy , by the 11th , 12th , and 13th Steps , resolved into Words gives this Rule ,

As the Focus of the Concave-Focus of the Convex + distance of the Glasses :

To the Focus of the Convex-distance of the Glasses : :

So the Focus of the Concave :

To b f = to the distance of the Distinct Base from the Concave .

And this Canon of Mr. Flamsteed is the very same with ours in the preceding 17 th Proposition deduced from the 15 th hereof .

But if the Concave be placed next the Object : Which is his Problem II , and our XVIIIth Proposition , my forementioned Learned Friend solves it thus .

Tab. 19. F. 2. D is a Concave , T. 19. F. 2. E a Convex , h p the Focal Length of the Concave , gp = gq the Focal Length of the Convex . Let s k be a Ray of Light falling into the Concave at k. From the Point of Divergency h , through k draw the Line k d ; this shall shew the refracted Path of the Ray s k after it has passed the Glass D. From q the Focus of the Convex E erect q b perpendicular to the Axis h f ; and through g draw the Line r g b Parallel to k d , intersecting the distinct Base of the Convex E in b , through which draw d b , continuing it till it intersect the Axis in f : There shall be the compound Focus or distinct Base for these Glasses thus posited . Draw now the Line d g at Right Angles to the Axis ; produce s k till it cut d g in m ; and draw b n Parallel to q g.

Then the Triangles h d g , h k p , b g q , are similar . Also the Triangles b d n , f b q , are similar . And h p + p g = h g. It shall therefore be — 1 h g : g q : : d g : n g = b q And converting the First — 2 h g : h g − g q : : d g : d g − n g Inverting the second — 3 h g − g q : h g : : d g − n g : d g. That is , by the Scheme — 4 h g − g q : h g : : d n : d g. Then by the similar Triangles d n b , d g f — 5 d n : d g : : n b = g q : g f From 4 and 5 it follows — 6 h g − g q : h g : : g q : g f Then h g being = to h p + p g , the 6th is thus 7 h p + pg − g q : hp + p g : : g q : g f. But by Position Focus of the Concave — 8 = h p Focus of the Convex — 9 = g q Distance of the Glasses — 10 = p g Focus of Concave + Glasses dist. — 11 = h g = h p + p g Dist. of the distinct Base from Convex — 12 = g f

From all which the 7th Analogy may be thus expressed in words ,

As the Focus of the Concave + the distance of the Glasses-the Focus of the Convex :

To the Focus of the Concave + the distance of the Glasses : :

So the Focus of the Convex :

To the Distance of the distinct Base from the Convex :

Which is the same Rule with that which I have before given in Prop. XVIII , deduced from the 5th hereof .

And these two last Propositions do naturally lead us to the Consideration of Meniscus-Glasses .

MENISCUS-GLASSES .

That is called a Meniscus-Glass , which is Convex on one side and Concave on t'other . 'T is so named from its Resemblance to the New Moon or Lunula , in Greek 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 .

In Meniscus-Glasses either the Semidiameter of the Convexity and Concavity are equal or unequal : If they are equal the Ray that falls thereon Parallel to the Axis , after Refraction proceeds again Parallel : If they are unequal , then either the Semidiameter of the Convexity is less than the Semidiameter of the Cavity , and then the Convexity prevails , and the Glass has a Real Focus : Or else the Semidiameter of the Cavity is less than the Semidiameter of the Convexity , and then the Cavity prevails , and the Glass has only a Virtual Focus . But of these more fully in the following Propositions ; Observ. This Observation being premised , That the Focus of a Meniscus , the Semidiameter of whose Convexity is less than the Semidiameter of the Concavity , and these two Semidiameters being given , is easily determined by Prop. XVII preceding . For in that Proposition , two Glasses are given , one a Convex , and t'other a Concave , and the Focal Length of the Convex is shorter than that of the Concave . And whereas in that Prop. there is given a distance between the Glasses , let us conceive this Distance to be nothing , that is , let us imagine these Glasses to touch ; and their Results a Meniscus whose Focus is determined by the same Rule in that Prop. Which is this ,

As the Focal Length of the Concave-the Focal Length of the Convex + the Glasses Distance :

To the Focal Length of the Concave : :

So the Focal Length of the Convex-the Glasses Distance :

To the Distance of the Distinct Base from the Concave .

As the Focal Length of the Concave-the Focal Length of the Convex :

To the Focal Length of the Concave : :

So the Focal Length of the Convex :

To the Distance of the Focus of the Meniscus .

Now if we have given the Semidiameters of the Convexity and Concavity of a Meniscus , we have given the Focal Lengths of the Plano-Convex and Plano-Concave of which this Meniscus is compounded . For these Focal Lengths may be assumed the Doubles of the Semidiameters , wherefore Halfs being as their Wholes , the foresaid Rule for finding the Focus of a Meniscus may be thus expressed ,

As the Difference of the Semidiameters of the Convexity and Concavity :

To the Semidiameter of the Concavity : :

So the Diameter of the Convexity :

To the Focal Length .

Which is the Common Rule assigned by Optick Writers . But of this more fully hereafter Prop. XXIII . And tho this Rule in General were sufficient for determining the Foci of Meniscus-Glasses , yet I shall inlarge more fully thereon in the following Propositions .

PROP. XIX .

In a Meniscus , if both spherical Superficies have the same Diameter , the Ray that falls thereon Parallel to the Axis , after its second Refraction proceeds again Parallel .

Tab. 20. F. 1. mn is a Meniscus , b c the Semidiameter of the Convexity e c , f a the Semidiameter of the Concavity i a , d e a Ray of Light Parallel to the Axis k g. I say this Ray after a double Refraction , one at e , and t'other at i , proceeds in i h Parallel to k g.

We here suppose the Thickness of the Glass inconsiderable in respect of the Semidiameter of the Sphere on which 't is form'd ; and therefore we wholly neglect it .

We suppose also that Sines and Angles and Sides in these small Angles are Proportional .

Let g c = g a be made Triple b c = f a , the Ray d e by its first Refraction at its Entrance into the Glass at e is refracted towards g , eig being a Right Ling ; at i the Ray emerges from the Glass on the Concave Surface i a. Draw f i l. Now the Angle of Inclination within the Glass is l i e = f i g , and if the Ray be refracted into i h , the Angle of Refraction is hig = igf , which ought therefore to be ½ the Inclination f i g , and , that it is so , I thus prove .

In the Triangle g i f , As g f : To i f : : So the Angle g i f : To the Angle i g f. But g f is double i f , therefore ∠ gif is double ∠ igf . Which was to be Demonstrated .

PROP. XX.

In a Meniscus , if the Semidiameter of the Concavity be triple the Semidiameter of the Convexity , the Focal Length is equal to the Semidiameter of the Concavity .

This is most evident , if the Convex-side be turned to the Ray , T. 20 , F. 2. as Tab. 20. Fig. 2. hi is a Ray parallel to the Axis a b , d c the Semidiameter of the Convexity f c i g , b e = 3 d c the Semidiameter of the Concavity fekg . The Ray , by the first Refraction it suffers on the Convex Surface at i , is directed to concur with the Axis at a Diameter and an half of the Convexity , that is , in b. But b is the Centre of the Concavity ; wherefore the Ray i k within the Glass falls perpendicularly on the Concave Surface f k g ; and therefore is not at all refracted by its Emersion from the Glass , but proceeds onwards directly in i k b. Which was to be Demonstrated .

But let the Concave-side be towards the Ray , as Tab. 20. Fig. 3. fc T. 20. F. 3. is the Semidiameter of the Conexity i c , g k = 3 f c the Semidiameter of the Convcavity e k , d e a Ray parallel to the Axis , produced directly to m. Let l c be made equal to g k , I say the Focus shall be at l , l c being equal to the Semidiameter of the Concavity . Draw g e o. The Angle of the Rays Inclination on the Concave Surface is d e g = o e m ( Ang. ad Verticem ) and the Ray by the first Refraction it receives on the Concave Surface at e is so refracted as if it came from the Point h distant a Diameter and half of the Concavity then draw hein directly . Here m e n = d e h = e h g is the Angle of Refraction , which is therefore ● of the Inclination d e g = e g k = oem . But we suppose , as the Angles so are the Sines , and so are the Sides . Wherefore in the Triangle e g h , s ∠ e g h = s ∠ e g k : s ∠ e h k : : e h = k h : e g , that is , ∠ e g k : ∠ e h k : : k h : e g. But the Angle e g k is equal to 3 ∠ e h k , and therefore k h is equal to 3 e g , and consequently g h is double e g or g k. From f the Centre of the Convexity draw f i p , this is perpendicular to the Convex Surface i c. Wherefore seeing g h is double g k , and g k is triple f c or f i , h f shall be octuple f i ( by the Scheme ) . And the Second Angle of Inclination h i f on the Convex Surface shall be octuple of the Angle at h , because their Correspondent subtending Sides are as 8 to 1. But h i f is equal to p i n ( Ang. ad Vert. ) And because at the Rays Egress from Glass to Air , the Angle of Refraction n i l ought to be half the Inclination p i n , so let it be made ; and then seeing the Angle p i n is octuple the Angle at h , its half n i l shall be quadruple the Angle at h ; from the Angle n i l subtract the Angle n i m = d i h = ∠ h , there remains the Angle m i l = i l f = 3 ∠ h ; wherefore the Angle at l and e g k = 3 e h k are equal . And then in the Triangle e l g ( neglecting the Thickness of the Glass ) e l and e g , or c l and k g the Semidiameter of the Concavity are equal . Which was to be Demonstrated .

Observation .

This is the 28th . Prop. of Dechales First Book of Dioptricks , which he there huddles over in a most confused manner , omitting several Steps in the Demonstration . Zahn has the same in Fund . 2. Syntag. 1. Cap. 7. Prop. 32. and transcribes from Dechales not omitting his very Errors .

PROP. XXI .

In a Meniscus , the Semidiameter of whose Convexity is triple the Semidiameter of the Concavity , The Virtual Focus is distant the Semidiameter of the Convexity .

Tab. 20. F. 4. T. 20. F. 4. a b is the Semidiameter of the Concavity b d , k c = 3 a b is the Semidiameter of the Convexity c f , r d a Ray parallel ot the Axis k c. This Ray by the first Refraction it receives on the Concave Surface at d , is refracted into d e , as if it came directly from the Point k ( by Prop. X. ) , wherefore d e falls perpendicular on the Convex Surface ( by D e f. 10. ) and consequently is not refracted at its egress from the Glass ( by Exp. 3. ) wherefore the Virtual Focus is at k. Which was to be Demonstrated .

PROP. XXII .

In whatever Meniscus wherein the Semidiameters of the Convexity and Concavity are unequal ; The General Rule that assigns the Focus either Real or Virtual is this ,

As the difference of the Semidiameters :

To either of the Semidiameters , whether of the Convexity or Concavity : :

So is the Diameter , of the other Surface :

To the Focus Real or Virtual .

( Case 1. ) I shall demonstrate this Proposition in Three several Cases , and the First shall be , Where the Semidiameter of the Concave is greater than the Semidiameter of the Convex , but less than triple the Semidiameter of the Convex .

( Case 2. ) Wherein the Semidiameter of the Concave is greater than triple the Semidiameter of the Convex .

And in these Two Cases the Glass has a Real Focus .

( Case 3. ) Wherein the Semidiameter of the Concave is less than the Semidiameter of the Convex , and then the Glass has only a Virtual Focus .

'T is here supposed , that the Breadth of the Glass is so little , and the Angles so small , that Sines and Angles and Sides may be proportional . For an Angle , we often assume its Complement to 180° , as having the same Sine .

'T is supposed likewise that the Thickness of the Glass is inconsiderable , and therefore 't is wholly neglected .

First therefore for the First Case . Tab. 20. Fig. 5. T. 20. F. 5. Let d e be a Ray parallel to the Axis c k , f c is the Semidiameter of the Convexity e c ; g l is the Semidiameter of the Concavity o l. Make h c triple f c. Then by the first Refraction the Ray suffers at e , 't is directed towards h ( by Prop. I. ) . Wherefore the Angle of Inclination upon its Emersion from the Glass is g o h. Let the Angle of Refraction h o k be made half g o h. Then k is the Focus , and it being so made , I say , the difference of the Semidiameters = f g : Is to f c the one Semidiameter : : As 2 g l the other Diameter : To c k the Focal Length .

Demonstration .

In the Triangle h o g — 1 ∠ h o g : ∠ o h g : : h g : g o = g l And therefore — 2 ½ h o g = h o k : o h g : : h g : 2 g l Moreover in the Triang . h o k 3 h o k : o h g : : h k : o k = k l From 2 and 3 it follows — 4 h g : 2 g l : : h k : k l By permuting the 4th . — 5 2 g l : k l : : h g : h k Compounding the 5th . — 6 2 g l + k l : k l : : h g + h k = g k : h k But k l is equal to k g + + g l , therefore — 7 2 g l + k l = 2 g l + k g + g l = 3 g l + g k Wherefore the 6th . runs thus 8 3 g l + g k : k l : : g k : h k By permuting the 8th . — 9 3 g l + g k : g k : : k l : h k Dividing the 9th . — 10 3 g l : g k : : k l − h k = h l : h k And permuting the 10th . — 11 3 g l : h l = 3 f l : : g k : h k From 11 and 6 it follows — 12 3 g l : 3 f l : : 2 g l + k l : k l And consequently from 12 13 g l : f l : : 2 g l + k l : k l Dividing the 13th . — 14 g l − f l = f g : f l = f c : : 2 g l : k l = k c

For the Thickness of the Glass is neglected , and therefore we assume k l = k c.

But this 14th . Analogy f g : f c : : 2 g l : k c. Is the Proposition which was to be Demonstrated .

Note , Zahn does again in this Proposition transcribe from Dechales , and copies the very Mistakes of the Press . But in our foregoing Demonstration all is rectified .

Corollary .

Because — f g : f c : : 2 g l : k c

It shall also be — f g : g l : : 2 f c : k c

For if it be — f g : f c : : 2 g l : k c

Then Permuting f g : 2 g l : : f c : k c

Then halve the first Consequent and double the last Antecedent , and it shall be f g : g l : : 2 f c : k c. Which was to be Demonstrated .

In the 2. Case , Let fc , Tab. 20. Fig. 6. T 20. F. 6. be the Semidiamiter of the Convexity e c. Make c h equal to 3 f c. Let g l be the Semidiameter of the Concave l o , d e a Ray parallel to the Axis , which by the first Refraction tends towards h ( by Prop. I. ) Now the Angle of Inclination on the Concave Surface is h o g ; for g o is the Perpendicular . Wherefore the Ray by the second Refraction from Glass to Air is bent from the Perpendicular by half the Angle of Inclination ; Let k o h be this Angle of Refraction = ½ h o g. I say then , that As g f : To l f or f c ( neglecting the Thickness of the Glass ) : : So 2 g l : To c k or l k.

Demonstration .

In the Triangle g o h — 1 ∠ o h g or o h l : ∠ g o h : : o g = g l : g h. And therefore — 2 o h l : ⅓ g o h = h o k : : 2 g l : g h Moreover in the Triang . h o k 3 o h l : h o k : : o k = l k : k h. From 2 and 3 it follows — 4 2 g l : g h : : l k : k h. Permuting 4 — 5 2 g l : l k : : g h : k h. Compound the 4th . — 6 2 g l + g h : g h : : l k + k h : k h. Permute the 6th . — 7 2 g l + g h : l k + k h : : g h : k h. From 5 and 7 it follows — 8 2 g l + g h : l k + k h = l h : : 2 g l : l k. Compound the 8th . 9 2 g l + ( g h + l h = ) g l = 3 g l : l h = 3 l f : : 2 g l + l k : l k. And from the 9th . it follows 10 g l : l f : : 2 g l + l k : l k. And dividing the 10 11 g l − l f = g f : l f : : 2 g l : l k. Which was to be Demonstrated .

Corollary .

Because — g f : l f : : 2 g l : l k.

It shall be also — g f : g l : : 2 l f : l k , by the foregoing Corollary .

Lastly in the third Case , Tab. 21. f. 1. f l T. 21. F. 1. is the Semidiameter of the Concavity i l , n c the Semidiameter of the Convexity e c. Let c m be made Triple n c. d e is a Ray Parallel to the Axis k m. this Ray by its First Refraction proceeds in e i m ; at i it emerges into Air on the Concave Surface . Draw the Perpendicular fig. The Angle of Inclination on this Concave Surface is e i g = f i m , ad Vert. Let the Angle of Refraction h i m be made equal to ½ f i m. as it ought to be . Then , I say , the Ray Proceeds after its Second Refraction in i h , as if it came directly from the Virtual Focus k , and that then it shall be , as n f : n c : : 2 f l : k c.

Demonstration .

In the Trian . m i f — 1 ∠ m i f : ∠ m : : f m : f i = f l. Therefore — 2 ½ m i f = h i m : ∠ m : : f m : 2 f l. Also in Trian . m i k — 3 ∠ m i k or its Compl. ∠ h i m : ∠ m : : m k : i k = k l. From 2 and 3 — 4 f m : 2 f l : : m k : k l = k c neglecting the Thickness . Dividing 4 — 5 f m − 2 f l : 2 f l : : m k − k l = m l = m c : k c. But by Position in the Scheme 6 f m − 2 f l = m l − 3 f l. Wherefore the 5th Runs thus 7 m l ( = m c ) − 3 f l : 2 f l : : m l = m c : k c. And Permuting 7 — 8 m c ( = 3 n c ) − 3 f l : m c : : 2 f l : k c. And therefore — 9 n c − f l = n f : ⅓ m c = n c : : 2 f l : k c. Which was to be Demonstrated .

Corollary .

Seeing it is — n f : n c : : 2 f l : k c.

It shall be also — n f : f l : : 2 n c : k c.

Vid. Preceding Corollaries .

PROP. XXIII . PROBL.

The Semidiameter of the Convexity being given , 't is required to find the Semidiameter of the Concavity , that a Meniscus formed with this Convexity and Concavity may unite the Parallel Rays at a given distance . Vid. Barrow Lect. Opt. 14. pag. 102. &c. Edit. Lond. 1672. 4 to .

Tab. 21. F. 2. T. 21. F. 2. a e = a d is the given Semidiameter of the Convexity , d f is the given Distance , at which the Parallel Rays are to be united , z e produced to k is a Ray Parallel to the Axis d f. Draw a e h on the Point of Incidence e as a Centre at any Interval , strike the Arch k o a , and make the sine of the Angle of Incidence k m , to the Sine of the first refracted Angle o n , as 300 to 193 , or as 14 to 9. Draw e o l produced the other way to c. The Ray by the first Refraction is directed to l ; in the Line l e take any Point at Pleasure i , so that e i may be the Thickness of the Glass which is to be formed ; which Thickness is here represented considerable , for Illustration sake , but it being really of no Moment in Glasses of small Segments of large Spheres , 't is neglected altogether in Demonstration . Draw f i which we suppose equal to f d. And make the Angle l i q : To the Angle l i f : : As 193 : To 107. Draw q i which cuts the Azis in b. On b as a Centre strike the Arch of the Concavity ix . I say bi = bx is the Semidiameter of the Concavity , which added on t'other side the Glass to the former given Convexity , shall unite the Parallel Rays at the given distance d f.

Demonstration .

By the first Refraction the Course of the Ray is through e i l , but at i it meets the Concave Surface , and emerges from thence into Air. Now the second Angle of Inclination is b i l , for b i is perpendicular to the Concave Surface . But the Angle l i f is ( by Construction ) To the Angle l i q : : As 107 : To 193. Wherefore l i f is the second Angle of Refraction agreable to the second Angle of Inclination b i l ( by Exp. 6. ) Wherefore i p f is the refracted Ray. Which was to be Demonstrated .

Calculation of an Example .

Let the Semidiameter of the Convexity a e = a d be given 10000. and the Focal Distance d f = f i 63000.

Let us suppose the first Angle of Inclination k e a to be 5° . 0 ' . 01 " .

Then as 300 : to 107 : : s. ● k e a : s. ● i l a , which is the first Angle of Refraction = 1° . 46 ' . 50 " . Wherefore i l f = 178° . 13 ' . 10 " .

Also ( by Prop. 1. ) As 107 : 300 : : a e = 10000 : To el = il = ld = 28037.

Then in the Triangle i f l , we have the three sides and the Angle i l f , to find the Angle , i f l = 0° . 47 ' . 30 " and f i l = 0° . 59 ' . 20 " .

Say then , As 107 : To 193 : : s. ∠ f i l : s. ∠ l i q which we shall find to be 1° . 47 ' . 0 " .

And f i l + l i q = f i b = 2° . 46 ' . 20 " . Also 180° − f i b − i f l = i b f = 176° . 26 ' . 10 " .

Lastly in the Triangle f i b

As s. ∠ i b f = 176° . 26 ' . 20 " Log. comp. ar. 1. 2064785633

To — s. ∠ i f b = 0 47 30 — 8. 1404059077

So i f = 63000 — 4. 7993405495

To b i = b i = 14000 — 4. 1462250205

Wherefore I say that a Meniscus , whose Convexity hath the Semidiameter 10000 , and the Concavity the Semidiameter 14000 , has its Focal Length 63000.

Further Proof .

To Prove this by some of the foregoing Rules for finding the Focus of a Meniscus . Let us conceive such a Meniscus to consist of a Plano-Convex Glass , and a Plano-Concave Glass . And the Semidiameter of the Plano-Convex to be 10000 , and the Semidiameter of the Plano-Concave 14000. Then to find the Focal Lengths of these Glasses separately , say ,

By Corol. Prop. II. 107 : 193 : : 10000 : 18037 = Fo. Conv.

And by Corol. Pr. XI . 107 : 193 : : 14000 : 25252 = Fo. Conc. Diff. 7215

Then by the Observation Preliminary to Prop. XIX . 7215 : 25252 : : 18037 : 63128 = to the Focal length of such a Meniscus . Which comes sufficiently nigh 63000 , considering the foregoing Angles are Calculated only in Round Numbers to every 10 " seconds .

What is here performed by supposing the First Angle of Inclination k e a = 5° . 0' . 0 " , may be likewise done supposing it of an other Inclination , and as the Angle is smaller it will be the more exact .

PROP. XXIV .

An intire Glass-Sphere Unites the Parallel Rays at the Distance almost of half its Semidiameter behind it .

'T is here supposed that the Incident Rays do not fall distant from the Axis more than 20 or 30 Degrees .

Tab. 21. f. 3. T. 21. F. 3. a k is a Glass-Sphere . On the Point d there falls the Ray b d Parallel to the Axis a k. I say this Ray after a Double Refraction concurs with the Axis in the Point f , so that f k is almost half the Semidiameter of the Sphere .

c is the Centre of the Sphere , make k h equal to the Semidiameter c k , then a h is a Diameter and Half . And the Ray b d by the First Refraction proceeds in d e directly towards the Point h. But at e it emerges from Glass to Air. Draw the Perpendicular c e g , the Angle of this second Inclination is c e d = g e h. Now the Ray instead of proceeding directly to h is refracted from the Perpendicular e g by the Angle f e h , which is therefore to be half c e d. And that it is so , I thus prove . c e d is equal to e c h + e h c ( 32. 1. Eucl. ) but e c h and e h c are to sense equal , their Subtenses e h and e c being very near equal : wherefore e h c is half c e d. But e h c is equal to f e h ( their Subtenses f e and f h being as to sense equal ; for f k by supposition is equal to f h , and f e is very near equal to f k , therefore f e is almost equal to f h ) and consequently the Angle f e h is half c e d or g e h. Which was to be Demonstrated .

PROP. XXV .

A Glass Hemisphere Unites the Parallel Rays at the Distance of a Diameter and one third of a Semidiameter from the Pole of the Glass .

Tab. 21. f. 4. T. 21. F. 4. a d c is a Glass Hemisphere , b d a Ray of Light Parallel to the Axis a h. This Ray after a Double Refraction Crosses the Axis in the Point f , so that f c is a Semidiameter and one third of a Semidiameter . Make c k

and k h each equal to c a. By the first Refraction at d , the Ray is directed towards h in d e h. At e the Point where it emerges from the Glass , draw p e r Perpendicular to the Surface c e. Now the second Angle of Inclination is d e p = h e r ( 15. 1. ) = k h e ( 29. 1. ) = k e h. ( For k e being nighly equal to k c , 't is also nighly equal to k h ; Then in the Equilateral Triangle k e h , the Angle k e h shall be nighly equal to the Angle k h e ) And the Angle of Refraction is f e h. And this we are to prove equal to ● the Inclination h e r or e h f. Seeing k h is equal to c k , and k f is ⅓ of k h by Construction , it follows that c f is double f h ( for c k + k f = c f = 33 + ⅓ = 43 , and f h = ⅔ , but 43 is = to double ⅔ ) But e f is nighly equal to c f ; therefore e f is nighly double f h. Then in the Triangle f e h , as the Sides , so the Angles ( by supposition ) therefore the Angle e h f is nighly double the Angle f e h. Which was to be Demonstrated .

Definition .

The Projection of an Object in the Distinct Base of a Convex Glass , I call the Image .

PROP. XXVI .

As the Distance of the Object from the Glass :

To the Distance of the Image from the Glass : :

So the Diameter of the Objects Magnitude :

To the Diameter of the Image .

Tab. 22. f. 1. a b c T. 22. F. 1. is an Object , k d m a Convex Glass in the Hole of a Dark Chamber , e f g the Image formed by this Glass on a White Paper in the Distinct Base . I say , As c d the Distance of the Object from the Glass : To e d the Distance of the Image from the Glass : : So a c the Objects Magnitude : To g e the Magnitude of the Image .

To shew this , we are to remember the Premises to the IV Proposition . For by them we shall find , that the Axes a d , and c d of the Luminous Cones k a m , k c m , may be consider'd as passing the Glass unrefracted . Because that after they have passed the Glass and become d g , d e , they proceed Parallel to their Course before they entred the Glass . So that in Glasses of large Spheres , and small Segments , the thickness of the Glass being inconsiderable in respect of the Focal Distance , we may neglect it . And then we have here two Similar Triangles a d c , g d e ; For ● a d c is equal to ● e d g ( 15. 1. Eucl. ) and the Side e g is Parallel to the Side a c ( by supposition ) and consequently the Angle c a d is equal to the Angle e g d. ( 29. 1. ) and a c d is equal to the Angle g e d. Wherefore it shall be c d : e d : : a c : g e. Which was to be Demonstrated .

Note . From hence appears the Mistake committed by Monsieur Comiers in De Blegny's Zodiacus Medico-Gallicus . An. 3tio . pag 117. Who says , Diameter Imaginis Solis in Distinctâ Basi obtinebit ad minimum in sua Diametro Funem seu Chordam Dimidii Gradus magni Circuli Sphaerae , cujus Vitrum est segmentum . Whereas it should be , Magni Circuli Sphaerae , cujus Radius est Distantia Focalis Vitri .

What is here Demonstrated concerning the Real Image of a Convex Glass may be accommodated to the Virtual Image of a Concave .

Scholium .

But if we are yet more scrupulous , and will consider also the thickness of the Glass ; Then the Point within the Glass from whence the Distance of the Distinct Base is to be counted , may be thus determin'd in a Plano-Convex Glass . Tab. 22. f. 2 , T. 22. F. 2. k d m is a Plano-Convex Glass with its Convex Side towards the Object a b c ; a d , c d , the Axes of Radious Cones falling Obliquely on the Glass in its Pole d ; Which ( if the Glass were not interposed ) would proceed directly on to p , p , but by the Glass are now refracted into d i , d i ; But at i i meeting with the Second surface of the Glass , instead of going strait onwards , they are again Refracted into i e , i g , Parallel to a d , c d. Let e i , g i be produced backwards till they Intersect the Axis b f in x , I say x is the Point in the Glasses Axis , from whence the Distance of the Distinct Base is to be reckon'd . And as the Thickness of the Glass d z : To the Distance of this Point x from the Inner surface z x : : So is the Co-tangent of the Angle of Incidence from Glass to Air : To the Co-tangent of the Refracted Angle .

For to the Point of Incidence i draw l i r Perpendicular to k m. Here the Angle of Incidence from Glass to Air is l i d = i d z and the Complement of i d z is d i z , whose Tangent is d z ( making i z Radius ) and the Refracted Angle is r i e = i x z whose Complement is x i z , and the Tangent hereof is x z.

In Double Convexes the Case is something different , but 't is needless to inlarge any farther thereon .

Wherefore we see , that if we use a Plano-Convex Glass with its Convex-side towards the Object , and if we allow for its Thickness , we are to compute the Distance of the Object from the Pole of the Glass d , and the Distance of the Distinct Base from the Point x. But supposing the Plane Side towards the Object e f g , then we are to reckon the Distance of the Object e f g from the the Point x , and the Distance of the Distinct Base a b c from d the Pole of the Glass . Vid. Prop. XXVII .

Corollary 1.

It follows from this Prop. XXVI . That the Diameter of the Sun subtending an Arch of 32 Minutes in a Great Circle of the Heavens , the Diameter of the Sun's Image , Represented in the Distinct Base of a Convex-glass , subtends an Arch of 32 Minutes in a Circle , whose Radius is the Distance of the Distinct Base from the Glass .

But Tab. 23. Fig. 1. T. 23. F. 1. b is a Convex-Glass , a b a Ray of Light proceeding from the Sun 's Eastern Limb , d b a Ray from its Centre , c b a Ray from its Western Limb. Let the single Glass b Represent the Image of the Sun in the Distinct Base h q i , and let us suppose the Sun's Diameter to be 32 ' Minutes . Draw b h , b q , b i. Let e x z f be an other Plano-Convex-Glass , so placed behind the Glass b that both these Glasses together ( according to Prop. XVI . ) may Represent the Sun's Image in the Distinct Base k p o : 'T is required to find the Breadth or Diameter k o of this Image , from these Data , h b q the Angle of the Sun's Semidiameter 16 ' Minutes , b q the Focal Length of the Glass b , b f the Distance of the Glasses , p f the Distance of the Distinct Base from the Glass f x , e g the Radius of the Convexity e x z , or instead thereof , the Focal Length of the Plano-Convex Glass e x z f , for having one we may easily obtain the other .

We suppose that the Central Ray d b x q is Co-incident with the Axis of the Glasses .

First therefore in the Right Angled Triangle h b q ; we have the Angle h b q ( and consequently b h q = b e f ) and b q to find h q.

(2) Then b f + f p = b p. And b q : h q : : b p : p n : : b f : ef .

(4) 180 − b e f − f e g = y e b = g e h , Which is the Angle of the Inclination of the Ray b e on the Convex surface e x.

(5) 300 : 193 : : s. ∠ h e g : s. ∠ h e l , Wherefore the Ray by its first Refraction would proceed in e l.

(6) Draw m e Perpendicular to the Plane Surface e f , then e f = m p. And m e = p f. And n p − m p = n m ; And the Angle n e m is = to q b h , And h e l − n e m is = to m e l , Which is the Inclination of the Ray on the Plane Surface e f.

(7) Then 193 : 300 : : s. ∠ m e l : s. ∠ m e k.

(8) In the Right-angled Triangle m e k , m e and the Angles are known to find m k.

(9) Lastly n m + m k = n k , and p n − n k = p k = ½ k o ; Which was required to be found .

Corollary 2.

The foregoing Trigonometrical Calculation in the first Corollary I had from my Esteem'd Friend Mr. Iohn Flamsteed Astr. Reg. But Instead thereof , or as an Additament thereto , I shall substitute this Problem .

To Determine the Breadth of the Distinct Base Resulting from the Combinations of Glasses expressed in Prop. XVI , XVII , XVIII . There being given ( together with the Data in those Propositions ) the Breadth of the Object , or the Angle it subtends before the outermost Glass , And if it be a nigh Object , its Distance from the outermost Glass .

We here suppose our Glasses of the least Thickness Imaginable , or that all the Refractions are performed in the Right Line , that passes through the Glasses Breadth at Right Angles to the Glasses Axis , for avoiding Confusion in the Schemes .

Wherefore in Tab. 24. Fig. 1 , 2 , 3 , 4 , 5. T. 24. F. 1 , 2 , 3 , 4 , 5. b is the Glass next the Object , whether Convex ( as in Prop. 16 , 17. ) or Concave ( as in Prop. 18. ) We shall take the Sun for our Object , and suppose a b a Ray proceeding from its Eastern Limb , d b a Ray from its Centre , c b a Ray from its Western Limb. Let the single Glass b , in the first and second Figures , Represent the Image of the Sun in the Distinct Base h q i. The Breadth of the Base h q i is easily obtain'd from the Data . Let e f z be another Glass , so placed behind the Glass b , that both these Glasses together may Represent the Suns Image in the Distinct Base k p o , 'T is required to find the Breadth or Diameter k o of this Image from these Data ; b q the Focal Length of the Glass b ; The Breadth of the Image h i , or the Angle a b c = e b z ; The Focal Length of the Glass e z ; The Distance of the Glasses f b and p f the Distance of the Distinct Base from the Glass e z.

Through p at Right-angles to the Axis d s b f p of the Glasses draw k p o infinitely . First from these Data , let us obtain the Breadth of the Glass e z , where the Rays b e , b z , meet it , or its half breadth e f , which is easily had in the Right-angled Triangle e f b , the Angle e b f , and the Side f b being given .

Let us then consider b as a radiating Point , either farther from or nigher to the Glass e z than its Focus ; And by Prop. V. and VIII . for Convexes , and by Corol. XV. for Concaves , let us determine the Respective , Imaginary , or Virtual Focus s , whereby we obtain f s. From s draw s e , s z , directly ; Where these Lines s e , s z , meet the Distinct Base in k and o , there the Breadth of the Distinct Base is determin'd ; To obtain the Measure whereof , say as s f : f e : : s p : p k = p o = ½ k o.

Corollary 3.

If the Glass be a Compleat Sphere ; Then , as the Distance of the Object from the Centre of the Glass : To the Breadth of the Object : : So the Distance of the Image from the same Centre of the Sphere : To the Breadth of the Image .

This is Manifest from Tab. 23. Fig. 2. T. 23. F. 2. Whereby it appears , that a Glass Sphere s p c exposed to an Object a b ; From each point a , b , of the Object there proceeds one certain Ray a c n , b c m , which passes Unrefracted ; And these Rays Cross in the Centre c of the Sphere , by which means they are Perpendicular to both Sides of the Sphere , at their Ingress and Egress , and so pass Unrefracted .

Corollary 4. PROBL.

The Distance of an Object , and its Diameter being given , 't is required to Represent its Image in the Distinct Base under a given Measure ; The Thickness of the Glass being given also .

This is the 52 Problematical Proposition of Gregorii Opt. Promot . And is thus solved by our Doctrine .

Tab. 24. Fig. 6. T. 24. F. 6 : a v b is an Object , whose Diameter a b is given , and its Distance from the Glass v d is given also : 'T is required to Project this Object under a Given Measure m n ; The Thickness of the Glass d d being also given . Let it be made , As a b : v d : : m n : d i. Then strike the Arch x d x with such a Radius , that the Rays flowing from the Point v may thereby be transmitted Parallel within the Body of the Glass ( which shall be by the foregoing Doctrine , by making ½ v d the Radius ) Afterwards strike the Arch z d z with such a Radius , that it may Unite the Parallel Rays at i , which shall be by making ½ d i the Radius : I say the Glass z x shall project the Image of a b under the given Measure m n. This is so manifest from Prop. IX . together with the foregoing Doctrine , that it wants no farther Explication .

Note . I have here consider'd the whole Thickness d d of the Glass in Conformity to Gregory's Proposition . But what foregoes concerning the Consideration of the Glasses Thickness may be apply'd here .

PROP. XXVII .

The Object and its Image in the Distinct Base are Reciprocal . vid. Prop. VI.

Tab. 22. Fig. 1. T. 22. F. 1. a b c being an Object , and the Convex Glass k m Representing the Image thereof in the Distinct Base e f g. Let us now conceive e f g an Object , I say the same Glass k m the same way posited shall project the Image thereof in the Distinct Base at a b c.

This does necessarily follow from the precedent Proposition , and from Exp. 8. And therefore needs no farther Demonstration .

Corollary .

Hence it follows that the Image in the Distinct Base may be sometimes larger than the Object . On which depends the Doctrine of the double Microscope , as hereafter shall appear more fully .

Let us imagine the Image of the Sun projected in the Focus of a Convex-glass , And let us now conceive the Converse , viz. That this Image were now the Real Sun , the Distinct Base

of this would be as Large and as Remote as is now the Real Sun . So that every Convex-glass may be conceived to have two Foci , or Distinct Bases ; one at the Object , t'other at the Image .

PROP. XXVIII .

The manner of Plain Vision with the naked Eye is expounded .

Tab. 25. F. 1. T. 25. F. 1 ▪ a b c is an Object , i k l e m is the Globe of the Eye , furnish'd with all its Coats and Humors ; But in this Figure we have only expressed the Crystalline Humour g o h , as being Principally concern'd in Forming the Image on the Fund of the Eye .

(1) From each Point in the Object we may Conceive Rays flowing on the Pupil of the Eye i k ; as here from the middle Point b , there proceed the Rays b g , b o , b h ; These by means of the Coats and Humours of the Eye , and especially by the Chrystalline Humour g h , are refracted and brought together on the Ratina or Fund of the Eye in the Point e , and there the Point b is represented . For we may conceive the Crystalline Humour g h as it were a Convex-glass , in the Hole a Dark Chamber i l m k , and that d e f is the Distinct Base of this Glass . What is here said of the Point b , and its Representation at e , may be understood of all the other Points in the Object , as of a and c and their Representations at f and d.

(2) And as in a dark Chamber , that has a Hole furnish'd with a Convex-glass , if the Paper , that is to receive the Image in the Distinct Base , be either nigher to , or farther from the Glass , than its due distance , the Representation thereon is confused ; For then the Radious Pencils do not exactly determine with their Apices on the Paper ; But those from one Point are mixt and confused with those from the Adjacent Points : so in the Case of Plain Vision , 't is requisite that the Pencils should exactly determine their Apices at d , e , f , on the Retina , or else Vision is not Distinct.

'T is therefore contrived by the Most Wise and Omnipotent Framer of the Eye , That it should have a Power of adapting it self in some Measure to Nigh and Distant Objects . For they require different Conformations of the Eye ; Because the Rays proceeding from the Luminous Points of Nigh Objects do more Diverge , than those from more Remote Objects .

But whether this variety of Conformation consist in the Crystallines approaching nigher to , or removing farther from the Retina ; Or in the Crystallines assuming a different Convexity , sometimes greater , sometimes less , according as is requi●ite , I leave to the scrutiny of others , and particularly of the curious Anatomist . This only I can say , that either of these Methods will serve to explain the various Phaenomena of the Eye ; And I am apt to believe , that both these may attend each other , viz. a Less Convex Crystalline requires an Elongation of the Eye , and a more Convex Crystalline requires a shortning thereof ; As a more●Flat●Convex-Object-glass or of a Larger Sphere requires a Longer Tube , and one more Protuberant , bulging or of a smaller Sphere requires a shorter Tube .

(3) By the foremention'd Scheme we perceive , the Rays from each Point of the Object are all confused together on the Pupil in g h , so that the Eye is placed in the Point of the Greatest Confusion : But by means of the Humors and Coats thereof each Cone of Rays is separated , and brought by it self to determine in its proper Point on the Retina , there Painting distinctly the Vivid Representation of the Object ; Which Representation is there perceived by the sensitive Soul ( whatever it be ) the manner of whose Actions and Passions , He only knows who Created and Preserves it , Whose Ways are Past finding out , and by us unsearchable . But of this Moral truth we may be assured , That He that made the Eye shall see .

(4) We are likewise to observe , that the Representation of the Object a b c on the Fund of the Eye f e d is Inverted . For so likewise it is on the Paper in a dark Room ; there being no other way for the Radious Cones to enter the Eye or the dark Chamber , but by their Axes a o , b o , c o , crossing in the Pole o of the Crystalline or Glass . And here it may be enquired ; How then comes it to pass that the Eye sees the Object Erect ? But this Quaery seems to encroach too nigh the enquiry into the manner of the Visive Faculties Perception ; For 't is not properly the Eye that sees , it is only the Organ or Instrument , 't is the Soul that sees by means of the Eye . To enquire then , how it comes to pass , that the Soul perceives the Object Erect by means of an Inverted Image , is to enquire into the Souls Faculties ; which is not the proper subject of this Discourse . But yet that in this Matter we may offer at somthing , I say , Erect and Inverted are only Terms of Relation to Up and Down , or Farther from and Nigher to the Centre of the Earth , in parts of the same thing : And that that is an Erect Object , makes an Inverted Image in the Eye , and an Inverted Object makes an Erect Image ; That is , that part of the Object which is farthest from the Centre of the Earth is Painted on a Part of the Eye Nigher the Centre of the Earth , than the other parts of the Image . But the Eye or Visive Faculty takes no Notice of the Internal Posture of its own Parts , but uses them as an Instrument only , contrived by Nature for the Exercise of such a Faculty .

But to come yet a little nigher this difficulty ; This enquiry results briefly to no more than this , How comes it to pass , that the Eye receiving the Representation of a Part of an Object on that part of its Fund which is Lowermost or nighest the Centre of the Earth , perceives that part of the Object as Uppermost or farthest from the Centre of the Earth ? And in answer to this , let us imagine , that the Eye in the Point f receives an Impulse or Stroke by the Protrusion forwards of the Luminous Axis a o f , from the Point of the Object a ; Must not the Visive Faculty be necessarily directed hereby to consider this stroke , as coming from the Top a , rather than from the bottom c , and consequently should be directed to conclude f the Representation of the Top ?

Hereof we may be satisfy'd by supposing a Man standing on his Head : For here , tho the Upper Parts of Objects are painted on the Upper Parts of the Eye , yet the Objects are judged to be Erect . And from this Posture of a Man , the Reason appears , why we have used the Words Farthest from , and Nighest to the Centre of the Earth , rather than Upper and Lower . For in this Posture , because the Upper Parts of the Object are painted on that part of the Eye nighest the Earth , ( though really the upper Part of the Eye ) they are judged to be farthest removed from the Earth .

What is said of Erect and Reverse may be understood of Sinister and Dexter : But of these Physical Conjectures enough .

(5) The Image of an Erect Object being Represented on the Fund of the Eye Inverted , and yet the sensitive Faculty judging the Object Erect ; it follows that when the Image of an Erect Object is Painted on the Fund of the Eye Erect , the sense Judges that Object to be Inverted .

This is a necessary Conclusion , and is of consequence for explaining some Particulars that follow .

(6) The Magnitude of an Object is Estimated by the Angle the Object subtends before the Eye : Thus in the same fore-mention●d Tab. 25. Fig. 1. T. 25. F. 1 the Length of the Object a c is estimated by the Angle a o c = f o d , this we call T●e Optic Angle .

From hence , & from Prop. XXVI , XXVII . it follows , that if the Eye were placed instead of the Glass at d ( T. 22. F. 1. ) T. 22. F. 1 and a b c or e f g were Objects , the Eye would perceive them of Equal Bigness .

I know very well the Point o , which is the Vertex of the Optick Angle , is variously assigned by various Authors ; some placing it in the Centre of the Eye ; Others in the Vertex of the Crystalline ; Others in the Vertex of the outward Coat or Cornea of the Eye : But 't is a Matter of no great consequence , where-ever we place it ; for according to the Bigness of this Angle a o c , the Image on the Fund of the Eye is Bigger or Less . Vid. Tacquet Optica . Lib. 1. Def. 4. and Prop. 3.

I know likewise , that by a curious Experiment in Opticks discover'd by an Ingenious French-Man Monsieur Mariotte , 't is controverted , whether the Retina or Choroide be the Seat of Vision , or the Place on which the Pictures of outward Objects are expressed ( vid. Philosoph . Transact . Num. 35. and 59. ) But to our business it matters not which of them we pitch on ; and therefore I chuse to speak as commonly 't is presumed ; and mention the Retina , or rather the Fund of the Eye , as the Place that receives this Picture .

(7) In the same ( Tab. 25. Fig. 1. ) T. 25. F. 1. We perceive the Rays that flow from the Point b do proceed to the Eye Diverging , as b g , b o , b h ; And if the Object a c were infinitely diitant from the Eye , or so distant from the Eye , that the Breadth of the Pupil i k were insensible in Comparison to this Distance , then the Rays b g , b o , b h , would proceed as it were Parallel , and so fall on the Eye : In both which Cases , by means of the Refractions in the Eye , they are brought together , and paint the Image of the Point b on the Fund of the Eye at e. Vid. Gregorii Opt. Prom. Pr. 30.

But in Tab. 25. Fig. 2. T. 25. F. ● . If the Diverging Rays b v , b x , that flow from the Point b , meet the Convex Glass v x , and are thereby made to converge as v i , x k , and so fall on the Eye , and there passing through the Crystalline g h , are made to Converge yet more as i e , k e ; Here they cross in the Point e , before they reach the Retina r t , and consequently do paint thereon the Image of the Point b confusedly , for 't is Painted on the space r t ; whereas to cause distinct Vision , it should only be painted on a correspondent Point on the Retina .

And this is the Fault of their Eyes , who are called Myopes , Purblind , or Short-sighted . For in them the Crystalline is too Convex ( as in this Tab. 25. Fig. 2. both the Convex Glass and Crystalline joyn'd together make too great a Convexity ) uniting the Rays before they arrive at the Retina . And therefore they are helped by Concave-glasses , which take off from the too great Convexity of their Crystalline some part of its Refractive Power : Or rather these Concaves make the Rays Diverge so , that their Crystalline shall be sufficient only to bring them again together , so that they be not united , till they arrive at the Fund of the Eye .

Myopes are also helped by holding the Object very near ; for then the Rays that fall on their Eye from any single Point do more Diverge , than when the Eye is farther from the Point , and consequently their too Convex Crystalline does but suffice to bring them together on the Retina .

(8) On the contrary , the Eyes of Old Men have their Crystalline too Flat ( as Tab. 25. Fig. 3. ) T. 25. F. 3. and cannot correct the Divergence of the Rays b i , b k , to make them meet on the Retina rt , but beyond the Eye at e. Wherefore for their Help 't is requisite they add the Adventitious Convexity of a Glass ; that both it and the Crystalline together , may be sufficient to unite the Rays just at the Retina : And from hence it appears , that Spectacles help Old Men , not by magnifying an Object , but by making its Appearance Distinct ; for Old Men cannot read the largest Print without Spectacles , and yet with Spectacles , they read the smallest , though these with Spectacles do not appear so large , as those without Spectacles .

(9) What is said of the Confused or Distinct Representation of a Point in the Object , may be understood of the Confused or Distinct Representation of the w●ole Object ; at least for those Parts that lye pretty nigh adjacent to that Point that is looked at . For here we do not take a Point in the strict sense of the Mathematicians , but in a Physical Sense , for the smallest Part imaginable ; or as we have assumed it in the first supposition . And the whole Object consisting of such Points , what is shewn of one Point may be understood of every Point in the Object , that is , of the whole Object .

( 10 ) 'T is Requisite also ( before I proceed farther ) to explain , what I mean by Clear Vision , and Faint Vision ; Distinct Vision , and Confused Vision .

By what foregoes , I suppose these two latter Terms are pretty well understood , viz. Distinct Vision is then caused , when the Pencils of Rays from each Point of an Object do accurately determine in Correspondent Points of the Image on the Retina : Confused Vision on the contrary , when these Pencils do intermix one with another .

But Clear Vision is only caused by a Great Quantity of Rays in the same Pencil , illuminating the Correspondent Points of the Image strongly and vigorously .

Faint Vision is then when a Few Rays make up one Pencil ; And tho this may be Distinct , yet 't is Dark and Obscure , at least not so Bright and Strong , as if more Rays concurr'd .

Of Single Glasses apply'd to the Eye .

Hitherto I have spoken of Glasses by themselves ; And of the Eye by it self : I come now to consider them both together .

But first 't is to be Noted , that when we speak of the Distinct or Confused Appearance of an Object , 't is needful only to explain my self concerning some one single Point in the Object ; and for this we chuse the middle Point ; for if we shew that single Point in the Object to be Distinctly or Confusedly Represented on the Retina ( according to the XXVIII . Prop. ) the same may be understood of the Adjacent Points in the Object .

But when we discourse of the Erect or Inverted Appearance of an Object : Or of the Magnify'd or Diminish'd Appearance of an Object ; 't is requisite we consider the whole Object . For a single Point , though Physical , cannot properly be consider●d as Erect or Inverted , or Magnify'd or Diminishd .

So that we perceive Distinct or Confused Vision to depend on the Formation of Rays proceeding from each single Point . But Erect and Inverted , or Magnify'd and Diminish'd Appearances depend on the Consideration of Rays proceeding from different Points of the Object . I shall always consider those , that proceed from the extremities of the Object .

PROP. XXIX .

An Object seen through a Plain Glass whose Surfaces are Parallel is Magnify'd thereby .

But that which deceived FABER is , that because the Angle a g b is equal to the Angle k h b , therefore ( says he ) the Optick Angle with and without the Glass are the same ; or ( as he has it ) the Eye at g without the Glass would see the Object a b under the Angle a g b , and through the Glass the Object is seen under the Angle k h b equal to a g b : Which is granted him . But this does only prove , that the naked Eye at g , and the Eye through the Glass at h , sees the Object under the same Angle . Whereas he should have proved ( if it were possible ) that the naked Eye at h , and the Eye through the Glass at h , sees the Objects under the same Angle ; And then indeed he had rightly proved what he proposed , viz. that the Optick Angle is not magnify'd by the Interposition of the Glass : For 't is not Mathematical , first to place the Eye at g without the Glass , and then at h with the Glass , and proving the Optick Angles the same , to conclude that therefore the Plain Glass does not magnifie . For at that rate one may shew that even a Convex Glass does not magnifie ; For at one Station an Object shall appear under as great an Angle without it , as at another Station through the Glass .

The Reason , why the Common Window Glass , &c. through which we look , causes no sensible Alteration of O●jects , is because 't is too Thin . Vid. Barrow Lect. Opt. 15.

Concerning the Apparent Place of an Object through a Plain Glass , more hereafter .

PROP. XXX .

All Objects seen Erect through Convex Glasses are Magnify'd thereby .

Tab. 26. Fig. 2. T. 26. F. 2. Let a x b be an Object , o the Eye , draw a e o , b d o , directly strait from the extremities of the Object to the Eye . The Angle comprised by the Direct Rays aeo , bdo , that is the Angle a o b , is the Natural Optick Angle . Let now the Glass c f be interposed ; here because the Rays a e , b d , would naturally and by their Direct course concur at o , now the Glass is interposed , their Concourse shall be accelerated before they arrive at o. Wherefore the Eye at o shall not perceive the extremities of the Object through the Glass by the Rays a e , b d , but by some other Rays . And these other Rays must fall either without ( that is , farther from the Axis o x , than ) a e , b d , or they must fall within a e , b d : But they cannot fall within a e , b d ; for if a e , b d themselves be made by the Glass to concur before they arrive at o , much more shall any other Rays that fall within a e , b d , be made to concur before they arrive there : And consequently they cannot convey the Appearance of the Extreme Points a , b , to the Eye at o. Wherefore it remains , that the Rays that do this must fall without a e , b d : Let these Rays be a c , b f , which by the Refractive Power of the Glass are bent from their Direct Course and are made to proceed in c o , f o , crossing at the Eye in o ; Here the Optick Angle through the Glass is c o f , which is greater than the Natural Optick Angle a o b , and consequently the Object is Magnifyd . Which was to be Demonstrated .

PROP. XXXI .

Concerning the Apparent Place of Objects seen through Convex-glasses .

(1) In Plain Vision the Estimate we make of the Distance . of Objects ( especially when so far removed , that the Interval between our two Eyes , bears no sensible Proportion thereto ; or when look'd upon with one Eye only ) is rather the Act of our Iudgment , than of Sense ; and acquired by Exercise and a Faculty of comparing , rather than Natural . For Distance of it self , is not to be perceived ; for 't is a Line ( or a Length ) presented to our Eye with its End towards us , which must therefore be only a Point , and that is Invisible . Wherefore Distance is chiefly perceived by means of Interjacent Bodies , as by the Earth , Mountains , Hills , Fields , Trees , Houses , &c. Or by the Estimate we make of the Comparative Magnitude of Bodies , or of their Faint Colours , &c. These I say are the Chief Means of apprehending the Distance of Objects , that are considerably Remote . But as to nigh Objects , to whose Distance the Interval of the Eyes bears a sensible Proportion , their Distance is perceived by the turn of the Eyes , or by the Angle of the Optick Axes . ( Gregorii Opt. Promot . Prop. XXVIII . ) This was the Opinion of the Antients , Alhazen , Vitellio , &c. And tho the Ingenious Jesuit Tacquet ( Opt. Lib. I. Prop. II. ) disapprove thereof , and Objects against it a New Notion of Gassendus ( of a Man's seeing only with one Eye at a Time one and the same Object ) yet this Notion of Gassendus being absolutely False ( as I could Demonstrate , were it not beside my Present Purpose , but I refer to the 7th Chap. of the 2d Part. ) it makes nothing against this Opinion .

(2) Wherefore Distance being only a Line , and not of it self perceivable ; if an Object were convey'd to the Eye by one single Ray only , there were no other means of judging of its Distance , but by some of those hinted before . Therefore when we estimate the Distance of nigh Objects , either we take the help of both Eyes , or else we consider the Pupil of one Eye as having Breadth , and receiving a Parcel of Rays from each Radiating Point . And according to the various Inclination of the Rays from one Point , on the various Parts of the Pupil , we make our Estimate of the Distance of the Object : And therefore ( as is said before ) by one single Eye we can only Judge of the Distance of such Objects , to whose Distance the Breadth of the Pupil has a sensible Proportion . To illustrate all this by Tab. 26. Fig. 3. T. 26. F. 3. Let a be a Radiating Point , sending forth the Rays a d , a e , a f , a g , a h , with all the intermediate Rays . Let p u be the Breadth of the Pupil , and first placed at c , there receiving only a e , a f , a g : Let p u be translated to b , where it receives all the Rays ; and 't is manifest that the Rays from a are differently inclined on the Pupil in one and t'other Posture , for the Rays , which fall on the Pupil when placed at b , diverge very much more than those that fall upon it , when placed at c : And therefore the Eye , or Visual Faculty will apprehend the Distance of a from b and c to be Different . For it is observed before ( Prop. 29. Sect. 2. see also , Gregorii Opt. Promot . Prop. XXIX . ) that for viewing Objects Remote and Nigh , there are Requisite Various Conformations of the Eye : The Rays from Nigh Objects , that fall on the Eye , Diverging more than those from more Remote Objects .

(4) If therefore by Refraction through Glasses , that parcel of Rays which falls on the Pupil from each Point in Nigh Objects be made to flow as close together as those from Distant Objects ; or the Rays from Distant Objects be made to Diverge , as much as if they flow'd from Nigh Objects , the Eye through such Glasses shall perceive the Place of the Object changed .

(5) But first for a sensible and common Experiment , to shew the Change of an Objects Place by Refraction . Tab. 26. F. 4. T. 26. F. 4. represents a Vessel , on whose Bottom at a there is laid a piece of Mony , or any other remarkable Object , so that the Eye at o may just perceive the Mony over the Edge c of the Vessel . The Mony now appears to the Eye o by the direct Line a c o. Let now the Vessel be fill●d with Water up to g f h ; let the Ray a f proceed from the Mony , and draw p f perpendicular to g h ; the Ray a f , instead of going onwards directly to d , emerging from Water , a dense Medium to Air , deflects from the perpendicular p f ; and becomes ( suppose ) f o. Wherefore the Eye o , now the Vessel has Water in it , sees the Silver , not by the direct Ray a c o ( for that is bent from it , and escapes it ) but by the refracted Ray a f o. Produce o f directly to b , the Mony shall appear as if it were at b. For the Eye is not sensible of the bending of the Ray , but is affected by it , as if it were directly strait .

(6) In like manner Tab. 26. F. 5. T. 26. F. 5. if the Point c send its Ray c e obliquely on the plain Glass a b ; and after a double Refraction it arrive at the Eye o ; This Point c is not now seen in its own proper Place , but somewhere in the Ray o g produced , as at f. For the Eye is not sensible of the outward accidental Refraction , that attends the Ray at its passage through the Glass ; but is directed by the next immediate Ray o g that falls upon it , and considers it as strait , and coming directly from the Point f.

I say moreover , that by a plain Glass , the place of an Object is changed , and brought nigher the Eye . Tab. 26. F. 6. T. 26. F. 6. c is an Object sending its Rays c d , c e , upon the plain Glass a b ; these after a double Refraction proceed ( by supposition ) in g i , h k. Produce these directly towards f ; and suppose the Pupil of the Eye large enough to receive the Rays g i , h k ; the Point c shall appear to the Eye as at f.

(7) To determine the Locus Apparens of an Object placed nigher a Convex-glass than its Focus .

Hence it appears , that a Convex-Glass Represents Objects as farther off than really they are : And this is the Reason , why Pieces of Perspective ( as of Churches and Long Porticoes ) appear very Natural and strong through Convex-Glasses duly apply'd . For these Glasses making Objects appear further off than really they are , must consequently make the Parts of the Perspective seem really Hollow'd or sunk in , the French term it Renfonce .

Hence also 't is Manifest , why Convex-Glasses help the Eyes of those , that see only Distant Objects , as Old Men , for these make Nigh Objects appear as Distant . Vid. Prop. XXVIII . Sec. 8.

We may perceive also that the Distance between the Object and Glass continuing the same , the Locus Apparens is never alter'd , though the Eye be removed to and from the Glass . Gregorii Opt. Promot . Corol. Prop. XLVII . For the Distance between the Object and Glass continuing the same , the Imaginary Focus e shall always be the same .

(8) The Locus of an Object expos'd to a Convex-Glass in its Focus is not to be determin'd .

When the Radiating Point a. Tab. 27. Fig. 3. T. 27. F. 3. is placed in the Focus of the Convex-Glass c d , the Rays c e , d g , after passing the Glass , run Parallel , and being produced to c x , d z , they never Intersect. Wherefore in this Case there is no Rule whereby to determine the Locus of the Object . And Barrow tells us only , Quod Remotissime Positum Aestimatur . Lect. 18. ad Finem .

(9) The Locus of an Object , beyond the Focus of a Convex-Glass , to the Eye between the Glass and Distinct Base , cannot be determined .

Tab. 27. Fig. 4. T. 27. F. 4. Let a be a Radiating Point placed more distant from the Glass c d than its Focus ; the Rays c e , d g , after passing the Glass , do Converge towards the Distinct Base ; let the Eye e f g be placed between the Glass and Distinct Base , it shall then receive the Rays c e , d g , Converging ; and they being produced towards x and z separate the further .

In this and the last Section lies the great Difficulty , which the Incomparable and most profoundly Learned BARROW ( Lect. Opt. 18. Sect. 13. ) confessedly passes over as insuperable , and not to be explained by whatever Theories we have yet of Vision . For seeing that the Object which applies to the Eye by Less-diverging Rays , is judged the more remote ; And that which applies to the Eye by Parallel Rays , is reputed most remote ; it should seem reasonably to follow , that what is seen by Converging Rays , should appear yet most remote of all : And yet Experience contradicts this , and testifies , that the Point a , Tab , 27. Fig. 4. appears variously distant , according to the various Situations of the Eye between the Glass and Distinct Base ; and that it does almost never ( if ever ) appear more distant than the Point a it self to the naked Sight , and sometimes it appears much nigher : Or rather , by how much the Rays , which fall through the Glass on the Eye , do more Converge , by so much the nigher does the Object appear to approach , insomuch , that if the Eye approach the Glass very nigh , the Object a appears in its natural Place : The Eye being a little farther removed from the Glass towards the Distinct Base , the Point a seems yet to approach . The Eye being yet farther , the Point seems yet nigher ; and so by degrees , till at last the Eye being placed at a certain station , as at the Distinct Base , the Point a appears very nigh , so that it begins to vanish away in mere Confusion . All which ( continues the candid BARROW ) seems repugnant , or at least not so well to agree to what we have laid down . And so he leaves this Difficulty to the solution of others , which I ( after so great an Example ) shall do likewise ; but with the resolution of the same admirable Author , of not quitting the evident Doctrine , which we have before laid down , for determining the Locus Objecti , on the account of being pressed by one Difficulty , which seems inexplicable , till a more intimate Knowledg of the Visive Faculty be obtained by Mortals . In the mean time , I propose it to the consideration of the ingenious , whether the Locus Apparens of an Object placed as in this oth . Section , be not as much before the Eye , as the Distinct Base is behind the Eye . Vid. Corol. 1. Prop. LVII .

( 10 ) If an Object be more distant from a Convex-Glass than its Focus , and the Eye beyond the Distinct Base , the Locus Apparens of the Object is in the Distinct Base . Vid. Prop. XXXIX . Sect. 5. item Schol. Prop. L.

Tab. 27. Fig. 5. T. 27. F. 5. The Object a b c is projected by the Glass g z l in the Distinct Base d e f. The Locus of each Point in the Object is in the correspondent Point of the Image in the Distinct Base : Thus a appears at d , b at e , c at f. Gregorii Opt. Prom. Prop. XLVI .

Dechales ( Dioptr. Lib. II. Prop. XI . ) remarks a Matter of some moment in this Business of the Locus Objecti . The reason ( says he ) that the Appearances through Glasses of the Change of the Objects Place , do not so strongly strike the Sense , as the Doctrine here laid down seems to intimate , proceeds from hence ; that Optick-Glasses are seldom or never made so large , as to be look'd through by both Eyes at once ; for if they were , he asserts , That the Locus apparens Objecti would be much more plainly and sensibly determin'd to the sight : In this particular certainly he is much in the right ; for we see at all times , that two Eyes make a more exact estimate of the Position of an Object , than one single Eye . And we have a sensible Experiment hereof in Catoptricks , by the large concave Miroirs , where an Hand and Dagger presented beyond the Focus , seem to strike far without the Speculum , at him that presents it : But not so strongly if the Speculum be but small , so that the Image can be seen but by one Eye at once .

Scholium .

To this Property of the Change of the Apparent Place of an Object , may we attribute that common Effect of Objects seeming to Dance and Move , being seen through Spherick-Glasses , whether Convex or Concave , nimbly shaken between the Eye and the Object . 'T is a noted Experiment , that to know , whether a Glass be Plain or Spherical ( which is not to be found by Inspection of the Glass it self , or by Touch , if the Glasses he formed on large Spheres , and be but small portions thereof ) , the common Tryal is , to shake them something nimbly between the Eye and an Object ; and if the Object seem to move by the motion of the Glass , the Glass is not Plain : The reason hereof is this ; That toward the Extremities of a Glass , the Glass refracts more than towards the middle ( for the very middle Ray , that is perpendicular , is not refracted at all ) and consequently the Apparent Place of an Object is more changed by the Refraction in the Extreme parts of the Glass , than in the middle of the Glass : So that the Object , by the Motion of the Glass , appearing sometimes through the middle of the Glass , sometimes through the extremities of the Glass ; the Apparent Place thereof is varied likewise , and the Object seems therefore to change its Place , or to move . But in a plain Glass the Case is otherwise , for the Refraction thereof is equally prevalent throughout the whole Glass , and neither stronger nor weaker in the middle , than in the extremities ; so that the shaking of it between the Eye

and Object , makes no other difference in the Apparent Place , than if the Glass were look'd through fixt and immoveable ; and therefore the Object seems not through it to shake and move . And tho the Locus be changed by a Spherick Glas's being removed to and from the Eye , yet in Glasses of large Spheres , the Locus is not so sensibly changed , as by being shaken before the Eye . The same Reason holds for the apparent Dancing of Objects seen through rising Smoaks or Vapors .

PROP. XXXII .

An Object being placed in the Focus of a Convex-Glass , and the Eye on t'other side the Glass , sees this Object distinctly and erect .

That an Object so posited , is seen distinctly , is evident , because the Rays from each particular Point , after passing the Glass , become parallel ( by Prop. VI. ) and so fall on the Eye . And therefore ( by Prop. XXVIII . Sec. 7. ) they are fit to cause Distinct Vision . Tab. 27. Fig. 3. T. 27. F. 3. The Point a sendeth forth its Diverging Rays a c , a d , on the Convex-Glass c d ; these are transmitted by the Glass parallel in c e , d g , and so fall on the Eye ; by whose Coars and Humors , especially by the Crystalline h i , they are refracted and brought together in the Point k on the Retina , there representing distinctly the Point a of the Object .

Or thus , Tab. 28. Fig. 1. T. 28. F. 1. The Eye o p , being in the place where some of the Rays from every Point in the Object are mixt together , is in the place of the greatest Confusion ; and therefore by Prop. XXVIII . Sec. 3. the Vision is distinct .

I say also the Object is seen erect . In the same Figure g k is a Convex-Glass , a b c an Object ; we may imagin that each Point of this Object sends from it a Cone of Rays , falling on the whole Surface of the Glass ; but for avoiding Confusion in the Scheme , I only express and consider the Rays c g , c h , from the Point c ; and a k , a i from the Point a● o p is the Crystalline of the Eye . The Rays c g , c h , after passing the Glass become parallel as g o , h p , and fall so on the Crystalline , by whose Refractions they are again brought together in the Point d on the Retina , there painting the lively Representation of the Point c ; and the same may be shewn of the Representation of the Point a at f on the Retina . Wherefore the smister point c is represented on the dexter part of the Fund of the Eye d ; and the dexter part of the Object a is painted on the smister part of the Eye f. And consequently the Image on the Retina being inverted , the Object is seen erect ( by Prop. XXVIII . Sec. 4 , 5. ) . Which was to be Demonstrated .

PROP. XXXIII .

An Object being placed in the Focus of a Convex Glass , and the Eye being placed in the Focus , on t'other side the Glass , sees this Object under the same Angle , as were the naked Eye placed at the station of the Glass .

Tab. 28. Fig. 2. T. 28. F. 2. a x b is an Object placed in the Focus of the Glass e f ( which we suppose of the least thickness imaginable ) : Let the Rays a e , b f , run parallel to the Axis x c o , these Rays are united in the Focus at o , at which Point we suppose the Eye . Produce o e and o f directly to g and k , and draw e c f ( which by supposition is parallel to a x b , and then draw a c , b c. The Optick-Angle through the Glass is e o f , which we are to prove equal to a c b. Thus , a x and e c being parallel , and a e , x c , being so likewise ; a x is equal to e c , and a e to x c , being the opposite Sides of a Parallelogram . But x c is equal to c o ( the Focal Length on one side and t'other ) . Wherefore the Right-angled Triangle e c o is equal and similar to the Right-angled Triangle a x c. Wherefore the Angle e o c is equal to the Angle a c x , or e o f is equal to a c b. And consequently the Eye at o sees the Object through the Glass under the same Angle , as the naked Eye being place at c , would see it . Which was to be proved . Vid. Gregorii Opt. Prom. Prop. XLIV .

Scholium .

This is the Posture of both Eye and Object for causing the most perfect Vision possible through a single Convex Glass ; unless perhaps we say , That seeing all Objects , which we perceive most distinctly are pretty nigh our Eyes ; therefore we may conceive the Rays flowing from each Point of them , as falling on the Pupil Diverging . And consequently , that to see an Object most perfectly through a Convex Glass , 't is best that the Object be placed a very little nigher the Glass than its Focus : For then the Rays , after passing the Glass , do something Diverge , and fall so on the Pupil ; and this being the most natural and usual occurrence of Objects , it suits best , and is best adapted and most agreeable to the Eye ; which by its refractive Coats and Humors easily collects each Cone of these Diverging Rays , and brings them together in a Point on the Fund of the Eye .

Corollary 1.

The Eye and Object being so placed as above ; the Eye sees this Object magnify'd under an Angle almost double to that under which the Object would appear to the Eye , were the Glass removed ; that is , the Angle e o c or a c x is almost double the Angle a o c ( a o and b o being drawn directly ) for the Angle a c x is equal to a o c + c a o ( 32. 1. ) but c a o is almost equal to a o c. Therefore the Angle a c x is almost double a o c. Which was to be Demonstrated . That c a o is almost equal to a o c , is manifest ; for the Triangle o c a is almost Isosceles , o c ( = c x ) being almost equal to c a.

If now we suppose the Eye to continue in the Focus at o , and the Object a x b to be brought nigher the Glass e f ; still the Optick Angle through the Glass shall be e o f. By which ( tho it continue the same , yet ) the Object would not be magnifi'd by the Glass in this second Posture , as much as in the former . For the Angle e o f in this latter Posture would not so much exceed the natural Optick Angle a o b. For at last a x b being brought so near e c f , as to be coincident therewith , the Angles e o f and a o b would be coincident also .

The same may be shewn , if we suppose the Object to continue in the Focus , and the Eye o to approach the Point c. For at last the Eye arriving at c , perceives the Object through the Glass under its own natural Angle a c b.

Corollary 2.

Hence it appears , that the Eye being in the Focus of a Convex Glass , and the Object in the Focus also , the Eye can perceive no greater an Area or Space of the Object , than the Breadth of the Glass , or the Breadth of that Portion thereof , which the Eye makes use of ; for a b is equal to e f. And the reason is , because those Rays a e , b f , that come from the Extremities of the Object a and b , and concurr at the Eye in the Focus o , must necessarily fall on the Glass parallel to the Axis x c.

PROP. XXXIV . PROBL.

To determine the Optick Angle , or apparent Magnitude of an Object in the Focus of a Convex-Glass , to the Eye at any other station ; from these Data , the Glasses Focal Length , or the Distance of the Object from the Glass x c , Tab. 29. F. 1. T. 29. F. 1. The Distance of the Eye from the Glass c d , and the Breadth of the Object a b.

The Thickness of the Glass I take no notice of , because I would not perplex the Scheme . And therefore the Glass is supposed of the least Thickness imaginable ; or all the Refractions are supposed performed at the Line in the middle of the Glass g e c f g.

Wherefore let a x b be an Object , and let the Rays a e , b f , fall parallel to the Axis x c o ; these are united in the other Focus at o , where if the Eye be placed , it sees the Object under the Angle e o f = a c b , by the preceding Prop. Wherefore having b x the half Object , and x c ; in the Right-angled Triangle b x c , we may find the Semi-optick Angle b c x. Draw the prickt Line b o directly ; the Angle b o x is the natural Optick Angle of the Object b x , which is easily . obtained , in the Right-angled Triangle b o x , having b x and x o.

Let now the Eye be out of the Focus at d ; the Rays a g , after passing the Glass , become parallel to e o ( Prop. VI. ) And therefore the Angle g d x is equal to e o x or a c x , which we have found before . Draw the prickt Line b d directly ; the Angle b d x is the natural Optick Angle of the Object b x , were the Glass removed ; and is easily had in the Right-angled Triangle b x d , having b x and x d ( = x c + c d ) . So the Problem is satisfied .

PROP. XXXV . PROBL.

To determine the Visible Area of an Object in the Focus of a Convex Glass ; from these Data , the distance of the Object from the Glass or the Glasses Focal Length , the distance of the Eye from the Glass , and the Breadth of the Glass .

It is shewn before in the 2d . Corollary to Prop. XXXIII . That the Visible Area of an Object in the Focus of a Convex Glass , to the Eye placed in t'other Focus , is equal to the Breadth of the Glass . Wherefore I shall only here consider the two other Cases .

And first , Let the Eye at o , Tab. 29. Fig. 2. T. 29. F. 2. be placed further from the Glass g l than its Focus , the Object a x b is in the Focus , g l the Glasses Breadth , x c the Glasses Focus or distance of the Object , and c o the distance of the Eye from the Glass are given . Draw g o , l o , and produce the Axis o c f infinitely . Let us now imagin the Point o a nigh Radiating Point or Object , sending its Rays o g , o c , o l , on the Glass . By Prop. V. Let us determin the Distinct Base or Respective Focus of this Point projected by this Glass , which by the foregoing Data is easily performed . Suppose this respective Focus to be c f. Draw g f , l f ; where these Lines intersect the Object in e and d , the Visible Area of the Object is determined by e d.

Demonstration . For by Exper. 8. the Progress of a Ray through different Mediums is Reciprocal . Wherefore if the Rays o g , o l , be refracted into g e , l d ; it will necessarily follow , that e g , d l , being consider'd as two Rays flowing from the Points e and d , they shall be refracted into g o , l o ; wherefore this Analogy will hold , f c : c l : : fx ( = f c − xc ) : x d. Which x d is half the Visible Area to the Eye at o.

Secondly , Tab. 29. F. 3. T. 29. F. 3. Let the Eye at o be placed nigher the Glass than its Focus . Draw g o , l o. And produce the Axis o c infinitely backwards towards f. Then ( as before ) supposing the Point o a Radiating Point or Object ; by the Data , and by Prop. VIII . we may easily determin the Imaginary Focus thereof , which let be c f. From f draw f g directly to e , and f l to d. e d , by the foregoing Demonstration , is the Visible Area of the Object a b. And c f : c l : : f x ( = f c + c x ) : x d. Which is half the Visible Area to the Eye at o.

Scholium .

The same Rules may be used , when the Object is nigher to or further from the Glass than its Focus . So that this Proposition is universal to all Cases in Erect Vision through Convex Glasses . But whether this Area be distinctly visible or not , depends on other Considerations , and will be obvious enough to those that consider what has been before , and what shall be hereafter laid down concerning the distinct and confused appearance of Objects .

PROP. XXXVI .

An Object being placed more distant from a Convex Glass than its Focus , and the Eye placed on t'other side this Glass nigher to the Glass than the Distinct Base to the Glass , sees this Object erect and confused

I have shewn before ( Prop. V. XXVI , XXVII . ) that if an Object be placed more distant from a Glass than its Focus , this Object is projected in a distinct Base somewhere on t'other side the Glass . And that this Distinct Base , may be sometimes Less , sometimes equal to , and sometimes Greater than the Object it self .

Tab. 30. Fig. 1. T. 30. F. 1. a b c is an Object exposed to the Glass g l , and projected in the Distinct Base f e d. Each Cone of Rays from the Object is made to converge , as b l g is formed into g e l. Let the Eye be placed at k. I say , first the Object appears erect . For the Rays from a the upper part of the Object tend to , and determin in the lower part of the Fund of the Eye . And the Rays from c the lower part of the Object tend towards the upper part of the Retina ; and therefore the Appearance is erect , ( by Prop. XXVIII . Sec. 4 , 5. )

Moreover , the Eye being placed any where between the Glass g l , and the Distinct Base f e d , does not receive the Species of the Object inverted ; for that only happens just in the Distinct Base it self . And on this account , 't is manifest , that the Appearance to the Eye in this posture shall be Erect .

I say likewise , that the Apearance of the Object is confused . Let us conceive the Pupil of the Eye at m n ; here it receives the Rays from the Point b converging ; and therefore by Prop. XXVIII . the Representation of the Point b on the Fund of the Eye shall be confused . And so of the other Points in the Object , that is , of the whole Object . And if the Eye recede from the Glass , as to h i , the Vision is more confused , because the Rays are nigher converged .

PROP. XXXVII . PROBL.

( 1. ) From these Data by the foregoing Doctrine of Convex Glasses , 't is easie to determine the Breadth of the Distinct Base . For by Prop. XXVI , XXVII . As the Distance of the Object from a Convex Glass : To the Breadth of the Object : : So the Distance of the Image in the Distinct Base : ( which is easily obtained from the foregoing Data ) To the Breadth of the said Image . That is ( in the foresaid Figure ) b z : a c : : e z : d f. And As a b : b z : : d e : e z. And consequently the Angle e z d is equal to the Angle a z b ; the Triangles e z d and a z b being similar . And in the Right-angled Triangle a b z , we have a b and b z , to find the Angle a z b = e z d ; which is the Angle , under which the Object would appear to the Eye placed just touching the Glass at z ; supposing the Glass to be there of the least Thickness imaginable .

( 2. ) Let us now suppose the Eye at k. I say if the Rays from the single Points a , c , in an Object be converged by the Convex Glass g l to any other Points d , f ; the Object shall appear under the Optick Angle x k m , as do the Apices of the Pencils from the Extreme Points of the Object , which is d k f = x k m. Vid. Gregorii Opt. Promot . Prop. X+LV .

( 3. ) Wherefore in the Right-angled Triangle e k d , we have e k and e d , To find the Angle e k d = z k x , which is the Semi-Optick Angle to the Eye at k. In like man●e● may we find the Optick Angle at any other given Station of the Eye , as at n , e n d = g n z being equal to half f n d.

( 4. ) As to the Visible Area of the Object , 't is determin'd as before , Prop. XXXV . and Schol. I shall only add , That if the Eye be at q. and the Line d q being drawn , and produced towards h , it does not fall upon the Glass g l ▪ then the Eye at q shall not see through the Glass the Point a , the Apex of whose Pencil is in the Point d. And from hence we may perceive , that at k , we may see through the Glass a greater space than the Area of the Object a b c. At ● we can but ju●● see the whole Object a b c ; and at q we cannot see extreme Point a c. By which the 81 and 82 Prop. of Kepler's Dioptrick● are manifest .

( 5. ) If the Glass have any Thickness considerable , see Prop. XXXI . concerning the Locus Objecti , Sec. 7.

Scholium .

If we first determine the Visible Area by Prop. XXXV . the Breadth of the Object need not be one of the Data for determining the Optick-Angle . For the Breadth of the Object is found by obtaining the Visible Area .

PROP. XXXVIII .

An Object being more distant from a Glass than its Focus , and the Eye placed in the Distinct Base , the Object appears most confused .

By Prop. XXXVI . 't is manifest , that the nigher the Eye approaches the Distinct Base , the more confused the Object appears ; because the Rays from each particular Point , do fall on the Eye closer Converged , and more orderly separated by the Glass from the Rays of adjacent Points . But in the Distinct Base , the Rays are most of all Converged , and most orderly united in their proper Points , each with the Rays flowing from the same Point in the Object . Wherefore the Eye is there in the greatest Confusion .

Moreover ( by Prop. XXVIII . Sec. 3. ) 't is requisite to Distinct Vision , that the Rays from the several Points in the Object , fall on the Eye altogether confused thereon ( as they do on the Glass in the Hole of a dark Room ) , that the Coats and Humors of the Eye may refract them , and bring them together , distinctly painting the Image on the Retina . But when the Eye is in the Distinct Base , all this is frustrated .

PROP. XXXIX .

The Object being more Distant from the Glass than the Focus ; and the Eye further from the Glass than the Distinct Base , begins to perceive the Object inverted ; and , at a proper distance , Distinct.

( 1. ) This is manifest by Tab. 30. Fig. 3. T. 30. F. 3. wherein a b c is an Object , g s l the Glass projecting the Distinct Base f e d , o is the Eye . And because half the Pencils of Rays that flow from each of the extreme Points of the Object a and c , proceeding forwards from the Points d and f in the Distinct Base , after they cross in the aforesaid Points d and f , by reason of their too great Divergence , do escape the Eye . Therefore , for avoiding Perplexity in the Scheme , I have only expressed the Half Cones s a l , s d l , and s c g , s f g , which incurr the Eye .

( 2. ) Wherefore we may observe , that the Diverging Rays p f o and o d q , falling diverging and confused on the Crystalline p q , are thereby collected , and made to concurr on the Retina in the Points n and r ; and there paint the upper Point a of the Object on the upper part r of the Eyes Fund ; and the lower Point c of the Object on the lower part n of the Retina . Therefore by Prop. XXVIII . Sect. 4 , and 5. the Object appears inverted , because the Image represented on the Retina is Erect .

( 3. ) Or more plainly thus , We may now conceive the Distinct Base it self f d to be as it were an inverted Object ( as here the Cross turned with its head downwards ) . Therefore the appearance thereof to the Eye , shall seem inverted . For if the Eye perceive an erect Object , erect , it must needs perceive the Distinct Base , being an inverted Object , inverted .

And this may be laid down as a General Rule , That where an Object , or the Image , or Representation of an Object , which is next the Eye , is inverted , there the Object shall appear inverted . And where the Object , or Image next before the Eye , is erect , the Object appears erect .

( 4. ) I say also , At a proper distance the Inverted Appearance is Distinct. For when the Eye is so far removed from the Distinct Base , as to be able to correct the Divergence of the Rays , that come to it from each Point in the Distinct Base , and to form them into correspondent Cones determining their Apices on the Retina , the Vision is Distinct , otherwise not .

Moreover there are two other Phaenomena of this Posture of Object , Glass , and Eye ; which I shall here explain as follows .

( 5. ) If the Eye be moved upwards towards z , the Object shall appear to move downwards . If the Eye be moved downwards towards x , the Object seems to move upwards . To explain this , let us consider the Point c ; and how the appearance thereof is brought to and formed in the Eye . And we shall find , that in the Posture of the Scheme , the Point c is expressed in the Eye , only by that parcel of its Rays that fall on the half Glass s g , for these are brought together in s f g , and flowing forward , become p f o : But the other parcel of Rays , s c l , that fall on the half Glass s l , and are brought together in s f l , proceeding forwards , escape the Eye ; for they go on in p f z. Wherefore the Point c is now represented through the half Glass s g , or seen somewhere between g and s. But the Eye moving upwards towards z , so that it miss the Rays p f o , and receive only the Rays p f z ; the Point c shall then be represented through the half Glass s l , or seen somewhere between s and l , and consequently shall seen to move downwards . What is shewn of the Point c , may be conceived of the other Points in the Object , that is , of the whole Object .

And this Phaenomenon is the strongest Confirmation imaginable , that the Locus Apparens Objecti , in this Case , is in the Distinct Base ( as is said before , Prop. XXXI . Sec. 10. ) . For by raising the Eye , we depress the Point f ; and by depressing the Eye , we raise the Point f. Wherefore . the appearance of the Point c is at f. For the Point c in the Object seems to move contrary to the motion of the Eye .

From the foregoing Explication it follows , that if the Glass be moved upwards , the Object appears to move upwards . And if the Glass be moved downwards , the Object appears to move downwards ; for the moving of the Glass upwards is the same as moving the Eye downwards ; but moving the Eye downwards , makes the Object appear to move upwards ; therefore the moving of the Glass upwards makes the Objects appear to move upwards .

Or thus , Because moving the Glass upwards , the Distinct Base is moved upwards ( for it follows the Glass ) , and the Distinct Base is in this case as it were the Object . ( Prop. XXXI . Sec. 10. ) Therefore by the Glasses motion upwards , the Eye shall perceive the Object moved upwards .

( 6. ) If with both Eye we look at the inverted Appearance of an Object through a Convex-Glass , we shall perceive the Object double . Supposing the Eyes not very far removed from the Distinct Base . Tab. 30. Fig. 4. T. 30. F. 4. a b c is an Object projected by the Glass g l in the Distinct Base f e d ; the Point e being correspondent to the Point b. Let the Cone of Rays g e l flow forwards from e , and become z e y. Let the two Eyes n , m meet the Cone of Rays z e y. I say the Eye n perceives the Point e ( the Representation of the Point b ) by the Rays z e q , which flow forward from i e l ; and consequently the Eye n perceives the Point ● or e , as it were , somewhere between 〈◊〉 and l. In like manner , the Eye ● perceives the Point b or e somewhere between s and g : Wherefore the two Eyes seeing the Point ● . or e , as it were , in two places , see it Double . What is said of the Point b , may be understood of any other Point in the Object , and consequently of the whole Object . And if we shut the Right Eye m , the Left Appearance of b vanishes ; if the Left Eye n , then the Right Appearance of the Object vanishs .

But if the Eyes be removed very far from the Distinct Base f e d , their Interval continues the same ; and the Rays e k , e p , Diverging continually , they shall at last fall on the Eyes ; that is , e k on the Eye n , and e p on the Eye m. By which the Eye n shall perceive e as it were at u ( k e u being one Right Line ) , and the Eye m shall perceive the same e as it were at r ( p e r being one Right Line ) , whereby the Difference of the Places r and u becomes less than before , till at last the Eye be got at such a Distance from the Distinct Base , that this Difference of the Apparent Places becomes so small , that 't is insensible to the sight .

Quaere . How Dr. Briggs would explain this Phaenomenon of Double Vision by his Theory of sight . Philosoph . Collect. Numb. 6.

PROP. XL.

To determine the Optick-Angle or Apparent Magnitude , and the Visible Area of an Object , placed as in the last , from these Data ; The Breadth of the Object a b c , ( Tab. 30. F. 5. ) T. 30. F. 5. It s Distance from the Glass s b , The Glasses Power or Focal Length , The Glasses Breadth g l , And the Distance of the Eye from the Glass o s.

( 1. ) It is shewn before ( Prop. XXXVII . ) how we may from these Data obtain the Breadth of the Distinct Base f e d , and its Distance from the Glass e s. Wherefore o s − e s = o e. Then in the Right-angled Triangle o e f , we have o e and e f to find the Angle f o e , which is the Semi-Optick Angle , under which the Eye perceives the Inverted Appearance of the Object . In like manner may we find the Optick Angle to any other station as at n.

( 2. ) The Learned GREGORY in his Opt. Promot . Prop. 46. has a curious Theorem to this purpose , 't is this , The Rays from each single Point in an Object a b c , being formed by the Glass g s l into the Distinct Base f e d ; and the Eye o being placed behind the Points of Concourse f e d ; the Image of each Point in the Object shall appear in the Apex of its Pencil ( That is , The Image of the Point a shall appear in the Apex of its Pencil at d , &c. ) , And the Object shall appear Inverted ; And under that Optick-Angle , as the Apices of the Pencils of the Extreme Points of the Object ; That is , under the Angle f o d.

( 3. ) The Visible Area is thus determined , Tab. 30. Fig. 6. T 30. F. 6. The Object a b c is projected by the Glass g s l in the Distinct Base f e d. Let the Eye be at o ; draw o g , o l ; the Eye at o shall see no more of the Object , than what is represented between z and r , where the Lines o g , o l , intersect the Distinct Base . To determine the Points in the Object , that answer the Points z , r , in the Distinct Base . From the Centre of the Glass s ( for I suppose it of no Thickness ) , draw z s x , r s k ; the Point k answers r , and x answers z. Lastly , from the foregoing Data to determine the Measure of z r say , As s o : s g : : e o : e z = ½ z r ; but the three first are known , therefore the fourth is known also . Which was to be found .

( 4. ) If the Line o y produced do not fall on the Glass , then that Point in the Object , whose Apex of its Pencil is at y , or which is projected in the Distinct Base at y , shall not be seen through the Glass by the Eye at o. Vid. Schol Prop. XLVI . Gregorii Opt. Promot .

Corollary .

Hence it follows , That the further the Eye is removed from the Distinct Base , it perceives the greater Area of the Object ; but can never see more than what is projected in the Breadth of the Glass ; that is , z r can never be greater than g l , nor ever equal thereto , unless the Eye o be at an infinite Distance .

PROP. XLI .

An Object being placed nigher a Convex Glass than its Focus , and the Eye on t'other side the Glass , at any Distance within the Eyes power , sees this Object Distinct and Erect .

I say , Within the Eye's Power ; for 't is shewn before in Prop. VII . and VIII . That when an Object is placed nigher a Convex Glass than its Focus , the Rays from each Point thereof , after passing the Glass , do Diverge , but not so much as if the Glass were away . Wherefore , tho the Eye looking at an Object within the Focus of this Glass , may be nigher the Object , than if the Glass were away , and yet see it distinctly ; yet there is a mean to be observed ; for even with the Glass it self the Eye may be too nigh the Object , and not able to correct the Divergence of the Rays it receives .

But that an Object thus posited appears Distinct to the Eye at a convenient Distance , is manifest ; for the Rays from each Point proceed moderately Diverging , and so fall on the Eye . Prop. XXVIII . Sec. 7.

PROP. XLII .

To determine the Visible Area , and the Optick-Angle or Apparent Magnitude of an Object placed as in the last , from these Data , The Power or Focal Length of the Glass , The Distance of the Object from the Glass , The Distance of the Eye from the Glass , and the Breadth of the Glass .

Tab. 31. Fig. 1. and 2. Tab. 32. Fig. 1 , 2. a b is an Object exposed to the Glass g l , nigher to it than its Focus . o is the Eye , which in F i g. 1. is supposed nigher the Glass than its Focus ; and this is the First Case . But in Fig. 2. the Eye o is supposed further from the Glass than its Focus ; and this is the Second Case . 'T is shewn before ( Prop. V. VIII . ) , how the Respective and Imaginary Foci f are determined in one and t'other Case .

First let the given Breadth of the Glass be g l. By Prop. XXXV . we determine the Visible Area z y. Let us then suppose the given Breadth of the Glass to be p q. By the same Prop. XXXV . we determine the Visible Area e d.

As to the Optick-Angles g o l ( supposing the Object z y ) or p o q ( supposing the Object e d ) they are determined from the Data , by Plain Trigonometry of Right-angled Triangles , as before in Prop. XXXIV .

And we shall find by Calculation ( as indeed 't is evident by the very Inspection and Consideration of the Schemes ) , that the Collateral Parts z e , d y , of the Object z y , are much more magnifid ( in respect of their Natural Appearance ) by Broad Glasses formed on small Spheres , than the Middle Parts e x , d x ; for the Angle g o p is the Optick-Angle , through the Glass , of the Part z e ; and the Angle p o s is the Optick-Angle , through the Glass , of the Part e x ; but the former exceeds the Natural Optick-Angle much more than the latter . As to the Natural Optick-Angle of the Object z x , were the Glass away ; draw z o directly ( Fig. 1. ) , then in the Right-angled Triangle z x o , we have z x and x o to find the Angle z o x , which is the Natural Optick-Angle of the Object z x.

From hence it is , that by Broad Glasses formed on small Spheres , the Extreme Parts of strait Objects , seem to be incurved and bent ; as is manifest in the Case of the Micrometer , or Lattic●e of fine Hairs , strained before the Eye Glass in a Telescope , for Measuring the Diameters of Objects . As Pere Cherubin complains in his Dioptrique Oculair . Part. III. Sec. 7. Chap. 1. pag. 239. but understood not the reason . Of this we may make Experiment , by looking with a very Convex Glass at two Parallel Lines drawn pretty close on a Paper .

Schol. 1.

If instead of the Glasses Breadth , we have the Breadth of the Object e d given , we may easily determine the Breadth of the Glass , through which this Portion of the Object is seen : For from the Point f , draw f e , f d , these intersect the Glass in p , q. I say this is the Portion of the Glass , through which e d is visible . And if the Line f m , being produced , do not fall on the Glass , the Point m in the Object is not visible through the Glass g l to the Eye at o.

Schol. 2.

This XLII . Proposition , as it relates to the Optick-Angle , may be solved an other way by Determining the Locus Objecti . But then , to the former Data in that Proposition , instead of the Glasses Breadth , we must add the Breadth of the Object .

Wherefore , Tab. 31. Fig. 3. T. 32. F. 1. Let the Locus of the Object a b c be determin'd d e f , by Prop. XXXI . Sec. 7. Let the Eye be at o , draw d o , f o directly ; if the Right Line do do not fall on the Glass , the Eye at o cannot perceive through the Glass the Point of the Object a ( Vid. Prop. XXXVII . Sec. 4. Prop. XL. Sec. 4. & Schol. Prop. XLVI . Gregorii Opt. Promot . ) . But if d o , f o , fall on the Glass ; I say the Angle d o f is the Angle under which the Object a b c appears to the Eye at o through the Glass . For the Object a b c is seen through the Glass under the same Angle , as the Image d e f would be seen without the Glass ( by Prop. XXXI . Sec. 7. ) . Now because we have a b and b z given , and e z found , we may find also e d ; for b z : b a : : e z : e d. Then in the Right-angled Triangle d o e , we have d e and e o ( = e z + z o ) to find the Angle d o e = ½ d o f. Draw then a o directly ; the Angle a o b is the Natural Optick-Angle , under which the Object a b would appear to the Eye without the Glass . Now having a b and b o ( = b z + z o ) we may find the Angle a o b ; the Difference between which and the Angle d o e ( that is d o a ) shews how much the Objects is magnified by the Glass .

I. Example of the First Case computed by the Method in Prop. XLII . Tab. 31. Fig. 1. T. 31. F. 1 Data . Glasses Focus = — 4637 Dist. of the Eye from the Glass = s o = 2500 Dist. of the Obj. from the Glass = s x = 2721 ½ Breadth of the Glass = ½ g l = s g = 145 Quaesita . ½ Visible Area = z x = ? ½ Optick-Angle = ∠ g o s = ?

First supposing the Point o Radiating Point ,

By Prop. VIII . As Focus Glass — s o : to Foc. Glass : : s o : f s

That is in Numbers 2137 : 4637 : : 2500 : 5425

Then — f s : s g : : f x ( = f s + s x ) : z x

That is 5425 : 145 : : 8146 : 217 = x z the Visible Area in this Case according to the Data .

Secondly , To find the Optick-Angle g o s , under which this z x = 217 , appears ; say ,

s o : Rad. : : s g : Tang. ∠ g o s = 3° 19 ' 10 " .

The foregoing Example calculated according to Schol. 2. Prop. XLII . But the Letters refer to Tab. 31. Fig. 3. T. 31. F. 3.

Data . Glasses Focus = — 4637 Dist. of the Eye from the Gl. = z o = 2500 Dist. of the Obj. from the Gl. = z b = 2721 ½Breadth of the Object = — a b = 217 Quaesita . Distance of the Imaginary Focus z e = ? Breadth of the Imaginary Focus = d e = ? Optick-Angle — ∠ d o e = ?

First , Supposing the Point b a Radiating Point , to determine the Imaginary focus at e , by Prop. VIII . we must say ,

As Focus Glass — z b : Focus Glass : : z b : z e

That is in Numbers 1916 : 4637 : : 2721 : 6585

Then by Pr. 2. 6. Eucl. z b : b a : : z e : e d

That is in Numb. 2721 : 217 : : 6585 : 525

Lastly , As e o ( = z e + z o ) : Rad. : : c e : Tang. ∠ d o e = 3° 18 ' 30 " , which wants only 40● Seconds of the former Calculation , by reason of the neglect of the Fractions .

II Example of the Second Case calculated according to Prop. XLII . Tab. 31. Fig. 2. T. 31. F 2 Data . Glasses Focus = — 4637 Dist. of the Eye from the Glass = s o = 5000 Dist. of the Obj. from the Glass = s x = 2721 ½ Breadth of the Glass = ½ g l = s g = 145 Quaesita . ½ Visible Area = — z x = ? ½ Optick-Angle = — ∠ g o s = ?

First , Supposing the point o a Radiating Point , Then by Prop. V.

As s o — Foc. of the Gl. : Foc. of the Gl. : : s o : f s

That is in Numbers 363 : 4637 : 5000 : 63870

Then — f s : s g : : f x ( = f s − s x ) : z x

That is in Numbers 63870 : 145 : : 61149 : 138 , being the Visible Area in this Case , according to the Data .

Secondly , To find the Optick-Angle g o s , under which this z x = 138 appears ; say ,

As so : Rad. : : s g : Tang. ∠ g o s = 1° 39 ' 40 "

The foregoing II. Example calculated according to the Solution in Schol. 2. Pr. XLII . The Letters relate to Tab. 31. F. 3. T 31. F. 3.

Data . Glasses Focus = 4637 Dist. of the Eye from the Glass = z o = 5000 Dist. of the Obj. from the Glass = z b = 2721 Breadth of the Object = — a b = 138 Quaesita . Distance of the Imaginary Focus = z e ½ Breadth of the Imaginary Focus = d e Optick-Angle through the Glass = ∠ d o e

Let us suppose the Point b a Radiating Point . To determine the Imaginary Focus at e , by Prop. VIII . say ,

As Foc. of the Glass — z b : Foc. of the Gl. : : z b : z e

That is in Numbers 1916 : 4637 : : 2721 : 6585

Then z b : b a : : z e : e d

That is in Numbers 2721 : 138 : : 6585 : 334

Lastly , As e o ( = z e + z o ) : Rad. : : d e : Tang. ∠ d o e = = 1° 39 ' 0 " , which by reason of the neglect of Fractions wants 40 " Seconds of the foregoing Calculation .

Of CONCAVES .

I Now proceed to the Confideration of Vision through Concave Glasses .

PROP. XLIII .

All Objects seen through Concave Glasses appear Erect and Diminish'd .

I say also , The Appearance of Objects through Concaves is diminish●d . Tab. 32. Fig. 1. T 32 F. 1. a x b is an Object , o the Eye . Draw a e o , b d o , directly strait from the Extremities of the Object to the Eye . The Angle comprised by the direct Rays a e o , b d o , that is , the Angle a o b is the Natural Optick-Angle . Let now the Concave-Glass c f be interposed ; here , because the Rays a e , b d , would naturally concurr at o , now the Concave-Glass is interposed , their Concourse shall be protracted beyond o ; wherefore the Eye at o shall not perceive the Extremities a , b , of the Object through the Glass by the Rays a e , b d , but by some other Rays , and these other Rays must either fall without ( that is farther from the Axis o x , than ) a e , b d , or they must fall within a e , b d : But they cannot fall without a e , b d ; for if a e , b d , themselves be made by the Glass to concurr beyond the Eye at o , much more shall the Concourse of any other Rays that fall without a e , b d , be protracted beyond o ; and consequently they cannot convey the Appearance of the Extreme Points a , b , to the Eye at o. Wherefore it remains , that the Rays that do this , must fall within ae , bd . Let us suppose these Rays to be a c , b f , which in their Natural direct Course , would concur at q , but by the Refractive Power of the Concave , are bent and made to proceed in c o , f o , their Concourse being protracted till they arrive at the Eye in o. Here the Optick-Angle through the Glass is c o f , which is less than the Natural Optick-Angle a o b , and consequently the Appearance of the Object is diminish'd . Which was to be proved .

PROP. XLIV .

Concerning the Distinct and Confused Appearance of Objects through Concaves ; as also of their Faint or Obscure Appearance .

We are here to remember what before is laid down , concerning the Virtual Focus of a Concave exposed to Parallel or to Diverging Rays ( in Prop. XI , XII , XIII . & Corol. Prop. XV. ) . We are likewise to take notice , that in Plain Vision , when the Rays from any single Point in an Object do not Diverge more that what the Refractive Power of the Coats and Humors of the Eye can correct ; so that these Rays may be brought together in a Correspondent Point on the Retina ; then the Appearance of that Point is Distinct. For instance , Tab. 32 , F. 2. T. 32. F. 2. Let the Point a diffuse the Rays a b , a s , a r , a c. Suppose the Breadth of the Pupil were p q , and the Eye there placed ; perhaps the Refractive Power of the eye is not sufficient to correct the Divergence of the Rays a p b , a q c. But if the Pupil ( continuing of the same Breadth ) recede to r s , then only the Rays a s , a r , fall into it ; and these perhaps may be reduced by the Eye to determine in a Point on the Retina ; because they do not Diverge so much as the former . If therefore we suppose the Pupil in its former station at p q , but now only to be of the Breadth i d , so as to admit only the Rays a d s , a i r , then the Point a may be seen as distinctly as at r s. This manifest even by Experiment ; for apply a Minute Object so near the Eye , that it appears very confused ; then place before the Eye a very small Hole made with a Pins end in a Paper ; The Object shall now appear Distinct. For the Hole in the Paper serves to make the Pupil more Narrow . Which evidently proves what we have laid down .

The same may be shewen concerning Vision through a Concave Glass Tab. 32. f. 3. T. 32. F. 3. a is a Radiating Point , whose Rays a b , a c , fall on the Concave b c. These after passing the Glass Diverge more than before . Let p q be the Breadth of the Pupil , receiving the refracted Rays a p , a q , These Diverge so much , that 't is not in the power of the Eye to reduce them , and form them into an inward Cone , determining its Apex on the Fund of the Eye . But let the Pupil continue of the same Breadth , and recede to r s , where it may only receive the Rays a d s , a i r ; and then perhaps the Eye may prevail to reduce these ; because they do not Diverge so much as the other Rays that fell on the Pupil at p q. Or otherwise , let the Pupil continue at p q , But let its Breadth be contracted to d i ; so that it may receive no more Rays in this Posture , than ( continuing of its natural Breadth ) at r s. Here likewise the Appearance of the Point a may be Distinct. Of this likewise we may make a most convincing Experiment : For take a Concave of a small Sphere , and place it very near the Eye , and the Appearance of distant Objects through it is Confus●d . Remove it farther from the Eye , and the Appearance shall be more Distinct. But even in a Posture where the Appearance is Confused , contract the Pupil by placing before it a small Hole Prick●d in a Paper , And the Object shall appear more Distinct , though Obscure , which upon the removal of Hole , shall be again Confused , though more Lightsome . Vid. Kepleri Dioptr. Prop. C.

Wherefore if we have the Distance of a Radiating Point from a Concave , and the virtual Focus of the Concave , and the Distance of the Eye behind the Glass ; we may easily by the foregoing Rules ( viz. Corol. Prop. XV. ) find the virtual Focus of these Rays . As suppose in the same Fig● the Rays flowing from a , after passing the Glass , Diverge as if they came directly from z. And consequently , if in Plain Vision the Eye at r s be able to see distinctly the Point a , if it were removed nigher , as at z , then it shall be able to see the Point a distinctly through the Glass . But whether any Particular Eye be able to do this , is impossible to be known by Rule ; The Strength and Weakness of Mens Eyes being infinitely various . And therefore one Man may see a Point at a certain Distance distinctly through a Glass , which Glass to another Man would render it Confused ; As 't is Plain in the Case of Myopes , or Short-sighted Persons .

As to the Strong or Faint Appearance of Objects through Concaves ; Because the Concave ( Tab. 32. f. 3. ) T. 32. F. 3. scatters the Rays flowing from the Point a , insomuch that now the Rays a b , a c , scape the Pupil p q , the Point a shall appear more Faint through the Glass than naturally . For Strong or very Luminous Virsion proceeds from a greater Quantity of Rays or Light entring the Pupil ; And Faint or Obsure Vision from a less Quantity of Rays .

Scholium .

We may here consider the different Effects of Convex and Concave Glasses . For when a Point appears Confused through a Convex , 't is by Reason of the Too great Convergence of the Rays that fall on the Eye . And therefore , Because the farther from the Glass towards the Point of Concourse the Rays that fall on the Eye Converge the more ; the Appearance is through Them still the more Confused .

But in Concaves ; Because the Confused Appearance of a Point proceeds from the Too great Divergence of those Rays that fall on the Eye ; and because the farther the Eye is from the Glass , the Rays that fall on the Eye Diverge less than those that fell upon it when it was nigher the Glass ; Therefore through Concaves , the farther the Eye is from the Glass , the more Distinct is the Appearance , but still more Faint :

PROB. XLV .

Concerning the Apparent Place of Objects seen through Concave Glasses .

Tab. 32. f. 4. T. 32. F. 4. If the Point a Radiate on the Concave Glass c d , and the Rays after passing the Glass Diverge as if they came directly from the Point b. And the Eye e g receive all or part of the Rays , and there by perceive the Radiating Point a , the Point b is the Locus Apparens of the Point a. That is , the Point a is seen by the Eye , as if it were at b.

By which we may Observe , that the Apparent Place of Objects seen through Concaves is brought nigher the Eye . And hence 't is manifest , why they help their Eyes , who are short-sighted , or can only see nigh Objects . For these Glasses make distant Objects seem nigh . Vid. Dechales Dioptr. Lib. 2. Prop. XXXIX .

Here also by the way we shall Note , That suppose a Purblind Person , that can Read distinctly or see Objects at the distance of a foot from his naked Eye : A Concave Glass , whose virtual Focus is a Foot distant from it , makes such a Person see distant Objects distinctly . Wherefore knowing the Distance at which a Purblind Person Reads distinctly , 't is easie to assign him a proper Glass for his Eye , to see distant Objects . Vid. second Part. C. 3.

Tab. 32. f. 5. T. 32. F. 5. Is in all things Correspondent to the Doctrine laid down in Prop. XXXI . Sec. 7. and marked with the same Letters ; so that the very Words of that Section may be applied to the Concave , as well as to the Convex . Only the Imaginary Focus e for the Concave is to be determin'd by Prop. XI , XII , XIII . XV. and Corol. Prop. XV. &c. I shall not therefore , Repeat , but refer to that Section .

PROP. XLVI . PROBL.

To determine the visible Area , and the Optick Angle or Apparent Magnitude of an Object seen through a Concave from these Data ; The Power or Focal Length of the Glass ; The Distance of the Object from the Glass ; The Distance of the Eye from the Glass , and the Breadth of the Glass .

Tab. 33. f. 1. T. 33. F. 1. g z l is a Concave Glass , whole virtual Focus is given . Likewise g z the half Breadth of the Glass is given also . a b c is an Object , whose Distance from the Glass b z is given . And the Distance of the Eye o from the Glass , o z , is also given .

Let us now conceive the Point o an Object or nigh Radiating Point , sending its Rays o g , o z , o l , on the Concave Glass ; These ( by t●e foregoing Doctrine of Concaves ) after passing the Glass Diverge more than before their Entrance , and proceed in g a , l c , as if they came directly from a certain Point f. This Point f or the Line f z , is easily determind by Prop. XI , XII , XIII . XV. and Corol. thereof . Wherefore having f z , we may say , As f z : z g : : f b ( = f z + z b ) b a. Which is half the Visible Area .

As to the Optick Angle through the Glass , g o z , 't is easily obtain●d in the right-angled Triangle g o z , having g z and z o.

Draw a o directly , The Angle a o b is the natural Optick Angle , under which the Object would appear to the Eye , were the Glass removed ; This we obtain in the right-angled Triangle a b o by having a b and b o = b z + z o.

Scholium 1.

If instead of the Glasses Breadth , we have given the Breadth of the Object a b c ( Tab. 33. f. 2. ) T. 33. F. 2. We may easily determine

the Portion of the Glass through which this Object is seen . For from the Point f , draw f a , f c , These Intersect the Glass in g l ; I say g l is the Portion of the Glass , through which the Object a c is visible .

And if the Line f m being drawn do not fall on the Glass , the Point m in the Object is not visible through the Glass to the Eye at o.

Scholium 2.

The foregoing Problem , as it relates to the Optick Angle , may be solved another way by determining the Locus Objecti . But then to the former Da●a , instead of the Breadth of the Glass , we cannot add the Breadth of the Object .

This is Evident from Tab. 32. f. 5. T. 32. F. 5. To which we may apply the Words of the Second Scholium , Prop. XLII . without further Repetition .

Example of a Calculation according to Prop. XLVI . apply'd to Tab. 33. f. 1. T. 33. F. 1. Data . Focus of the Glass = — 4573. ½ Breadth of the Glass = g z = 500 Distance of the Object = b z = 10000 Distance of the Eye = z o = 20000 Quaesit . Half the Visible Area = a b = ? Half Optick Angle = g o z = ?

First by Corol. Prop. XV. z o+ F o. Glass : z o : : F o. G l : z f

That is in Numbers — 24573 : 20000 : : 4573 : 3722.

Then — z f : g z : : b f ( = b z + z f ) : a b

That is in Numbers 3722 : 500 : : 13722 : 1843.

Lastly in the right-angled Triangle g o z , as z o : Rad: : g z : Tang. ∠ goz = 1° 25 ' 50 " .

Example Calculated according to the Method Propos'd in this Second Schol. Prop. XLVI . but the Letters refer to Tab. 32. f 5. T. 32. F. 5.

Data . Focus of the Glass = — 4573. Distance of the Object = b z = — 10000 Distance of the Eye = z o = — 20000 Half Breadth of the Object as Found in the forgoing Example = a b = 1843

First by Corol. Prop. XV. b z + Gl. Focus : b z : : Gl. Fo: z e

That is in Numbers 14573 : 10000 : : 4573 : 3138

Then — z b : b a : : z e : e d

That is in Numbers — 10000 : 1843 : : 3138 : 578.

Lastly in the right-angled Triangle d e o , as o e ( = o z + z e = 23138 ) : Rad: : e d : Tang. d o e = 1° 25 ' 50 " . agreeable to what was found by the immediately preceding Calculation .

I shall now shew , how by this Method of Demonstrating the Properties , Effects , and Appearances of Glasses ; Some of the noted Propositions in Dioptrick Writers may be easily proved . In which the Authors have been very Operose , and in some very Obscure . And because I will not interrupt the Series of my Propositions , I shall give them in the following Order .

PROP. XLVII .

The further the Eye is removed from the Concave Glass , the Object appears the less . Zahn Telescop : Fund . 2. Synt. 2. Cap. 5. Prop. XXIII . Dechales Dioptr. Lib. 2. Prop. LII .

This is manifest from Tab. 32. f. 5. T. 32. F. 5. For we are to Consider the Image d e f , in the virtual Focus , as the Object , and as look'd at without the Glass . For the Lines d o , f o , which determine the Optick Angle , are drawn directly to the Eye at o. Wherefore if we conceive the Eye o removed farther from the Glass ; the Angle d o f must needs decrease , and consequently the Object appear less . What is here said of the Concave may be apply'd to the Convex in Tab. 31. f. 3. ● . 31. F. 3.

PROP. XLVIII .

If a Concave Glass be removed from the Eye , so large an Area or space of the Object cannot be seen through it .

This is the 97 th Prop. of Kepler's Dioptricks . Wherein he seems to make no Distinction between removing the Glass from the Eye , and removing the Eye from the Glass . Whereas there is a very great Difference between both Motions to be consider'd in Dioptricks . For in moving the Glass from the Eye , the Glass Approaches the Object , and the Locus Apparens Objecti is changed . But in moving the Eye to or from the Glass , the Locus Apparens Objecti never alters . Prop. XXXI . Sec. 7. And from his Proof of this Proposition 't is manifest , that he should have expressed it thus ,

If the Eye be removed from a Concave , so large a space of the Object cannot be seen through it .

Wherefore instead of the foregoing 48 th . Proposition , I substitute this ; Which is Evident by our foregoing Method from Tab. 33. f. 3. T. 33. F. 3. Wherein a b c is an Object , g l a Concave Glass , o the Eye nigh the Glass , e Eye more Distant from the Glass . Let the Point of Divergence , answering to the Station at o , be f ( determin'd by the foregoing Doctrine ) : draw f g a , f l c , directly ; the space visible at o is a c. Now , when the Eye is removed from the Glass to e , the Point of Divergence shall also be removed from the Glass , and determin'd by what foregoes , as suppose at q ( till the Eye be at an infinite Distance , and then the Point of Divergence is as far from the Glass as 't is possible , viz. in the virtual Focus ) : draw q g n , q l m , directly ; The space visible at e is n m less than a c. Which was to be Demonstrated .

Or otherwise . Tab. 34. f. 1. T 43. F. 1. d e f is the Locus Apparens Objecti abc through the Glass g l ; the Eye is at o ; o g , o l produced directly meet the Image in the Points d , f. Wherefore exactly the whole Object a b c , and no more , is seen through the Glass g l by the Eye at o. Let the Eye be removed to q ; If we draw q d , q f , these fall not on the Glass , and consequently the Extremities of the Object a and c shall not be perceived by the Eye at q through the Glass . ( Schol. 1. Prop. XLVI . ) Draw therefore q g , q l , and produce them directly to n and m ; the Points in the Object y x , answerable to the Points n , m , are the utmost Extremities visible through the Glass g l to the Eye at q. Which Point y , x , are e●sily determinable by what is laid down Prop. XL. Sec. 3. For from the Center of the Glass z , draw z n y , z m x , directly ; y , x , are hereby determin'd .

As to this 48 th . Prop. VIZ. That if a Concave Glass be removed from the Eye , so large an Area or space of the Object cannot be seen through it . 'T is needless to enlarge thereon , after our 46 th . Prop. .

PROP. XLIX .

The farther a Concave Glass is removed from the Eye , The Obj●●●s are thereby the more diminish●d , as long as the Glass continu●s nigher to the Eye than to the Object ,

This is the 98 th . Prop. of Kepler's Dioptricks . We may find it also , In Cherubin's La Dioptrique Oculaire pag. 77. Dechales Dioptrica Lib. 2. Prop. XXXVIII . Herigonii Dioptr. Prop. XXXI . But in all of them obscurely and loosely proved .

A Convex-Glass being equally Distant from the Eye and from the Object , renders the Appearance the most Magnified ; and a Concave the most Diminished , that That Distance of Eye and Object will allow .

For the Proof hereof I need offer no more than the following Calculations ( instituted according to the Doctrine Precedent ) wherein we shall find ( Tab. 31. f. 3. and Tab. 32. f. 5. ) T. 31. F. 5. T. 32. F. 5. the Angle d o e , ( which is the Angle under which the Object appears through the Glass ) in the second Case ( wherein the Glass is equally Distant from the Eye and Object ) to be greater for the Convex , and less for the Concave , than the same Angle in either of the other Cases .

And by the same Calculations we may likewise observe in the first and third Cases , That when the Glass is equally removed from the middle towards the Eye , or towards the Object , the Appearance is equally magnified by the Convex , and diminish'd by the Concave ; for we find in the first and third Cases , the Angles d o e equal .

I say , this may be sufficient for the Proof of the foregoing Position . But to this I shall add also this farther Consideration . That by the preceding Doctrine , the magnify'd Appearances of Objects through Convexes , and their diminish'd Appearances through Concaves , being deduced from the Loci Apparentes of Objects through those Glasses . We may easily conceive , That supposing the Convex-Glass g l ( Tab. 34. f. 2. T. 34. F. 2. ) or Concave g l ( Tab. 34. f. 3. T. 34 F. 3. ) to touch the Eye o , and that the Apparent Place of the Object a b c is d e f. The Eye perceives the Object under its own Natural Optick-Angle , neither magnify'd or diminish'd by one or t other Glass .

Likewise if , in the same Figures , we conceive the Glasses ( which are still supposed of the least thickness imaginable ) to touch the Objects , the Object and Locus Apparens thereof are the same ; and consequently , the Optick-Angle in this Posture can neither be increased or diminish'd by either of the Glasses .

Wherefore it remains , that seeing the Glasses do not at all Exert their Effects in either of the Extremes , that is , either touching the Eye , or touching the Object : And seeing they Exert their Effects equally being equally removed from the middle z between the Eye and the Object ; It will follow , that they Exert their Effects most powerfully being placed just in the middle z between the Eye and Object , that is , the Convex by Magnifying , and the Concave by Diminishing the Appearance .

And thus much shall suffice concerning single Glasses apply'd to the Eye . HerefollowtheCalculations. Calculation for the CONVEX Tab. 31. F. 3. T. 31. F. 3. Focus of the Glass = 10 , 000 Breadth of the Object = a b = 1 ▪ 000 Given the same in all the Cases . First Case . Second Case . Third Case . Wherein the Distance between the Eye and the Glass o z is given greater than the Distance between the Object and Glass b z Wherein the Glass is equally distant from the Eye and Object , that is b z = o z ▪ Wherein the Distance between the Eye and the Glass o z is given less than the Distance between the Object and the Glass b z Data b z = 3,000 o z = 9,000 Data b z = 6,000 o z = 6,000 Data b z = 9,000 o z = 3,000 — — — z e = 4 , 286 z e = 15,000 z e = 90,000 e d = 1 , 429 e d = 2 , 500 e d = 10,000 o e = o z + z e = 13 , 286 o e = o z + z e = 21,000 o e = o z + z e = 9●,000 ∠ d o e = 6° 8 ' 15 " . ∠ . d o e = 6° 47 ' 202. ∠ . d o e = 6° 8 ' 15 " .

Calculation for the CONCAVET Tab. 32. F. 5. T. 32. F. 5. Focus of the Glass = 10,000 Breadth of the Object = a b = 1,000 Given the same in all the Cases . First Case . Second Case . Third Case . Wherein the Distance between the Eye and the Glass o z is given greater than the Distance between the Object and the Glass b z. Wherein the Glass is equally Distant from the Eye and Object , that is , b z = z o Wherein the Distance between the Eye and the Glass o z is given less than the Distance between the Object and Glass b z. Data b z = 3,000 o z = 9,000 Data b z = 6,000 o z = 6,000 Data b z = 9,000 o z = 3,000 — — — z e = 2,308 z e = 3,750 z e = 4,737 e d = 0,769 e d = 0,625 e d = 0,526 o e = o z + z e = 11,308 o e = o z + z e = 9,750 o e = o z + z e = 7,737 ∠ . d o e = 3° 53 ' 20 " . ∠ . d o e = 3° 40 ' 0 " . ∠ . d o e = 3° 53 ' 20 " .

Hitherto we have Treated of single Convexes and Concaves , apply'd to the Eye . I proceed now to the Combination of Convexes with Convexes , and Convexes with Concaves ; Wherein the Properties , Effects , and Appearances of Telescopes , and Microscopes , of all kinds shall be declared .

Definitions .

The Object-Glass is the Glass next the Object .

The Eye-Glass , simply so called , is the Glass immediately next the Eye . But if there be more than one , the first Eye-Glass is that next the Object-Glass ; the second is that next the first , &c.

PROP. L.

The Telescope , consisting of a Convex Object-Glass and a Convex Eye-Glass of a less Sphere or greater Convexity , is explained .

Tab. 35. f. 1. T. 35. F. 1. Let there be a Distant Object such as A B C ; From whose highest Point A let the Rays a a a , mark'd by the long Pricks , proceed . And from the middle Point B , let the Rays expressed by the continued Lines b b b , proceed . And from its lower Point C , the Rays mark'd by the round Pricks c c c. And so Rays from all the other Points in the Object . These falling on the Object-Glass x y z , are formed thereby into the Distinct Base f e d. Let now the Eye-Glass g h l be placed as far distant from this Distinct Base f e d , as is the Focus of this Eye-Glass , that is ; Let e h be the Focal length of the Eye-Glass g h l ( And consequently the Distance of the Glasses y h is the Aggregate of both their Focal lengths ) And let the Eye o be placed as far distant ( or rather a little more distant ) from the Eye-Glass g h l as is the Focal length of the same Eye-Glass . I say the Eye shall perceive the Object ABC , Distinct , Magnified , and Inverted .

Secondly , In like manner may we conceive the Representation of the Collateral Points : thus the Rays a x , a y , a z , proceeding from the upper Point A of the Object , are by the Object-Glass x y z made to Converge towards the Distinct Base in d ; From whence flowing forward they fall Diverging on the Eye - Glass at l ; by which they are made to run parallel amongst themselves , and are bent towards the Focus at o ; where falling on the Pupil parallel , they are by the Eye refracted and brought together in the Point r on the Retina . There paintting the Representing of the Point A in the Object .

Thirdly , That the Rays flowing Diverging from each particular Point in the Distinct Base f e d are brought by the Eye-Glass to a Parallelism amongst themselves , is manifest from Prop. VI. And that the Rays from f , from e , and from d , are mixt and confused by the Eye-Glass in its Focus at o ( or thereabouts ) is manifest from hence , that we may conceive one Ray in the Cone of Rays g f , or in the Cone of Rays z f x , that runs parallel to the Axis y e h o s , or at least that would run so parallel , if the Breadth of the Object-Glass in respect of the Breadth of the Eye-Glass will permit . This Ray , I say , by the known Properties of the Convex Eye-Glass , shall be refracted into its Focus at o ; and all the other Rays of the same Cone f g , after passing the Eye-Glass , shall be refracted and made to proceed parallel to that single Ray , that is bent into the Focus o , because the Point f is supposed in t'other Focus of the Eye-Glass . Wherefore the Rays from all the Points in the Distinct Base are confounded together about the Focus of the Eye-Glass .

Fourthly , Or otherwise I shall explain this matter thus ; If we conceive y , a Radiating Point , sending forth the Rays y g , y b , y l : And the difference between the Focal length of the Object-Glass and Focal length of the Eye-Glass to be very great ( as suppose the Object-Glass to be twelve Foot , and the Eye - Glass three Inches ) we shall find by Prop. V. the Point o , where the Rays g o , l o , cross the Axis or Perpendicular Ray h o , to be very nigh the Focus of the Eye-Glass ( viz. in our Supposition h o shall be 3,063 Inches ) and let the Focal lengths of the Object-Glass and Eye-Glass bear whatever Proportion , the Point o , where g o , l o , shall cross h o , may be determin'd by Prop. V. But then indeed the Rays that fall on the Eye without g o , or within it , do cross the Perpendicular Ray h o , farther from the Eye-Glass , or nigher to the Eye-Glass than g o it self ; For they do not proceed from the same Point y ; And g o is only the Refraction of the Ray y g. And therefore , unless the difference between the Focal lengths of the Object-Glass and Eye - Glass be Considerable , the Eye may move considerably nigher to the Eye-Glass , or farther from the Eye-Glass than the Point o , and not perceive any Alteration in the Appearance of the Object . But if the said Difference be Considerable , ( as it always is in Telescopes ) the Eye can move but very little either farther from or nigher to the Eye-Glass than o , but it shall perceive a great Alteration in the Appearance ( that is , in the Visible Area ) of the Object . As shall be manifested more plainly hereafter .

From all which it appears , That the Pupil of the Eye at o , being in the place of the greatest Confusion , where the Rays from all Points in the Object are mixt together , and the Rays from each single Point fall parallel amongst themselves ; The Appearance of the Object must needs be Distinct. By Prop. XXVIII . Sec. 3.

Fifthly , I say likewise the Object is magnified . If the naked Eye were in the place of the Object-Glass at y ( Tab. 35. f. 2. ) T. 35. F. 2. the Object would appear to it under the Angle a y c = f y d. That is , the Object would appear to the Eye at y , under the same Angle as the Distinct Base f e d , were it an Object , would appear to the same Eye at y. Wherefore let us now consider the Distinct Base f e d as the Object . This appears to the Eye at o through the Eye-Glass under the same Angle g o l , as were the naked Eye viewing it at h , by Prop. XXXIII . Make ● q equal to e h , and draw h f , h d , and q f , q d. The Angle f h d by Prop. XXXIV . is equal to g o l , the Optick-Angle through the Telescope , and the same Angle f h d is equal to f q d. But f q d is much greater than f y d = a y c the Natural Optick-Angle to the Eye supposed at y. and yet much greater than the Natural Optick-Angle would be to the Eye at o. Because o is yet further from the outward real Object than y by the whole length of the Telescope . Wherefore the Object is Magnified .

Lastly , I say the Object appears Inverted . This is manifest from the very Scheme ( Tab. 35. f. 1. T. 35. F. 1. ) without farther Explication . For the Object is Inverted in the Distinct Base , and the Eye-Glass does not return it again before it arrive at the Eye , but 't is painted on the Retina r s t Erect ; wherefore by Prop. XXXVIII . Sec. 4 , 5. the Object appears Inverted . See also Prop. XXXIX . Sec. 4 , 5.

Scholium .

The Locus Apparens of an Object through this Glass is the Distinct Base f e d ( Prop. XXXI . ) as is manifest from this Experiment . Stretch an Hair exactly in this Distinct Base , it shall appear as it were fixt to the very Object . Vid. Chap. 5. Sec. 3. of the Second Part.

PROP. LI. LEMMA .

If the Eye directly appraoch to or recede from an Object ; it shall be , as the Tangent of the Semioptick-Angle of one Station : to the Tangent of the Semioptick-Angle of t'other Station : : So ( reciprocally ) the Distance of the Eye from the Object in this latter Station : to the Distance of the Eye from the Object in the Former Station .

Tab. 35. f. 3. T. 32. F. 3. Let a b c be an Object , from whose middle Point c erect c e Perpendicular to a b. Let the first Station of the Eye be at e , and its second Station at d ; and draw a d , a e ; I say therefore , As c e : to c d : : so Tangent of the Angle a d c : to the Tangent of the Angle a e c.

Demonstration .

Produce c a infinitely towards z , draw e z parallel to a d. The Angle z e c is equal to the Angle a d c ( 29. 1. Eucl. ) then e c being put Radius , z c is the Tangent of the Angle z e c = a d c ; And a c is the Tangent of the Angle a e c. And it shall be , As c e : to c d : : so z c : to a c : ( 2. 6. Eucl. ) which was to be Demonstrated .

This is the 31 Prop. of Gregorii Opt. Promot . but there otherwise Demonstrated .

PROP. LII . LEMMA 2.

If the Eye directly approach to , or recede from an Object , its apparent Bigness increases or diminishes , at the Tangents of the Semioptick-Angles at one and t'other Station .

This is manifest , for the Eye at d ( Tab 35. f. 3. T. 35. F. 3. ) sees a c as big as the Eye at e would see z c , by Prop. XXVIII . Sec. 6. Because the Angles a d c , z e c are equal ; and Quae sub aequali Apparent Angulo , Aequalia videntur . So that the Eye advancing from e , to d , sees a c as much bigger , as if , continuing at e , the Object a c had increased to c z.

Corollary .

From this and the last Proposition it follows , that if the Eye directly approach to or recede from an Object , its apparent Magnitude increases or diminisheth , as the Distances of one and t other Station reciprocally , that is , the apparent Magnitude of a c to the Eye at d : is to the apparent Magnitude of a c to the Eye at e : : as c e : to c d.

PROP. LIII .

The apparent Diametral Magnitude of an Object viewed through the Telescope of Prop. L. Is to the apparent Diametral Magnitude of the Object viewed by the naked Eye at the Station of the Object-Glass : : As the Focal length of the Object-Glass : to the Focal length of the Eye-Glass .

This is the great Proposition asserted by most Dioptrick Writers , but hitherto proved by none ( for as much as I know ) they offer indeed Experiments and Methods of Tryal to confirm the Truth thereof , but proceed no farther .

Vid. Cherubin Diop . Oculaire Part. II. Prop. XXI . LIX . LX. LXII . Kepleri Dioptr. Prop. CXXIV . Galilei Nuncius Sidereus pag. 12. Edit. Lond. 1653. 8vo .

Honoratus Faber in his Synopsis Optica Prop. XLIV . for the Telescope consisting of a Convex Object Glass and Concave Eye-Glass ; and in Prop. XLV . for the Telescope consisting of a Convex Object-Glass and Convex Eye-Glass , indeavours at something , which he calls a Demonstration of this Property . But whether that which he there offers will amount to clear Satisfaction , I leave to their Judgements , who shall Read him .

Dechales in Prop. LIV. Lib. II. Dioptr. thinks this Proposition so far from Demonstrable , that he takes it to be False ; and says , He never met with any Demonstration thereof , that did not include manifest Paralogisms . Perhaps he may be right in this latter part of his Assertion ; but the Reason he gives for his concluding it a False Proposition is manifestly Weak and Erroneous : And that on the account of an inartificial kind of Notion and Method , that he takes for Explicating the Magnifying of Telescopes ; especially of the Telescope furnish'd with a Concave Eye-Glass , which he explains after his manner in Prop. LIII .

It were needless to inlarge in this matter , I shall therefore pass it over , and hasten to the Demonstration of this Proposition .

Tab. 35. f. 2. T. 35 F. 2. Let the Object-Glass x y z Project the Image of the Object A B C in the Distinct Base f e d , g h l is the Eye-Glass , h e the Focal length of the Eye-Glass , to which let e q be made equal . Draw h f , h d , and q f , q d. And let the Eye at o be placed in the Exteriour Focus of the Eye-Glass . The Rays y f g , y d l , are refracted by the Eye-Glass , and cross at o. Wherefore g o l is the Angle under which the Object appears through the Telescope . But the Angle g o l is equal to the Angle f h d ( as well by what foregoes in Prop. L. Sec. 3. & 5. as by Prop. XXXIV . ) And the Angle f h d is equal to the Angle f q d.

Wherefore were the naked Eye at y the Station of the Object-Glass , it would perceive the Object under the Angle f y d = a y c. But now being armed with the Telescope , it sees the Object under the Angle f q d. Let us take their halfs f y e , f q e ; and consider the Angle fe , half the Distinct Base , as the Object viewed by the naked Eye at the Stations y and q. I say ( by Lemma 2. ) The apparent bigness of the Object f e at the Station q : Is to its apparent bigness at the Station y : : As the Tangent of the Angle f q e : To the Tangent of the Angle f the e. But ( by Lemma 1. ) the Tangent of the Angle f q e : Is to the Tangent of the Angle f y e : : As e y : To e q. Therefore the apparent bigness of the Object f e at the Station q : Is to its apparent bigness at the Station y : : As e y : To e q : that is , As the Focal length of the Object-Glass : To the Focal length of the Eye-Glass . But the Angle g o h , under which the Eye sees half the Object through the Telescope , is equal to the Angle f h e or f q e. Therefore the apparent Diametral bigness of an Object viewed through a Telescope : Is to the apparent Diametral Magnitude of the Object viewed by the naked Eye at the Station of the Object-Glass : : As the Focal length of the Object-Glass : To the Focal length of the Eye-Glass . Which was to be Demonstrated .

The same may be declared otherwise . Thus ; Tab. 35. f. 2. T. 35. F. 2. Let us suppose the naked Eye at h to view the Object Inverted by means of the Distinct Base f e d ; The Inverted Object shall appear under the Angle f h d ( by Prop. XL. ) But the Eye at o through the Glass perceives the Inverted Image of the Object under the Angle g o l equal to f h d , ( by Prop. XXXIII . ) and f h d is equal to f q d , and consequently ( as in the foregoing Demonstration ) the Proposition is manifest .

I shall now mention the common Method for trying the Truth of this Proposition by Experiment . Having the Focal length of an Object-Glass ( for Instance ) 144 Inches , and the Focal length of an Eye-Glass three Inches . A Telescope composed of these , shall make the apparent Diamet●al Magnitude of an Object : To the apparent Magnitude of the same Object viewed by the naked Eye : : As 144 : To 3 : : or 48 : To 1. Wherefore , such a Glass is said to Magnifie 48 times in the Diameter of the Object , and 2304 ( = square of 48 ) in the Surface of the Object . The Superficies of like Figures being to each other , as the Squares of their Diameters , or Homologous Sides .

Wherefore from a convenient Scale take one part , and therewith describe a Circle ; And from the same Scale take 48 parts , and describe another Circle . Let these two Circles be cut out in Paper , or other Conspicuous Material , and placed at three or four Foot from each other , on a Wall at such a Distance as will require the length between the Glasses in the Telescope but just 147 ( = 144 + 3 ) Inches , to shew these Objects distinctly ; Then with one Eye through the Telescope observe the smaller Circle , and at the same time with t'other Eye naked look upon the greater Circle ; these two Circles shall appear equal to both Eyes .

Perhaps it may be objected , That the Comparison is not fair between both Appearances . For the Proposition supposes the naked Eye at the Station of the Object-Glass ; But this Experiment sets the naked Eye Distant from the Object-Glass the whole length of the Telescope . This would be a material Objection against this Method of Tryal , were not the Distance of the two Circles from the Eyes vastly greater than the length of the Telescope ; so that the Telescopes length may not bear any sensible Proportion thereto . And such we suppose it in this Experiment , by advertising that this Distance is to be so great , that the Distance between the Glasses may be no longer than for viewing a Distant Object , viz. the just Aggregate of the Focal lengths of the Glasses , that is , 144 + 3 = 147 Inches , that is , ye + eh = yh .

I shall now give an Example of a Calculation according to this Proposition . Wherefore in Tab. 35. f. 4. T. 35. F. 4. let us take the Moon ABC for our Distant Object ; and let us suppose its Diameter to subtend an Arch of a great Circle of Heaven of 30 ' Minutes . Let the Ray a y d proceed from its upper Limb , b y e from its Centre , c y f from its lower Limb. These cross in the Vertex y , or middle Point of the Object-Glass x y z ; making the Angle f y d = a y e , equal to 30 Minutes . Let the Focal length of the Object-Glass e y be given twelve Feet = 144 Inches , or 144,00 Parts : And the Focus of the Eye-Glass h e be given three Inches , or 3,00 such Parts . Let the Distinct Base , wherein the Image of the Moon is Projected by the Object-Glass be f e d , and draw f h , d h. It is shewn before that the Angle g o h is equal to the Angle f h e.

Wherefore in the Right-angled Triangle f e y , we have e y = 144,00 , and the Angle f y e = 15 ' , to find f e = 0,63 .

Then in the Right-angled Triangle f e h , we have h e = 3,00 , and f e = 0 , 63 , to find the Angle f h e = 11° 51 ' 40 " .

Wherefore the Semidiameter of the Moon , which by the naked Eye would be seen under the Angle of 15 ' Minutes , is seen through this Telescope under an Angle of 11° 51 ' 40 " .

Let us now enquire , whether the Object appearing under an Angle of 15° Minutes , and being afterwards made to appear under an Angle of 11° 51 ' 40 " , doth not thereby appear 48 times bigger than naturally . ( for so much , by what foregoes , does this Glass Magnifie ) .

And for shewing this , let us imagine f e increased 48 times its length 0 , 63 ; And then inquire what Angle f y e would be . Wherefore f e is now supposed = 30 , 24 = 48 times 0. 63 ; Then in the Right-angled Triangle f e y , we have f e = 30 , 24 , and e y = 144,00 , to find the Angle f y e = 11° 51 ' 40 " . Which shews that the Semidiameter of the Moon , being made by the Glass to appear under an Angle of 11° 51 ' 40 " , is seen by the Eye as big , as if the Semidiameter of the Moon it self were really increased 48 times , and viewed by the naked Eye . Which is the proposed Design of this Calculation .

Corollary 1.

From hence it follows , That the same Object-Glass being at one time combined with an Eye-Glass whose Focus is 1. And at another time with an Eye-Glass whose Focus is 2. The first Telescope Magnifies twice as much as the latter .

Corollary 2.

Supposing two Telescopes of different lengths ; If the Focus of the Eye-Glass of the shorter bears the same Proportion to the Focus of its Object-Glass , as the Focus of the Eye-Glass of the longer bears to its Object-Glass : These two Telescopes Magnifie equally .

And hereupon perhaps it may be enquired , To what end then is all the Pains and Trouble in forming and managing Telescopes of 30. 40. 50. 100. 200. 300 , &c. Feet ; When Objects may be Magnified as much by smaller Object-Glasses , or Object-Glasses of shorter Focal lengths , combined with Proportional Eye-Glases ?

I answer First , That Object-Glasses of a shorter Focus will not bear proportionably Eye-Glasses of such short Foci , without coloring the Object and rendring it dark , as Object-Glasses of longer Foci . For instance , let us suppose that an excellent Object-Glass of twelve Foot Focus will receive an Eye-Glass of no shorter a Focus than three Inches with Clearness and Distinctness . I say an Object Glass of 24 Foot Focus of the same Perfection shall receive an Eye-Glass of less than six Inches Focus with equal Clearness and Distinctness . And perhaps it may take an Eye-Glass of five or four Inches Focus . And then an Object-Glass of twelve Foot with an Eye-Glass of three Inches Magnifies but 48 times . But an Object-Glass of 24 Foot with an Eye-Glass of four Inches Magnifies 72 times , viz. ⅓ more than the former , which is a great Difference , and of vast Advantage , when it may be obtained with the same Clearness and Distinctness . I confess the longest Telescopes do generally render the Objects more Dark and Obscure , yet when shorter Glasses have proportionably as short Eye-Glasses , and as close Apertures , they are more Obscure , than the longer Telescopes .

I answer Secondly , That the Image of the Moon or other Object in the Distinct Base of an Object-Glass of 24 Foot is twice as long as the Image in the Distinct Base of an Object-Glass of twelve Foot . And consequently we shall not wonder , that the Picture in the former , should be much more Distinct and Perfect , than in the latter ; As 't is much more easie to represent every Feature and Line of a Face in a large Piece , than in a small Piece of Miniature .

Corollary 3.

And if the Object-Glass be formed on a less Sphere than the Eye-Glass ( as suppose the Object-Glass formed on a Sphere of six Inches Radius , and the Eye-Glass on a Sphere of twelve Inches Radius ) hereby the Appearance of the Object shall be Diminished . And the Appearance through the Glass shall be to the naked Appearance as six to twelve , or ½ the Natural Appearance .

Scholium .

From hence it is manifest , how requisite it is in relating any Phaenomena observed by the Telescope ( or even by the Microscope ) to mention not only the length of the Tube in general ; But to specifie the particular Focus of the Eye-Glass , as well as of the Object-Glass ; as also the Aperture of the Object-Glass . For by this means , they that intend to observe the same Phaenomena , may understand how to adapt their Telescopes proper for the Observation . This the Learned and Ingenious Monsieur Hugens in his Systema Saturnium puts down exactly , pag. 4. Where also we find this Passage . Illud in Dioptricis Nostris Demonstratum invenietur , Speciei per Tubum visae ad eam quae Nudo Oculo percipitur , hane secundum Diametrum esse Rationem , quae Distantiae Foci in Exteriori vitro ( Objectivo Scilicet ) ad illam quae in Interiori sive Oculari vitro est Foci Distantiam . But hitherto we are so unhappy as to want that excellent Persons Dioptricks . In the mean time , let that which I have given in the foregoing Prop. LIII . serve till a better be offered .

PROP. LIV. PROBL.

To Determine the Angle received by a Telescope of the foregoing Combination . The Rule is , as the Distance between the Object-Glass and Eye-Glass : To half the Breadth of the Eye-Glass : : So Radius : To the Tangent of half the Angle received .

Tab. 25. f. 2. T. 35. F. 2. The Distance of the Glasses is h y. Let half the Breadth of the Eye-Glass be g h. Then , as h y : To g h : : So Radius : To the Tangent of the Angle g y h , which is half the Angle g y l , the Angle received . That is , the Eye at o shall perceive no more of the Object , than subtends this Angle before the Object-Glass .

Scholium 1.

But if the Eye Approach nigher to , or recede further from the Eye-Glass g h l ( Tab. 35. f. 1. T. 35. F. 1. ) than its Focus at o , it shall perceive a lesser Area of the Object , though what it sees shall be as Distinct as at o. For let us suppose the Pupil of the Eye at m ; The Rays g o , l o , do not enter the Eye , and consequently the Points in the Object answerable to f , d , in the Distinct Base , shall not be visible . The same may be conceived if the Eye recede farther from the Eye-Glass than o ; because all the Rays from the several Points in the Object are mixt together , and intersect at o , in the Focus of the Eye-Glass , and thence flowing forward they separate and Diverge . But then the Eye at m receives the Rays , that do enter it , Parallel or at least a very little Diverging ; and consequently the Vision is Distinct.

Scholium . 2.

From hence also 't is manifest , that the Angle received , or Visible Area of the Object , is not increased or diminished , by the greater or lesser Aperture of the Object-Glass . For the Angle g y l continues the same , though the Object-Glass were all covered to the very middle Point y. All that is effected by this greater or lesser Aperture is the more Bright or Obscure Appea●ance of the Object . But of this more fully in the next Proposition .

PROP. LV.

Concerning the Apertures of Object Glasses .

By the Aperture of a Glass I mean , that part of the Glass which is left open and uncovered . And this ought to be various according as we would have more or less Light admitted . It also varies according to the various Focal lengths of the Object-Glasses . For a ten Foot Object-Glass shall bear a greater Aperture than an Object-Glass of one Foot ; and a twenty Foot Glass yet greater than a ten Foot Glass .

But at what Rate or Proportion the Apertures of Glasses alter in respect of their lengths , is not yet well setled .

Monsieur Auzout , ( Phil. Transact . N. 4. P. 55. ) Tells us , that he finds , That the Apertures , which Glasses can bear with Distinctness , are in ( about ) a Subduplicate Ratio to their lengths : Or as the Square Roots of their lengths . Whereof he intends to give the Reason and Demonstration in his Dioptrica ( which we yet want . ) But this Ingenious Person should have told us , when he speaks of the Apertures of Glasses , whether he designs them for Objects on the Earth or in the Heavens . And if in this latter , whether for the Moon , Mars , Iupiter , or Venus . For each of these Objects will require a different Aperture of the same Glass . Because the Strength of their Light is different . For to view Venus there is requisite a much smaller Aperture , than to view the Moon , Saturn or Iupiter .

However till some better Rule can be found for settling the Apertures of Object-Glasses ( which at present I shall not pretend to ) I shall here Present you with Mr. Auzout's Table , as 't is to be found in the fore-cited Philosophical Transaction , Numb . 4. Noting only , that his Feet are Parisian Feet ( which is to the London Foot as 1068 : to 1000 ) and each Inch ( which is the 112 part of his Foot ) is subdivided into twelve Lines . For it had not been worth our Pains to have reduced the whole Table to our English Measure . Vid. Tab. 36.

ATABLEoftheAperturesofObiect-Glasses▪ThePointsputtosomeoftheseNumbersdenoteFractions. Length of Glasses . For Excellent ones . For good ones . For ordinary ones . Feet . Inchs Inch. Lines Inch. Lines . Inch. Lines . 4 4 4 3 6 5 5 4 9 7 6 5 0 8 7 6 1 6 9 8 7 2 0 11 10 8 2 6 1 0 11 9 3 0 1 1 1 0 10 3 0 1 2 1 1 11 4 0 1 4 1 2 1 0 4 6 1 5 1 3 1 5 0 1 6 1 4 1 1. 6 1 7 1 5 1 2 7 1 9 1 6 1 3 8 1 10 1 8 1 4 9 1 11. 1 9 1 5 10 2 1 1 10 1 6 12 2 4 2 0 1 8 14 2 6 2 2 1 9. 16 2 8 2 4 1 11. 18 2 10 2 6 2 1 20 3 0 2 7 2 2. 25 3 4 2 10 2 4. 30 3 8 3 2 2 7 35 4 0 3 4 2 10 40 4 3 3 7 3 ▪ 45 4 6 3 10 3 2. 50 4 9 4 0 3 4. 55 5 0 4 3 3 6. 60 5 2 4 6 3 8. 65 5 4 4 8 3 10 70 5 7 4 10 3 ▪ 75 5 9 5 0 4 2. 80 5 11 5 2 4 5 90 6 4 5 6 4 7. 100 6 8 5 9 4 10 120 7 5 6 5 5 3 150 8 0 7 0 5 11 200 9 6 8 0 6 9 250 10 6 9 2 7 8. 300 11 6 10 0 8 5 350 12 61 10 9 0 0 400 13 4 11 6 9 8

The feet here expres'd are Paris-feet , and a Line is the 112 part thereof . The Paris-Foot is to the London-foot as 1068 to 1000

Tab. 36. pag. 170

We have the exact Natural Resemblance hereof in the Eye it self : whose Pupil is contracted and dilated , according as the Light of an Object is more or less Intense .

Another Particular , wherein this Contraction or Dilatation of a Glasses Aperture is requisite , is this : An Object may be so nigh a Glass that the Rays from each single Point , falling upon the whole Breadth of the Glass , may Diverge so much that the Glass is not able to Correct the Divergence of those Rays that fall towards its outward Borders , so as to reduce them to Determine or Unite in the Distinct Base with those Rays , that fall nigher the middle of the Glass ( as before is noted after Prop. III. ) And then 't is requisite to contract the Aperture of the Glass , so as to exclude these Exorbitant Rays . A notable Experiment of this we may make by holding a Minute Object very nigh the Pupil of the Eye , the Object shall appear very Confused . But by applying a Paper with a small Pin-hole before the Pupil , it shall reduce the Appearance to much more Distinctness than before .

PROP. LVI .

The Telescope Consisting of a Convex Object-Glass , and Three Convex Eye-Glasses is Explained .

I have shewn in Prop. L. &c. the Nature and Properties of the Telescope consisting of a Convex Object-Glass , and Convex Eye-Glass . I have shewn how the Image of the Object being formed in the Distinct Base of the Object-Glass x y z ( Tab. 35. f. 1. T. 35 F. 1 ▪ ) by the Rays from each single Point of the Object there uniting , and flowing forward on the Eye-Glass , are thereby all collected together and confounded in its outward Focus at o

Now ( in Tab. 37. Fig. 1. T. 37. F. 1. ) Let us Combine two other Eye-Glasses k , l , with the said Telescope of Prop. L. And place them so , that the Distance between the first Eye-Glass ● , and the second Eye-Glass k , may be the sum of their Foci . Also that the Distance between the second Eye-Glass k , and the third Eye-Glass l , may be likewise the sum of their Foci . So that all the Glasses are Distant from the next adjacent Glasses , the sum of their Foci . Only here it may be noted , that to cause Distinct Vision through this Telescope , 't is not absolutely necessary that the second Eye-Glass k be exactly Distant from the Focus ●o of the first Eye-Glass h , the just length of its own Focus ; For it may be more or less ; but then the Visible Area , and Magnified Appearance of the Object shall be altered . As will be manifest after we have explained this Glass to those that consider it .

Or otherwise . We may conceive the Glass k to be the Crystalline of the Eye , looking through the Telescope of Prop. L. h y. And as the Crystalline in that Case does by means of the Glass h form in its Focus on the Retina the Image of the Distinct Base f e d ; So may we imagine the Glass k to form in its Focus g man , by means of the Glass h , the Image of the Distinct Base f e d.

Then from the second Distinct Base g m n the Rays proceed as is expressed in the Scheme , and fall on the third Eye Glass l ; By whose means we may imagine the Distinct Base g m n projected distinctly on the Retina of the Eye r s t , in the same manner as is shewn before in the Telescope of Prop. L.

And here we may observe that the Image on the Retina r s t is Inverted , therefore the Object shall appear Erect . Prop. XXVIII . Sec. 4 , 5.

And we may conceive this sort of Telescope as a double Telescope of Prop. L. For the Glasses h , y , make one Telescope ; And the Glasses k , l , an other . And as the former by it self Inverts the Object ; so the latter with the former Reverts the Inverted Image ; and consequently makes the Object appear Erect . Yet it has been lately Publish'd in the Iournal des Scavans 17. Sept. 1685. as a very difficult Problem in Dioptricks , why four Glasses in this kind of Telescope represent Objects Erect ? I think I have solved this Problem to satisfaction , and my Answer is Publish'd Num 187. of the London Philosophical Transactions . As also in the Bibliotheque Universelle & Historique de l'Annee 1688. Tome 3. pag. 329. But the Learned Author of this latter in his Translation has mistaken my Sense in one Particular . I shall therefore give it here again in the Second Part of this Work Chap. 2.

Dioptrick Problem solved in the Second Part of this Treatise Chap. 2. Concerning the Magnifying Power of this Telescope ; our Prop. L. will direct us how to Calculate it . For by that Proposition 't is manifest , that if the several Eye-Glasses h , k , l , be of equal Foci , and the Distance between h and k be the sum of both their Foci , that then the apparent Diametral Magnitude of an Object through the Glass , is to the Diametral Magnitude viewed by the naked Eye , as the Focus of the Object-Glass , to the Focus of any one of the Eye-Glasses . But if the Foci of the Eye-Glass h , k , l , be different , or the Distance between h and k different from the sum of their Foci , then to obtain the magnified Appearance , we must have Recourse to Calculation . Wherein the Cases are so very various , that to insist on them all would be very tedious , and infinitely laborious . For the Focus of h may be greater , equal , or less than of k or of l ; and so of k than of l or h ; and so of l than of k or h ; As likewise the Distance between k and h may be infinitely varied . I shall therefore pass this over ; A little Consideration of the several Varieties will make any of them plain , and shew how they may be easily Calculated by those versed in the foregoing Doctrine . For 't is but considering , how the Distinct Base g m n is Projected , whether equal to , greater or less than the Distinct Base f e d ; And how the Eye-Glass ● conveys this Distinct Base g m n to the Eye .

In like manner , by Prop. LIV. may the Angle received , or Visible Area of an Object through this kind of double Telescope , be Determined , as in the single Telescope ; Respect being had to the several Apertures , Foci , and Distances of the several Eye-Glasses h , k , l.

Scholium .

From the Explication of this kind of Telescope , and of that in Prop. L. may we easily apprehend the Theories of the various Combinations of Convex-Glasses in the Compositions of divers Telescopes of 3 , 4 , 5 , 6 , 7 , 8 , &c. Glasses .

Wherefore in explaining any kind of Telescope , we are first to obtain ( by some Practical Rules to be deliver'd hereafter Part II. Chap. 4. Sec. 3. the Focal length of each particular Glass by it self . Then we are to consider the Distances of each of these Glasses ( as they lye in the Tube ) from the Glasses before and behind it . Afterwards we are to consider , where the Distinct Base , or Distinct Bases are formed by these several Glasses , and how they are Projected as to Amplification or Diminution , which is easily found by the Doctrine before delivered . And then how the Eye-Glasses affect these Distinct Bases ; As how they Confound them , Rectifie them , Invert or Magnifie them .

For the Result of all is this , that the Rays from the several Images in the several Distinct Bases , shall be Confounded on the Pupil of the Eye , in order to be rectified by the Crystalline , which ( as has often been intimated ) we may consider as a Convex-Glass , whose Focus is on the Retina . And from a due Consideration of the Premisses , it will appear why some Telescopes consisting of Convex-Glasses represent the Object Erect , others Inverted ; in some one Glass is to be taken as one , in others two Glasses perform the Effect but of one .

And thus all the Combinations of Glasses expressed in the 8 , 9 , 10 , 11 , 12. Iconismes of Zahn Telescop . Fund . 2. Syntag. 3. Cap. 6 , 7 , 8 , 9. are easily explained , with a thousand other Varieties .

PROP. LVII .

The Telescope Compased of a Concave Eye-Glass , and Convex Object-Glass of a larger Sphere is Explain'd .

The Posture of the Glasses in this Telescope is this ; The Distance of the Glasses is to be the Difference of their Foci , that is , the Concave Eye-Glass is to be placed so much nigher the Object-Glass than the Focal length of this Object-Glass , as is the virtual Focus of this Eye-Glass . And the Eye is to be placed as nigh the Eye-Glass as possible .

Note . I shall call the virtual Focus of the Concave , simply its Focus , it being well known that a Concave has no other Focus , but a virtual Focus .

I shall now shew , that through this Glass the Object appears Distinct , Erect , and Magnify'd . And shall shew the Angle received or visible Area , according to the several Postures of the Eye .

Only premising in this Proposition ( as I have done in several former ) that we suppose the Glasses of the least thickness imaginable ; and especially the Concave-Glass in its middle Point is supposed of no thickness at all , but the two Surfaces to touch .

To explain this Glass the better , I shall express the Figure very large , Tab. 37. f. 2. T 37. F 2 Wherein we shall first consider the Telescope it self separate from the Eye . Wherefore , let some Distant Object ( as suppose a Cross ) send the Rays a a a from its upper Point , b b b from its middle Point , and c c c from its lower Point . These falling on the Object-Glass x y z are formed thereby into the Distinct Base f e d. Let now the Concave-Glass g h l , be placed between the Distinct Base f e d , and the Object-Glass x y z , so far distant from the Distinct Base , as is the Focus of this Concave ; that is , let e h be the virtual Focus of the Concave Eye-Glass . Then the Rays ( for Instance ) from the middle Point , x i , y h , z k , falling on the Concave and Converging towards its Focus e , after passing the Glass become Parallel ( Corol. Prop. XIII . ) and run onwards in i m , h e , k n. The same may be conceived of the Rays from the Collateral Points ; which Converge towards the Focus in f and d ; viz that these also after passing the Concave Eye-Glass , do proceed onwards Parallel amongst themselves .

But concerning these Rays from the Collateral Points , we must not also ; That , as it is shewn before in Prop. L. Sec. 3 , 4. Concerning the Convex Eye-Glass g h l ( Tab. 35. f. 1. T 35. F. 1. ) that it brings the Rays of the Collateral Points f g , d l , Parallel amongst themselves into its Focus at o. So the Concave Eye-Glass g h l ( Tab. 37. f. 2. T. 37. F. 2. ) for the same Reasons expressed before in Prop. L. Sec. 3 , 4. Mutatis Mutandis , makes the several parcels of Rays from the Collateral Points , after passing it , to Diverge , as if they proceeded directly , from the Point p ; p h and he being equal , and each equal to the Focal length of the Concave Eye-Glass . These things being fully considered ; we proceed in the Explication of this Telescope . And therefore now let us apply the Eye thereto ; And this also in a large Figure , Tab. 37. f. 3. T. 37. F. 3.

I say first , the Object appears through this Glass Distinct ; For by what foregoes the Rays from each single Point , do fall on the Eye Parallel amongst themselves ; And therefore each Point ( by Pr. XXVIII . ) is distinctly represen●ed on the Fund of the Eye .

I say secondly , the Object appears Erect . For 't is manifest by the Inspection only of the Scheme , that the Rays flowing from the lower Point of the Object , are Terminated at t the upper Part of the Retina . And the Rays from the upper Point of the Object are Terminated at r the lower Part of the Retina . So that the Image is painted inverted on the Retina . And therefore by Prop. XXVIII . the Object appears Erect .

I say lastly , the Object is Magnified by this Glass . For the Proof of this we are to remember , what foregoes in Prop. XXXVII . 'T is there declared , that if an Object be Projected by a Convex-Glass x y z ( Tab. 37. f. 2. T. 37. F. 2. ) in the Distinct Base f e d ; And the Eye be placed any where between the Glass and the Distinct Base , as suppose at h , draw f h , d h , and the Object appears under the Angle f h d , which is much greater than f y d , the natural Optick-Angle . The same will hold , though we interpose the Concave-Glass g l ; for the Ray x g from the Objects lower Point , that runs Parallel to the Axis b y h e , is Refracted into g t , as if it came directly from the Point p. And so the Ray z l from the Objects upper Point , that runs Parallel to the Axis b y h e is Refracted into l r , as if it came directly from the same Point p. If therefore we suppose the Rays x g f , z l d , Parallel to the Axis ; then g l shall be equal to f d ; And p h being by Supposition equal to h e , p g t shall be Parallel to h f ; And p l r shall be Parallel to h d. And consequently the Angle g p l shall be equal to the Angle f h d. Wherefore the Object through this Glass appears under the same Angle , as we may imagine the Apices of the Pencils f , d , would appear to the naked Eye at h ( the Concave Eye-Glass being removed ) And consequently the Object appears Magnified .

The Visible Area , or Angle Received by this Glass , is Determined by the Aperture or Breadth of the Eyes Pupil . For 't is manifest , from Tab. 37. f. 3. T ▪ 37. F. 3 That if the Pupil d e of the Eye were not large enough to receive the Rays from the extreme Points of the Object , it would not perceive the whole Object through this Glass . Wherefore by the Breadth of the Pupil given , as also by the Focal Distances of the Object-Glass and Eye-Glass being given , we may easily obtain the Visible Area , or Angle Received . For let us suppose that we find from these Data , that the whole Object Projecting the Distinct Base f e d ( Tab. 37. f. 2. T 37 F 2 ) would be Projected in the breadth of the Pupil , at the Distance h y from the Object-Glass . Then find the Angle f y d ( as is easie from these Data , and the preceding Doctrine ) and we have the Angle Received .

Corollary 1.

In the XXXI . Prop. Sec. 9. We have considered the Locus Apparens of an Object , Projected in the Distinct Base by a Convex-Glass , to the Eye placed between the Glass and Distinct Base . And if the Affirmative of the Quere , which I there propose , hold true ; The Locus Apparens of the middle Point of the Object seen through the Glass of Tab. 37. f. 2. T. 3● . F. 2. is at p.

Corollary 2.

If we suppose a Convex Eye-Glass , whose Focal length is equal to the Focal length p h or e h of this Concave Eye-Glass , apply'd ( as directed in Prop. L. ) to this same Object-Glass x y z in Tab. 37. f. 2. It would magnifie the Object equally with this Concave : And from hence it follows , that the preceding Proposition LIII . concerning the Magnifying of a Telescope , may be apply'd to this sort of Telescope furnished with a Concave Eye-Glass . But then the Advantage of the Telescope in Prop. L. beyond that of this Proposition , is most signal in this particular , That it receives a very much greater Angle , or shews to the Eye a much greater Area of the Object . The Area in this being Determined by the breadth of the Convex Eye-Glass ; But in that of a Concave Eye-Glass , the Area is proportioned to the breadth of the Pupil .

Corollary 3.

If the Eye recede from the Concave Eye-Glass of this Proposition , it perceives not so great a space of the Object . This is manifest only by Inspection of the two Schemes ( Fig. 2 , and 3. Tab. 37. T. 37. F. 2 , 3. ) For if the Breadth of the Pupil d e , be but just sufficient to receive the Rays from the extreme Points of the Object , after they have passed the Eye-Glass , and are thereby so much Divaricated ; if the Eye recede , the Pupil shall not be broad enough ; and consequently shall see less of the Object . Just as in the Telescope of Prop. L.

Corollary 4.

If the Eye move upwards or downwards , or to one side , or t'other of the Eye-Glass ( supposing the Eye-Glass much broader than the Pupil ) it perceives consecutively different parts of the Object . Thus suppose in Fig. 2. Tab. 37. T. 37. F. 2. The Pupil placed before the middle of the Eye-Glass at h , and not broad enough to receive the Rays from the upper and lower parts of the Object : If the Eye move upwards , it will meet with the Rays g t from the lower Point of the Object , which before escaped it ; and so moving downwards it meets the Rays l r from the upper parts of the Object .

Of MICROSCOPES .

Hitherto of single Glasses , and of Glasses combined for viewing Distant Objects . We come now to treat of Glasses for viewing minute and nigh Objects , commonly called Microscopes . The Theory of these does so depend on what foregoes , that we shall have no occasion of insisting long upon them .

As to double Microscopes , or Microscopes consisting of more than one Convex-Glass , wherein the Object is Projected in a Distinct Base , before it be conveyed to the Eye ; I explain them as follows , observing the Series of the Propositions .

PROP. LVIII .

The double Microscope composed of a Convex Object Glass , and Convex Eye-Glass is Explained .

Tab. 38. Fig. 1. T. 38. F ▪ 1. Let a b be a minute nigh Object exposed before the Object-Glass x y z , the Segment of a very small Sphere . Let the Focus of this Object-Glass be at p. Then the Object being something more distant from the Glass , than its Focal length y p , shall be Projec●ed in the Distinct Base f d , somewhere on t'other side the Glass , according to the Doctrine before delivered Prop. V. And of what bigness the Image shall be Projected in the Distinct Base is determined by Prop. XXVI . Let the Eye-Glass l g be placed so far distant from the Distinct Base f d , as is the Focal length of this Eye-Glass ; And the Eye o r t placed where this Eye-Glass confounds all the Rays g o , l o , which shall be about the Focus of the Eye Glass .

All things being thus combined , The Effects of this Microscope are explained in all things , as in the Telescope of Prop. L. As to the Magnified , Inverted , and Distinct Appearance of the Object . And therefore 't is needless to inlarge farther thereon : To those versed in what is already delivered , the very Inspection of the Scheme is sufficient .

Only as to the extraordinary Magnifying of these Microscopes , we may farther Remark ; that whereas for viewing a Minute Object , a well-constituted Eye does usually Approach thereto about the distance of eight Inches : could we approach the Eye thereto , and view it distinctly at the distance of half an Inch , the Optick-Angle would be wonderfully magnify'd by Prop. LI , LII . that is to say , the apparent Magnitude of the Object would be increased at the rate of sixteen to one . Let us then suppose the Eye at y , viewing the Object a b , which would then appear under the Angle a y b equal to d y f ; which is the same as were the Object increased to the bigness d f , and viewed by the Eye at the same distance from it as y in the figure is now removed from d f. Wherefore if by help of the Eye-Glass g l , the Eye can yet approach to the Distinct Base d f ( which we may now repute the real Object ) suppose ten times nigher than y is to d f ; the apparent Magnitude of d f shall again be increased ten times more than before , by the nigh approach of the Eye ( suppose at y ) : that is , the Object by all these helps shall be magnified 160 times in length , or Diametral Magnitude .

As to the Calculation of all these Angles , and apparent Magnitudes , it cannot be difficult to those vers'd in what is before deliver'd .

There are various Combinations of Glasses in this kind of double Microscopes ; for in some there are two Object-Glasses , that is to say , one Object-Glass of a very deep Convexity , and an other of a lesser Convexity , placed nigher the former than the Projection of the Distinct Base ( according to Schol. 1. Prop. XVI . ) which sometimes is called a Middle-Glass . In others there are two Eye-Glasses , &c. But the Theory of all these depends on , and is so manifest from what has been delivered , that 't is needless to enlarge .

I shall conclude the First Part of this Treatise with a Piece of Dioptricks , which though Ludicrous affords an Appearance surprising and pleasant enough . The Explication thereof is much labourd at by several , though it be very Obvious from what foregoes . 'T is this ,

PROP. LIX .

The Explication of the Magick Lantern , sometimes called Lanterna Megalographica .

The Contrivance is briefly this , Tab. 38. f. 2. T. 38. F. 2. A B C D is a Tin Lantern , from whose side there proceeds a square or round Arm or Tube b n k c m l , consisting of two Parts , the outermost whereof n k m l slides over the other , so as that the whole Tube may be lengthened or shortened thereby . In the end of the Arm n k m l is fixt a Convex-Glass k l : about d e there is a Contrivance for admitting and placing an Object d e painted in dilute and transparent Colours on a pain thin Glass ; which Object is there to be placed Inverted . This is usually some Ludicrous or frightful Representation , the more to divert the Spectators : b h c is a deep Convex-Glass , so placed in the other end of the Prominent Tube , that it may strongly cast the light of the Flame a on the Picture d e painted on the plain thin Glass . And here 't is to be noted , that the Glass b h c is only designed for the strong Illumination of the Picture d e , and has nothing to do in the Representation , and therefore in some of these Lanterns , instead of the Glass b h c , we shall find a Concave-Speculum so placed , that it may strongly cast the light of the Flame a on the Picture at d e.

Wherefore , Let us now consider the Picture d e as a very lightsome Object of distinct Colours and Parts . And let us conceive d e more remote from the Glass k l than its Focus . 'T is then manifest , that the Distinct Image of the Object d e shall be projec●ed by the Glass k l on the opposite white Wall F H at f g ; And here it shall be represented Erect . For now the whole Chamber E F G H is dark , the Lantern A B C D inclosing all the Light ; So that in Effect this Appearance of the Magick Lantern is no more than what is already declared concerning the Representation of outward Objects in a dark Room by a Convex Glass , after Prop. IV. ( vid. Tab. 14. f. 1. ) And here we may observe , that if the Tube be Contracted , and thereby the Glass k l brought nigher the Object d e ; the Representation f g shall be Projected so much the larger ; and so much the more Distant from the Glass k l ; according to the Rules before laid down . So that the smallest Picture at d e may be Projected at f g in any greater Proportion required , within due limits . From whence the Name of Lanterna Megalographica . And consequently , protracting the Tube and drawing the Glass k l more distant from the Object d e , will diminish the Representation f g , and Project it nigher the Glass k l.

As to the M●chanick Contrivance of this Lantern , the most convenient Proportion of the Glasses , &c. This is so ordinary amongst the common Glass-Grinders , that 't is needless to insist farther thereon in this place . 'T is sufficient to me that I have explained the Theory thereof .

Scholium .

On this depends the Theory of the Optick Experiment propos'd by Mr. Hook Num. 38. Pag. 741. Philosoph . Transact . For representing strange Visions and Appearances .

The End of the First Part.

DIOPTRICKS . THE SECOND PART Containing Various Dioptrick Miscellanies .

THE CONTENTS . Chap. 1. Of Refraction and Light . Pag. 191 Chap. 2. A Dioptrick Problem . Pag. 203 Chap. 3. Of Glasses for defective Eyes . Pag. 207 Chap. 4. Of Mechanick Dioptricks . Pag. 214 Chap. 5. Of Telescopick Instruments . Pag. 228 Chap. 6. Of the Invention of Optick-Glasses , Discoveries made by them , and other Applications of them . Pag. 251 Chap. 7. An Optick Problem of Double Vision . Pag. 287 Chap. 8. An Appendix . Pag. 295

To My esteemed Friend Henry Osborn OF Dardys-Town in the County of Meath ESQUIRE .

THE Respect which I have ever had for you since our first Acquaintance , and which on all Occasions I have expressed in private , I have now an Opportunity of declaring to the Publick : And that too so very apposite , that it would be unpardonable in me to omit it at this time ; by presenting the following Sheets to you , Dedicating them to your Name , and Devoting them and their Author to your Vse and Service .

You may well remember the frequent Discourses we have had on several Subjects treated of in the following Chapters , and on account whereof I first set on this Dioptrical Work : And particularly , I think , our Disquisitions concerning the Iustness of Telescopick Sights adapted to Astronomical Instruments , and our Considerations of the Micrometer , were the first Occasion of my Thoughts turning this Way ; And therefore the ensuing Discourses belong to you of Right . But if to this I add , the Advantage I have received by your Acquaintance , and the repeated Satisfaction I have had in your agreable Conversation ; I am bound by indispensible Tyes to make this Acknowledgment .

I cannot but admire your prudent Choice of a private , retired Life ; notwithstanding your great Advantages both of Nature and Fortune , that render you capable of the most publick and weighty Imploy . By this Course , you have an Opportunity of enjoying your self , and improving your Philosophical Thoughts beyond the common pitch : You can look on unconcern'd , and securely observe the froathy Sea of Business , wherein Men fluctuate ; and some are shipwreckt , sink , and perish .

And because you seem careless of propagating your Name the common ways ; suffer me to erect this slight Monument to it : Though I am certain at the same time , that , if you pleased , you may raise a lasting Mausolaeum to your Memory ; but you seem above these Desires ; yet you 'll permit your Friend to Honour it as far as he can ; and if the Materials or Workmanship do not seem to promise a long Duration to Posterity , this only reflects on my Abilities , ( which I shall never vindicate ) but cannot lessen the sincere Intention of

Your most affectionate Humble Servant , WILL . MOLYNEUX . April 17. 1690.

DIOPTRICKS PART II. CHAP ▪ I. Of Refraction and Light .

( 1. ) This Discourse promised . ( 2. ) Leibnutz's Universal Principle in Opticks , &c. ( 3. ) On Occasion whereof ; Of Final Causes . ( 4. ) Farther Explication of Refraction . ( 5. ) Light a Body , from several Arguments . ( 6. ) From its being resisted in its passage through Diaphanous Mediums . ( 7. ) It s Requiring time to move from place to place . ( 8. ) Impossible to be increased , but by robbing some other Place of its Light . ( 9. ) Therefore impossible to be augmented uniformly .

1 1 This Discourse promised . IN the second Experiment of Part I. I had occasion to mention the Natural Cause of Refraction ; or why the Rays of Light passing through different Mediums are refracted at their Immersion or Emersion . I then avoided any farther enquiry into the reason thereof , as being more of a Physical than Mathematical Consideration . But at the same time , I promised a farther Disquisition thereon , to be borrowed from a most Learned Author ; whose reason we shall find briefly comprehended in this , That the Different Resistance that a Ray of Light finds in passing ( for instance ) through Air and Glass , is the cause , why 't is bent from its direct Course . But how this Refraction comes to be from the Perpendicular , in proceeding from a Dense to a more Rare Medium ; or towards the Perpendicular , when from a Rare to a more Dense Medium ; we shall more fully apprehend by the Discourse it self , which I here subjoyn from the Acta Erud . Lipsiae , Ann. 1682. pag. 185.

2 2 Leibnutz universal Principle in Opticks . One Universal Principle of Opticks , Catoptricks , and Dioptricks . By the Learned and Ingenious G. G. Leibnutzius .

The chief Hypothesis common to all these Sciences , and by which the Progress of all Rays of Light is geometrically determined , may be thus laid down . Light proceeds from the Radiating Point , to the Point to be enlightned , that way , which is of all the most easie ; and this is first to be Determined in respect to plain Surfaces , and then is accommodated to Concave or Convex Surfaces , by considering the Planes , that are Tangents to these Surfaces . But here I take no notice of some Irregularities , which perhaps may conduce to the Generation of Colours , and to some other extraordinary Phoenomena , which in practical Opticks are not at all considered .

Hence , In plain or simple Opticks , Tab. 38. Fig. 3. The direct Ray proceeds from the Radiating Point C , to the Point to be illustrated E , by the shortest direct way , the same Medium continuing all along , that is , in the Right Line C E.

In Catoptricks the Angle of Incidence C E A , and of Reflection D E B are equal . Let C be a Radiating Point ; D the Point to be illustrated , and A B a Plain Speculum : 'T is required to find in the Speculum the Point E , that reflects the Ray to D. I say , that it shall be such a Point , that the whole Progress , Way or Journey of the Ray C E + E D , may be the least or shortest , that is possible ; or less than C F + F D , supposing that we take any other Point F in the Speculum . And this shall be obtained , if E be taken such , that the Angles C E A , D E B , may be equal ; as is manifest from Geometry . Tab. 38. Fig. 4. T. 38. F. 4. Produce D E to Z , and joyn F Z.

Then A Z = ( D B = ) A C. And F Z = F C.

Therefore C E + E D ( = D Z ) is less than C F or F Z + F D.

Ptolomy and other Antients insist on this Demonstration ; and 't is extant both elsewhere , T. 38 F. 3. and also in Heliodorus Larissaeus .

In Dioptricks , * * Here I translate according to the 2 , 4. Definit . of Part I and not according to the Author . The Sines E H , E L , of the Angles of Incidence C E I , and Refracted Angle G E K are to each other reciprocally as the Resistances of the Mediums . Let I E be Air , and E K Water , Glass , or any other Diaphanous Medium more Dense than Air , C a Radiating Point in the Air , G the Point to be illustrated under the Glass : 'T is inquired , by what Way or Path shall C radiate to G ; or 't is required to determine , in the Surface of the Glass A B , the Point E , which refracting the Ray that comes from C , sends it to G. Here this Point E must be taken such , that the Way , which the Ray takes , may be of all ways the easiest . But now in different Mediums , the Difficulties of the Way or Progress are in a Ratioo compounded of the Length of the Way , and of the Resistance of the Mediums . Let the Right Line m represent the Resistance that Light finds in its passage through Air , and n the Resistance of its Passage through Glass : The Difficulty of the Way from C to E shall be as the Rectangle under C E and m ; and from E TO G as the Rectangle under E G and n. Therefore that the Difficulty of the whole Way C E G may be the least possible , the Sum of the Rectangles C E * m + E G * n ought to be the least of all possible ; or less than C F * m + F G * n , supposing any other Point F taken besides E. The Point E is now required . Wherefore , seeing the Points C and G , and also the Right Line A B are given by Position , therefore the Lines C H , G L , Perpendiculars to the Plain A B , and the Line H L , are given also . Let us call C H , c , and G L , g , and H L , b ; but the sought Line E H , let us call y ; then E L shall be h − y , and C E shall be : c c + y y , which we shall call p ; and E G shall be : g g + y y − 2 h y + h h , which we shall call q.

Wherefore m * c c + y y : + n * : g g + y y − 2 h y + h h ( or m p + + n q ) ought to be the least of all those Quantities that can possibly be so expressed ; and 't is required to determine y , that so it may be . By my Method De Maximis & Minimis ( Vid. Act. Lips . Ann. 1684. pag. 467. 472. ) which , beyond all that are hitherto known , does wonderfully shorten the Calculation , it is manifest at the first sight , almost without any Calculation , That m q y shall be equal to n p * h − y , or that n p. m q : : y. h − y , that is , the Rectangle of C E − n shall be the to Rectangle of E G * m : : As E H to E L. Therefore C E and E G being put equal , n the Resistance of Glass to Light shall be to m the Resistance of Air to Light : : As E H the Sine of the Angle of Incidence in Air C E I : To E L the Sine of the Refracted Angle in Glass G E K. Or these Sines shall be to each other reciprocally as the Resistances of the Mediums . Which was the Assertion to be proved .

Wherefore , if in one Example or Experiment E L be found ⅔ of E H , the same Proportion shall hold in all other Experiments , wherever C and G be taken , that in Air , this in Glass . If C be in Air , and G in Water , Experiment shews , that E L shall be about ¾ of E H.

Thus far this ingenious Author . The rest of his Discourse is chiefly employed in rectifying Des-Cartes Notion of Refraction , Des. Cart. Notion of Refraction rectified . which tho founded on the same Principle here expressed , yet has this peculiar , that he makes Water , or Glass , or any other more Dense Medium , resist the Progress of Light less than Air. But in this particular he is abundantly rectified by Leibnutzius , who shews the Incongruity of that Supposition .

( 3. ) One thing more there is remarkable in the Learned Leibnutzius Discourse , which I cannot here pass over , and that is , A pious Reflection which he makes on this occasion , concerning Final Causes . R●mar on Fina● Causes . For 't is manifest , that the Ray proceeding from C , does not consult with it self , how it may with the greatest ease arrive at the Point E , or D , or G ; neither is it carried by it self to those Points . But the Great Creator of all things , has so made Light , that this most beautiful , orderly , and admirable Event should result from its very Nature . Wherefore they are in a great Error , who reject Final Causes in Natural Philosophy , which , besides affording us occasion of admiring and adoring the Divine Wisdom , do often discover to us a curious Principle of finding out the Properties of those things whose inward Nature is not so clearly known by us , as that we can explain the immediate efficient Causes and Instruments , which the Almighty Mover imploys in producing those Effects , and obtaining those Ends.

Indeed I should think it an Attempt worth the Thought of some profound Philosopher , to give an Account of those admirable , orderly , and beautiful Appearances in Nature , whereof we can most plainly apprehend the Designs and Final Causes , Final C●uses highly deserve our notice . but can hardly proceed to any farther Knowledg of them . ( Thus for instance , suppose it were asked , What is the cause of Refraction ? Were it not much satisfactory to answer , That thereby the Ray may proceed the easiest way possible ) This surely might be able to convince the most obstinate Opposers of Divinity : For certainly , if we can rely upon ●ny Deduction or Consequence drawn out by the Mind of Man , we may assuredly rest satisfied in this ; that so many Phaenomena , stupendous and surprising for their designed Contrivance , could not proceed but from an Omnipotent and Designing Being . But if after all , they will arrive to such an height of Extravagance , as to say , We cannot rely on these Conclusions , as being all in the dark , and knowing nothing ; let them look to the hazard of their own Principles , who endanger their eternal Happiness on confidence of their own Arguments . But to resume our Subject .

The Famous Mons. Fermat has written a long Demonstration of this same Principle in Dioptricks . Fermat demonstrates the same . 'T is publish'd amongst the French Letters , at the end of his Opera Mathematica . Tolosae 1679. Pag. 158. To which I refer the Reader .

( 4. ) But after all , perhaps it may not be amiss , Farther Explication Refraction from D. Barrow . to illustrate this Business of Refraction , by some more familiar and sensible Instance . Wherefore Tab. 38. Fig. 5. T. 38. F. 5. Let the Parallelogram A B C D represent a Ray of Light of this breadth , and let it fall on the plain Surface of the Glass E F ; this in some measure does stop its Course ; and the Point B entering the Glass , shall endeavour ( but slower ) to proceed onwards directly to G in the Line A B produced . But all this while the Point D , continuing yet in the Air , shall continue its former motion in the Right Line C D H , but now 't is impossible for both the Points to obtain what both endeavour ; for each cannot perform his direct Motion , one slower , and t'other quicker . And therefore that they may both come nighest to what each endeavours , they shall both be turned about some certain Point Z in the Right Line D B produced . So that whilst the Point D in the thinner Medium proceeding quicker describes the greater Arch D d ; the Point B , proceeding more slowly in the more Dense Medium , describes the lesser Arch B b ; and when they have thus run through both these Arches , the Right Line B D shall obtain the Posture b d. And now that the Point D also is emerged into the more Dense Medium at d ; and it also is now as much retarded as b ; these circular Motions shall now cease ; for D is not now carried quicker than B , and therefore describes not , as before , a greater Arch. Wherefore forsaking , as soon as they can , their former Progress , they shall both proceed in d c , b a , the Tangents to their Arches . And the whole Ray A B C D thus bent , and brought into the Posture a b c d proceeds onwards directly in that Course . And here 't is to be noted , That whatever Inclination A B has on E F , the Arches D d , B b , or their Semidiameters Z D , Z B , have always the same Proportion ▪ to wit , such a Proportion , as the peculiar Difference in the Resistance or Density of one and t'other Medium does require ( which is to be determined by Experiment ) : For Tab. 38. Fig. 6. T ▪ 38. F. 6 ▪ Let us suppose the Point B thrust forwards towards Q or N , and that the Medium below E F is perfectly Homogeneous , that is , equally resisting in all Parts thereof ; there is then no reason , why this Point should not be carried with an equal Celerity towards whatever Part , that is , it shall tend equally quick towards Q in the Right Line O B Q ( supposing its direction lye that way ) as towards N in the Right Line A B N ▪ And therefore the Rays of Light A B , O B , however differently inclined , shall find an equal Resistance ; and the Point B , whether it tend towards Q or N , shall be equally retarded . And also seeing the Point D ( Tab. 38. Fig. 5. ) T. 38. F. 5. continues in the first Medium , it shall be thrust forwards with the same Celerity , whatever is its Inclination . Whence 't is manifest , that these Motions , or Paths passed over in the same time , to wit , the circular Arches D d , B b , shall always observe the same Proportion , that is , the Proportion of their Semidiameters Z D , Z B , or Z d , Z b ; which Proportion therefore principally and chiefly measures and determines the Refractions of Rays in the same two Mediums . And this is the same Proportion , as is between the Sines of the Angles opposite to Z d ▪ Z B , in the Triangle Z d B , that is , of the Angles Z B d , ( or Z B E ) and Z d B. But Z B E is the Complement of the Angle A B E , and therefore ( by Def. 2. Part. I. ) Z B E is the Angle of Incidence or Inclination of A B to E F ; and the Angle Z d B is the Complement of the Angle F d c ; and therefore Z d B is the Refracted Angle ( by Def. 3. Part. I. ) . From hence is manifest what we assert in the 7 Experiment , Part I. And here we shall note , that according to Exper. 6. Part I. Z D shall be to Z B : : As 300 To 193 ; or as 14 to 9.

( 5. ) And thus much concerning Refraction . The Consideration whereof does naturally suggest unto us , That Light is a Body . Light a Body . For however the Antient Aristotelians defined it , Actus perspicui quatenus perspicuum , which is perfectly unintelligible ; yet so much we may perceive hereby , that they designed to exclude it from all Corporeal Notion . But the various Properties of Light , that do necessarily belong to a Body , are so many and evident , that they leave no room for any farther doubt in this matter . I shall mention but a few .

( 6. ) And first , by this Affection of being refracted , 't is manifest that Light , From its being resisted in its passage through Diaphanous Mediums . in its passage through this and t'other Diaphanous Body does find a different Resistance . Now t is unconceivable , how any thing , but Body , should suffer Resistance ; but we may conceive the Resistance , that Light suffers in its passage through different Diaphanous Bodies , to proceed from the Medium Hindering of the Diffusion or Distribution of Light through more of the Parts of this Medium , and consequently it may be said to be less illuminable . For the Nature of Light endeavours to diffuse it self . And on the contrary , by how much Light does more equably or uniformly affect the Parts of the Medium , which it enlightens ; or by how much it communicates its Energy to more of the Particles of the enlightened Space ; that Medium may be said to be by so much the more illuminable , or less to resist the Progress of Light . Whence it is , that by how much the affected Parts of the Medium are more solid and small , and admit between them the less Space for any other Heterogeneous Matter , that suffers not by Light ; by so much the Medium is said to be more enlightened . But leaving these Philosophical Refinements ; 't is manifest that Resistance must proceed from Contact of two Bodies . And Contact , either Active or Passive , belongs only to Body ; according to that of the Philosophick Poet , 〈◊〉 Tangere enim & tangi nisi Corpus nulla potest Res. And our Saviour himself , the Fountain of all Wisdom and Philosophy , Divine and Natural , seems to confirm this Notion ; when to prove himself a True Body after his Resurrection , He commands his Diffident Disciple To Touch Him .

( 7. ) The Second Property , that confirms Light to be a Body , and a Body moved or thrust forward , is , That it requires time to pass from one place to another , Requiring time to move from place to place . and does it not in an instant , but is only of all Motions the quickest . For the Experiment proving this , we are obliged to the Ingenious Mons. Romer , who has demonstrated beyond all Contradiction , from the Observations of the Immersions and Emersions of the Satellits of Iupiter ; That Light requires the Time of one Second to move the space of 3000 Leagues , or 9000 Miles , which is near the Earths Diameter . He that requires a farther Account hereof , may consult the Iournal des Scavans 1676. Decemb. 7. Philosoph . Transact . Num. 136. Or Mr. Newton's Incomparable Piece , Philosophiae Natur. Princ. Mathem . Lib. I. Schol. Prop. 96. Where 't is asserted , That Light requires about ten Minutes time to come from the Sun to the Earth . And 't is most evident , without this Allowance for the Time spent in Lights Motion , the Appearances of the Satellits Eclipses and Emersions are not to be explicated by any Excentricity or other Hypothesis . But by this Allowance , they answer to the greatest exactness . And this is a Part of Astronomy the most correct and accurately determined , as well as the most useful , of all others : For hereby Geography may be rectified , the Longitude determined , and Navigation made more easie and secure . For a Confirmation of all which , I appeal to the Labours of the Ingenious Mr. Flamsteed and Mr. Halley , to whom the Learned World is for ever obliged by their Advancements of Astronomy .

( 8. ) A third proof that Light is a Body , Light not to be increased ▪ but by robbing some oth●r place of its Light . is , That it cannot by any Art or Contrivance whatsoever be increased or deminished ; that is to say , we cannot magnifie ( for instance ) the Light of the Sun or a Candle , no more than we can magnifie a Cubick Inch of Gold , or make it more than a Cubick Inch. But in this particular I desire to be rightly understood , lest I seem herein to advance a Paradox . I say therefore , Whenever we see Light increased , 't is by Robbing of some other part of the Medium of its Light ; or , by bringing the Light , that naturally should have been diffused through some other part , to the more enlightened place . Thus for Example , In a Burning-Glass , by which the Light of the Sun is highly encreased in its Focus , or Burning-Spot : We are first to consider , that in this Focus the Image of the Sun is projected , as being the Distinct Base of the Glass . And secondly we may observe all round about this bright Spot of the Suns Image , there is cast the strong Shadow of the whole breadth of the Burning-Glass . For all the Rays from the Sun , that would have fallen on this broad shaded space , are now brought together and crowded close in this bright Spot , there raising a vigorous Light and violent Heat . This is abundantly confirmed by an easie Experiment : For cover all the Burning-Glass , except one small round space in its middle , just the bigness of the bright burning Spot in its Focus ; and tho there be a shaded space round the bright Speck , as before , yet we shall not be sensible of any Increase either of Light of Heat ; which plainly shews , that this Increase of Light ( when the Glass is all bare ) proceeds from the crowding together of those Rays that would have fallen on the rest of the Glass , and which ( were not the Glass interposed ) would have fallen on the shaded space round about the bright Speck .

There seems but one Objection against what is here laid down ; and that is , that Light is increased by Reflection , without depriving any place of the Light it would otherwise receive ; or , without bringing to the enlightned part any Light that would otherwise escape it , or never come at it . But if we consider the matter more attentively , we shall find it otherwise . For let us suppose an Hole of a Foot square in the side of a Chamber , and that a Candle were placed close to , and just before the middle of this Hole ; there is but half this Candle that now enlightens this Room , the other half of the Rays proceeding directly out at the Hole : Let now a Looking-Glass be placed , so as just to fill up this Hole ; the Rays which before would have gone out at the Hole , are now reflected into the Room ; so that the Hemisphere without the Chamber , which was enlightened whilst the Hole continu'd open , is now robb'd of its Light ; and all this Light is now reflected into the Room ; whereby the averse side of the Flame is made to enlighten , as well as the side directly exposed to the Chamber . What is said of this Case , may be accommodated to all : For so a Looking-Glass lying Horizontal , and reflecting the Sun-Beams to the Ceiling of the Room , does plainly hinder the direct progress of the Rays to some other part , and consequently robs that part of its Light . This is evident , by supposing an Hole behind the Glass ; as in the former Case .

( 9. ) From all which ●tis manifest , how vainly they attempt , who offer at increasing Light Uniformly , Light not to be increased uniformly . that is , equally throughout the whole Sphere of a Luminous Body , or Radiating Point . Such are the Pretences of those that would perswade the World of Contrivances for making the small Flame of a Lamp enlighten strongly a whole Chappel , Hall , or Court , by being hung up in the midst thereof . For these things are impossible to be effected in Nature , and they had as well pretend to create Light ; for there is no other way of increasing it ; unless by robbing another part of its Light ; and then 't is not uniformly increased . We have a very sensible Instance of this in the New-invented Lanthorns , now much used in London ; which by the Convex-Glasses in their sides , do strongly throw those Rays along the Walks of the Passengers , which would otherwise ( were the Glasses away , and the round Holes left open ) be spent on parts of the Streets not frequented ; whereby the untrodden parts of the Streets are robb'd of their Light , more strongly to supply and enlighten the Paths where Light is requisite .

I have insisted the longer on this particular , because there is nothing more commonly pretended , than this Invention of increasing Light uniformly , by those that do not consider how vain the Attempt is . I must confess , could the thing be effected , it would be a piece of Oeconomick Philosophy , the most pleasant and useful imaginable , and equivalent to the perpetual Lamp ( if ever there was any such thing , as I very much doubt ) . The Student in his Closet , the Merchant in his Shop , the Housewife in her Offices , would find a great and pleasant Advantage therein . But above all , the dark Northern Climates ▪ who are many Days , Weeks , and Months deprived of the Sun , would be infinitely obliged to the Inventor , who could make the Flame of a Lamp , no bigger than a Barly-Corn , supply the Presence of that glorious Body .

CHAP. II. Dioptrick Problem . Why Four Convex-Glasses in a Telescope shew Objects Erect .

I was unwilling to burden the First Part with Digressions ; and therefore in Prop. LVI . thereof , I promised this Discourse in this place .

In the Iournal der Scavans . For Monday 17. Septemb. 1685. Pag. 466. Amst. Edition We find this Passage .

As Perspectives of One Convex-Glass make Objects appear upright , which those of Two Convex-Glasses invert ; and again those of Three rectifie : So it should seem , that those of Four ought to invert . And yet Experience shews us that Objects appear upright through these Glasses . The singularity of this Phaenomenon obliges all skill'd in Dioptricks , to enquire the reason thereof ; but hitherto they have found none . Mons. Regis , who applies himself particularly to this Part of Natural Philosophy , believes that he has hit upon the Reason , and makes us hope that he will suddenly publish it .

Thus far the Iournal : But does not tell us whose Remark this is : I am apt to believe , 't was written by Mons. Regis himself , to the Publisher of the Iournal .

To me this Phaenomenon appears very easily explicable from the consideration of placing the Glasses in a Telescope . And I wonder that any one , who pretends to Skill in Dioptricks , should make a Difficulty of it . The posture of the Glasses in the Tube is thus ; After the Object-Glass , the first Eye-Glass is placed so much distant ( towards the Eye ) from the Focus of the Object-Glass , as is this Focus of the Eye-Glass ; then the second or middle Eye-Glass is placed so much distant from the Focus of the first Eye-Glass , as is the Focus of this middle Eye-Glass . Lastly , the nearest or third Eye-Glass is placed so much distant from the Focus of the middle Eye-Glass , as is the Focus of this nearest Eye-Glass ; and the Eye , looking through them all , is placed in the Focus of this nearest Eye-Glass .

I say therefore first , that one single Convex-Glass , cannot properly be said by it self , to shew Objects erect or reverse ; but only in respect of placing the Eye that looks through it ; and in respect of the Objects Distance from it . For if the Eye that looks through such a single Convex-Glass , be placed nigher thereto than the Glasses Focus or Distinct Base , distant Objects appear erect : If the Eye be placed just in the Focus or Distinct Base , distant Objects are neither erect or reversed , but all in Confusion between both . And if the Eye be placed farther from the Glass than the Focus or Distinct Base , distant Objects are reversed .

This being laid down , I assert , secondly , That the Object-Glass of a Telescope , consisting of a Convex Object-Glass , and Convex Eye-Glass , reverses the Object , both to the Eye-Glass , and to the Eye that looks through it . For the Eye-Glass is placed farther from the Object-Glass , than is the Focus of the Object-Glass . And the Eye-Glass does nothing towards the rectifying or reversing . Thus we see the reversing of Objects in a Telescope of two Convex-Glasses , proceeds wholly from the Object-Glass , and its Position ; and the Eye-Glass has nothing to do in the Affair : For were the Eye it self in the place of the Eye-Glass , it would see the Object inverted through the single Object-Glass .

I come now to consider the second Eye-Glass placed after the first Eye-Glass . And here it is manifest , that placing this as it ought in a Telescope ; if we place our Eye nearer to this middle Eye-Glass than its Focus the Eye sees the Object inverted and confused : Place the Eye in the Focus , it sees the Object all in confusion , neither erect nor reversed . For here again , there is a distinct Representation of the Object to be received on a piece of Paper , as in the Focus of the Object-Glass ; and the Eye being placed at any time in this place , being in the Distinct Base , sees all in confusion , ( all which is manifest from the First Part , and therefore but lightly touch'd here ) . But then let the Eye be placed farther from this middle Eye-Glass than its Focus ( for so is the third or immediate Eye-Glass , it being always distant from the middle Eye-Glass , the Aggregate of both their Foci ) , it perceives the Object erect and confused .

Lastly , the third or immediate Eye-Glass does nothing towards the erecting or reversing the Species , which it receives erect from the middle Eye-Glass ; no more than , in a Telescope of two Convex-Glasses , the Eye-Glass does to the Species it receives from the Object-Glass ; as is shewn before . All which will be manifest from inspection only of Tab. 37. Fig. 1.

Wherefore we are to consider the Telescope consisting of a Convex Object-Glass and three Convex Eye-Glasses , as two Telescopes , each consisting of two Convex-Glasses . The first consists of the Object-Glass and first Eye-Glass , and this inverts the Species ; that is , the Species is inverted in the Distinct Base of the Object Glass , and is so brought to the Eye . The second Telescope consists of the two immediate Eye-Glasses , and this erects what the former inverted ; that is , the Species in the Distinct Base of the middle Eye-Glass is erect , and is so brought to the Eye , by the Eye-Glass . The Eye-Glasses themselves , in either Case , having nothing to do with the erecting or inverting , but merely in representing in the same posture the Image immediately before them .

The French Problem ▪ should not therefore have broken a Telescope of four Convex-Glasses into four Pieces , but into two ; and the Case would then have been plain ; whereas , by breaking it into four Perspective-Glasses , that is attributed to two of them , which neither of them does , viz. Inverting and Erecting .

Therefore I say lastly , That one Convex-Glass ( that is the Object-Glass ) as posited in this Telescope , inverts : The second ( that is the first Eye-Glass ) does nothing towards erecting or reversing ; but represents the Image as it is in the Distinct Base of the Object-Glass before it , that is , inverted . The third Glass erects , or rather restores what was before inverted . The fourth represents the Image , as it receives it from the Distinct Base of the third , that is , erect .

And this I think a sufficient and easie Answer to what the French Man makes a great Difficulty .

As a Corollary to what has been laid down in this Chapter , we may deduce this Practical Rule for combining or putting together a Telescope of Prop. LVI .

Take the two first Eye-Glasses , and combine them by Tryals , so as to make a Distinct Inverting Telescope of Prop. L.

Then take the Object-Glass and first Eye-Glass , and by Tryals combine them likewise .

Lastly , take both these Telescopes , and without altering the Distances of their Glasses in either of them singly , by Tryals combine both these Telescopes , till the Appearance be clear and distinct .

What is here done by Tryals , may be effected by actual Mensuration , or designing out the Distances of the Glasses from each other by knowing their Focal Lengths .

CHAP. III. Of Glasses for defective Eyes .

( 1. ) Spectacles for old and pur-blind Men an Invention in Dioptricks of great use . ( 2. ) Some Rules for choosing Spectacles both for old and pur-blind . ( 3. ) Observations on Mr. Hook's Invention for helping Myopes by Convex Glasses . ( 4. ) Telescopes and Microscopes adapted to defective Eyes .

( 1. ) WEre there no farther Use of Dioptricks than the Invention of Spectacles for the Help of defective Eyes ; Spectacles for old and pur-blind ▪ Men , an Invention of great use . whether they be those of old Men , or those of pur-blind Men ; I should think the Advantage that Mankind receives thereby , inferiour to no other Benefit whatsoever , not absolutely requisite to the support of Life . For as the Sight is the most noble and extensive of all our Senses ; as we make the most frequent and constant use of our Eyes in all the actions and concerns of human Life ; surely that Instrument that relieves the Eyes when decay'd , and supplies their Defects , rendring them useful , when otherwise almost useless , must needs , of all others , be esteemed of the greatest Advantage . In what a miserable condition do we count those , Condition of old Men deplorable without Spectacles . in whom it hath pleased the great Contriver of the Eyes and Sight , to shut those two little Windows of the Soul ? And we may imagine , that they , in whom these Lights are but partly obscured , do in some measure partake of the Misery of the blind . How melancholy is the condition of him , who only enjoys the Sight of what is immediately about him ? With what Disadvantage is he ingaged in most of the Concerns of human Life ? Reading is to him troublesome , War more than ordinary dangerous , Trade and Commerce toilsome and unpleasant . And so likewise , on the other hand ; How forlorn would the latter part of most Mens Lives prove , unless Spectacles were at hand to help our Eyes , and a little form'd piece of Glass supply'd the Decays of Nature ? The curious Mechanick , engaged in any minute Works , could no longer follow his Trade than till the 50th . or 60th . Year of his Age : The Scholar no longer converse with his Books , or with an absent Friend in a Letter . All after would be melancholy Idleness , or he must content himself to use an other Man's Eyes for every Line . Thus forlorn was the state of most old Men , and many young , before this admirable Invention ; which , on this very account , can never be prized too highly .

( 2. ) And because in the First Part hereof , Prop. XXVIII . and XLV . I have but slightly touched on the proper Method for helping defective Eyes ; Rules for Choosing Spectacles both for old and pur-blind . I think it convenient to prosecute that matter more fully in this place . Always supposing what foregoes in the First Part as understood .

First therefore for helping the Eyes of old Men , as being more frequently and universally requisite than the Relief of pur-blind Eyes .

In the First Part ( Prop. XXVIII . Sec. 8. and Prop. XXXI . ) we learn , that a Convex-Glass is here to be used : For these seeing distant Objects distinctly , and nigh Objects confusedly , must use such Glasses for reading , &c. as make nigh Objects appear as distant ; or , which bring the Rays from each single Point in a nigh Object , as if they came from a more distant Point . Or thus , seeing the Crystallines of old Men are too flat for nigh Objects , that is , want Convexity ; we are to help them by adding to them an artificial or adventitious Convexity of a Glass . But then our enquiry must be , What is a Proper Convexity to this or that particular Eye ? And because reading , or working curious small Works , as being engaged upon nigh Objects , are the chief Imployments wherein Spectacles are requisite . I shall suppose our Enquiry chiefly designed for this purpose . And indeed , tho there can hardly be any Rules laid down , strictly to determin this matter ; for distinct Sight may consist within a great Latitude : Yet if we observe the following Directions , we shall be apt to err less , and to fit our Eyes better with Spectacles , than if we observed no Rule at all , but chose at a venture .

First , When we first find our selves begin to require Spectacles , let us make choice of the flattest Convexities , that will possibly help our Eyes . These are usually called Young Spectacles . There are many ways of finding our and trying such ; but none more ready , obvious , and easie , than trying with which one can read a small Print distinctly , with the Book farthest from the Eyes ; or try which Spectacles burn at the greatest distance ; for these Spectacles are the most proper for those Eyes to use , and shall prejudice the Sight less , and preserve it longest of any .

We may note likewise , that the distance of the Print , or Object from the Eye continuing the same , a Convex-Glass may be said to be older or younger , according at it is removed farther from or nigher to the Eye or Object . This is manifest from the Doctrine in the First Part , concerning the Locus Apparens of an Object through such a Glass . To which therefore I refer .

Secondly . If your naked Eyes can read a moderate Print at the full extent of your Arms , or at the distance of about two Feet or two and an half ; and you desire a Pair of Spectacles to read with , at the usual Distance of reading , viz. about a Foot or little more : Procure a Pair of Glasses of such a Convexity , that an Object being exposed before them at the Distance of about a Foot , they may have their Imaginary Focus , or the apparent Place of the Object , distant from them about two , or two Feet and an half . Barrow , Lect. Opt ▪ 14. p. 103. All which may be easily obtained and effected by the Doctrine in the First Part.

In the next place , for relieving the Eyes of the short-sighted , pur-blind , or Myopes . We must consider , that these , laboring under the contrary Defect with old Men ( for they see nigh Objects distinctly , but distant Objects confusedly ) , must be relieved with a Remedy of a contrary effect ; and therefore they are helped by Concave-Glasses , which bring the Rays of distant Objects into the Eye , as if they were nigh . And because we may conceive the Crystallines of these Eyes as too protuberant or convex , therefore we are to take off from this too great Convexity , by adding an adventitious Concavity . But then , there is nothing so universally complained of by those who are thus affected , as the Difficulty they find in fitting proper Glasses to their Eyes . For the removal whereof , the following Rules may be observed .

First , That for viewing distant Objects , according to what is noted in the First Part , Prop. XLV . If a short-sighted Person can read distinctly , or see Objects at the distance of a Foot from his naked Eye ; a Concave-Glass , whose Virtual-Focal-Length is a Foot , makes such a Person see distant Objects distinctly . And so of any otherwise disposed Eye . So that knowing the Distance at which a pur-blind Person reads distinctly with unarmed Eyes , 't is easie , by the Doctrine in the First Part , to assign him a proper Glass for his Eye to see distant Objects .

Secondly , For Glasses proper for Myopes to read by , or to see Objects at the distance of about a Foot and half . Let us suppose Eyes so affected , as not to be able to read , but at the distance of Four Inches ; and that we desire Glasses for these Eyes to read by , at the ordinary distance of about a Foot and half : Let us form such Concave-Glasses , which , being exposed to an Object at the distance of a Foot and half , may have their Virtual respective Focus at the distance of four Inches . And so likewise for any other Distance . Barrow , Lect. Opt. 14. p. 102. All which is easily performed by those versed in the First Part of this Work .

Thirdly , We are to note , that Myops shall require different Glasses for viewing Objects at different Distances . But the visive Faculty not being contained within such strict and determined Limitations ; that Glass which is useful at an Object an hundred Foot distant , shall serve likewise at an Object distant fifty Foot ; but then 't is not so helpful at one distant five Foot . But another may be had proper even for this Distance , and not so useful at an Object distant an hundred or fifty Foot . All which is manifest from the Doctrine in the First Part.

Fourthly , There are some Eyes so ill conformed , that no Glasses whatever will relieve them . Of this I have often heard a very ingenious Man and great Philosopher Sir William Petty often complain in his own particula● . But then this proceeds not from a too little , or too great a Convexity in the Crystalline ; but from some other Indisposition or ill Configuration , not to be relieved by Glasses .

Lastly , Persons pur-blind labour under this great Inconvenience , that the Glasses which relieve them in one particular , do hinder their strong Vision of distant Objects in another particular . For as Concave-Glasses do order the Rays from any one single Point , properly to be received by the Eye of a Myops : So at the same time , they diminish the Appearance of the whole Object . And from hence it is , that tho these sort of Eyes may be well enough relieved for Reading and Writing at a convenient distance , and for seeing pretty large Objects at the distance of 100 , 200 , or 500 Foot ; yet for Objects much farther , unless they be very large indeed , they are not so easily supply'd .

( 3. ) And here I cannot but take notice of an ingenious intimation of Mr. Hooks M. Hook's Contrivance for helping Myopes considered . ( to whom the World is certainly much obliged for his curious Contrivances in Mechanicks , and his other Philosophick Indeavours ) published in Num. 3. of the Philosophical Collections . Lond. 1681. which he calls Myopibus Iuvamen . 'T is briefly this , That some sort of short-sighted Persons , who cannot be relieved by Concave Glasses , may perhaps find some help in Convex-Glasses ; their Eyes being removed at a convenient distance farther from these Glasses than their Distinct Bases . As for reading by these Glasses ; the Book must be inverted , and then the Image in the Distinct Base shall be erect , and the Eye shall perceive it erect . As for Writing , the Difficulty is greater than mentioned by the Learned Author : For the Myops must not only learn to write inverted , but also retrograde , viz. from the Right to the Left Hand ; and , what is yet more inconvenient , from the bottom towards the top of the Page ; which is hardly practicable on account of blotting the wet Writing . As for viewing distant Objects with these Glasses ; I acknowledg with the ingenious Author , that much of the Disagreableness of the inverted Prospect is taken off by use and custom , as I my self have experienced by my frequent use of inverting Telescopes . But yet I cannot go so far with the Author , as to assent to his Deduction from hence ; which is , that 't is only use and custom that makes us judge Objects erect that are perceived by an inverted Image on the Fund of the Eye . For then a Man standing on his Head , should judge the Trees and other Objects he sees inverted ; which no one in his Senses will do , but rather judge what is right , viz. that he himself is inverted , whilst the circumjacent Objects continue erect . This will be more evident to us , by considering the case of an adult Person , who has been blind from his Birth , and now suddenly restored to his Sight : He is not prejudiced by custom , and yet ( doubtless ) would judge as is usual . But lastly , an other great Difficulty that will attend the use of these Spectacles for Myopes , is , that they must be carried at such a distance from the Eyes , that it will be very troublesom to manage them commodiously . And if ▪ to this again we add the distance requisite for the Object , I question whether some Mens Arms will be long enough to manage a Pen for Writing , or turning the Leaves of a Book .

I have been the longer on this Proposal , because the Worthy Author does candidly invite all , to communicate to the Publick , what real Benefit by it , or Objections against it , they shall find .

( 4. ) I shall conclude this Chapter with the way of Adapting Telescopes and Microscopes to defective Eyes . Adapting Telescopes and Microscopes to defective Eyes . Which is briesly thus ;

A Telescope composed of a Convex Object-Glass and Concave Eye-Glass , being apply'd to an old Eye , the Eye-Glass may be a little farther removed from the Object-Glass than ordinarily : On the contrary , in such a Telescope for the Eye of a Myops , the Eye-Glass may be removed a little nigher to the Object-Glass ; the reason hereof is manifest from what has been delivered in the First Part. But then , how much farther , or nigher they are to be removed , is only to be determined by Experiment , and by every ones fitting the Glass to his own Eye .

And so likewise in Telescopes composed of a Convex Object-Glass , and Convex Eye-Glass : For the Eye of an old Man , the Eye-Glass may be removed a little farther from the Object-Glass , or from the Distinct Base . And for the Eye of a Myops a little nigher to the Object-Glass , than for Eyes naturally and orderly affected .

In like manner for Microscopes ; First the simple or single Convex for an old Eye , is to be removed a little farther from the Object ; and for a Myops , a little nigher the Object , than the usual posture .

And so in Double Microscopes . For an old Eye , the Eye-Glass is to be a little farther from the Object-Glass or Distinct Base ; And for a Myops , a little nigher the Object-Glass or Distinct Base . And because in these , the Distinct Base is brought nigher to , or farther from the Eye-Glass ( without altering the Distance of the Eye-Glass and Object-Glass ) , only by removing the whole Microscope nigher to or farther from the very Object : This latter Motion effects the same as the former ; and therefore may be used for old or short Sights instead of the former .

CHAP. IV. Of Mechanick-Dioptricks ,

( 1. ) Chief Authors that have treated of Grinding or Forming Optick-Glasses . ( 2. ) For trying whether a Glass be not plain . ( 3. ) For finding the Focal Lengths of Glasses . ( 4. ) Concerning the Centre of a Glass . ( 5. ) For trying the Regularity and Goodness of an Object-Glass . ( 6. ) Managing great Glasses , and the Author 's Treating thereof . ( 7. ) Proportioning Glasses in Telescopes ( 8. Mr. Hooks's Contrivance for making an Object-Glass of a small Sphere serve a long Tube .

( 1. ) I Design not in this Chapter to deliver at large the several ways of Grinding and Forming Optick-Glasses , Authors treating of Glass-grinding . the manner of making the Forms , Tools , or Dishes wherein they are shaped ; or the various Machines contrived by several ingenious Heads for this p●rpose : For this may justly require a particular Treatise by it self . And because nothing of this kind has ever yet appeared in English , according as I find the present Work accepted , I may perhaps hereafter attempt something in this way , for the satisfaction of some ingenious English Spirits , who may be inclinable to offer at these Exercises . In the mean time , they that are Masters of the Languages wherein they are written , may apply themselves to Pere Cherubin's Dioptrique Oculaire , Cherubin . and Zahn's Oculus Artificialis ; Zahn . wherein they will find an abundance on this Subject . But after all that can be writ concerning it , Practice and Experience will find out many Conveniencies and Inconveniencies , which can hardly be committed to Words , or described ; and therefore this is at last the best Instructour . But here I shall mention the chief Modern Authors that have contrived Engines for Grinding Glasses , that those who please may consult them . Mr. Hook Hook . in his Micrographia describes an Engine for this purpose . Hevelius Hevelius . in his Selenographia , Chap. I , II. describes another for Modelling the Forms or Dishes for Grinding Spherick Glasses . And in the First Part of his Machina Coelestis , Chap. XXIII . describes one for Grinding Conick-Glasses ▪ Ant. Mar. Schyrleus de Rheita De Rheita in his Oculus Enoch & Eliae , Lib. IV. has a Machine for Conick-Glasses . Maignan Maignan . at the end of his Perspectiva Horaria describes Machines both for Spherick and Conick-Glasses . Des-Cartes Des Cartes in his Dioptricks has another for Conick Glasses . Mons. Borelly Bo●e li. has given the World the Secret of his manner of Grinding great Glasses in Cyphe● , Iournal des Scavans , Ann. 1676. Iuly 6. but has not yet obliged us with the Discovery : Tho he be a Person of the greatest Candor and Freedom , and the most communicative ; as I am obliged to express with much Gratitude for his Civilities shew'd me in Paris 1685. at which time he gave me an Object-Glass formed by this way for a Telescope 24 Foot long . The celebrated Mons. Fatio de Duillier De Duillier ( of whom Dr. Burnet gives deservedly so excellent a Character in his Letters of Travails ) in the Iournal des Scavan , Ann. 1684. Novemb. 20. describes an Invention of his own , for exactly forming the Dishes for Grinding Spherick Glasses ; which indeed is very ingenious , and perfectly new : But I cannot tell how easily it may be practised , without some farther Improvement ; for his Contrivances of the Block c , and of the Screws d , g , ( I refer to his Figure ) seem not to have all the Motions requisite , to keep the Point e exactly true to the Axis of the little Telescope h k.

The Incomparable Sir Christopher Wren , Wren . our English Archimedes , Apollonius , Diophantus , proposes his Contrivance for Forming Hyperbolick-Glasses , Num. 48. and 53. of the Philosophic . Transact .

But all farther Endeavours for Forming Conick-Glasses , Conick-Glasses not better than Spherick From Mr. Newton . which have hitherto been wholly frustrated and unsuccessful , may now be put to a full stop ; when we hear in this matter the Opinion of as great a Philosopher and Mathematician , as this or any Age could ever boast of , The Celebrated Mr. Newton of Cambridge , who in his profound Treatise , Philosophiae Naturalis Principia Mathematica , has fathom'd the greatest Depths of Nature , and laid a Foundation for Posterity to raise an infinite Superstructure . Thus he , in the First Book , Schol. ad Prop. XCVIII . Ad usus autem Opticos , &c. In English as follows , But for all Optick Uses , Spherick Figures are the most commodious . If the Object-Glasses of Telescopes were composed of two Spherick-Glasses containing Water between them , perhaps the Irregularity of the Refractions that are made on the Surfaces of the Glasses towards their edges , may be accurately enough corrected by the Refractions of the Water . And such Object-Glasses are preferable to Elleptick or Hyperbolick-Glasses ; not only because they are easier and more accurately to be formed ; but also because they refract more accurately those Pencils of Rays that are ( collateral or ) out of the Glasses Axis . But the different Refrangibility of different Rays , will for ever hinder us from perfecting Opticks by Glasses either of Spherick , or any other Figures whatsoever . And unless we can correct the Errors that arise from hence , all our Labour is lost in other Corrections .

And indeed if we consider it right , we shall find it impossible , by whatever Figures to render the Appearance of the Collateral Parts of an Object of so distinct as the direct ; for the very natural Eye does it not ; and therefore we are forced to apply it successively directly before the Parts of any Object we design to view : And we may well despair to perform by Art , more than what the Almighty Framer of the Eye has given us a Pattern for .

What this Great Man means by the Different Refrangibility of Different Rays , Different Refrangibility of Rays . We may find , Num. 80. p. 3075. N. 83. p. 4059. N. 84. p. 4087. N. 85. p. 5004. N. 88. p. 5084. N. 110. p. 217. N. 121. p. 499. N. 123. p. 556. N. 128. p. 692 ▪ of the Philosoph . Transactions ; wherein he lays down a perfectly new and most ingenious Theory of Light .

In the same Tracts , Num. 81 , 82 , 83. we may find an Account of a new Cata-Dioptrical Telescope , Cata-Dioptrick Telescope . invented by this same excellent Person .

( 2. ) All that I shall offer at more in this Chapter , is , Trying whether a Glass be not plain . to lay down some practical Rules for finding the Foci and Centres of Glasses ; with some other Accidental Remarks , that may be requisite to the clearer understanding and performance of some Precepts delivered in this Treatise .

The Object-Glasses of Telescopes are generally of so little Curvity on their Superficies , that by looking on them or by feeling them , it cannot be discovered , whether they are plain or of a Spherick Figure ; or which is formed on a Sphere of a greater , which of a lesser Radius . To find this ( as I have said before , in Schol. Prop. XXXI . Part I. ) we are to shake the Glass nimbly at our Arms length before the Eye ; and if the Objects seen through it seem to dance or move , the Glass is not plain . And that Glass which makes the Objects seem the most to move is formed on the less Sphere , whether Convex or Concave .

( 3. ) When we have thus found our Glasses to be Spherick . Then supposing them Convex , For finding the Foci of Glasses . there are several Methods for finding their Foci . I shall lay down some of the plainest and most certain .

First , for Glasses of pretty deep Convexities ( that is , of small Spheres ) , apply them to the end of a Scale of Inches and Decimal Parts , and expose them before the Sun ; and upon the Scale , we shall find the bright Intersection of the Rays exactly measured out . Or expose them in the Hole of a dark Chamber ; and where a white Paper receives the distinct Representation of distant Objects , there is the Focus of this Glass . This is an universal and certain way for all Convexes . For a Glass of a pretty long Focus , observe some distant Objects through it , and recede from the Glass , till the Eye perceive all in confusion , or till the Objects begin just to appear inverted ; here the Eye is in the Focus . If it be a Plano-Convex Glass , make it reflect the Sun against a Wall ; we shall on the Wall perceive two sorts of Light , one more bright within an other more obscure ; withdraw the Glass from the Wall , till the bright Image is at its smallest ; the Glass is then distant from the Wall about the fourth part of its Focal Length . If it be a double Convex , expose each side to the Sun in like manner , and observe both the Distances of the Glass from the Wall : The first Distance is about half the Radius of the Convexity turned from the Sun , and the second Distance is about half the Radius of t'other Convexity likewise : Thus we have the Radii of the two Convexities ; whence the Focus is determined by Prop. III. Part I. The reason hereof depends on the Doctrine of Catoptricks .

But the most exact way of determining the just Focal Length of the Object-Glass of a Telescope , is what I shall lay down in Chap. V. Sec. 4. of this Part , which , because I must necessarily deliver in that place , I will not here anticipate .

The Foci of Concaves are obtained by Reflection ; Foci of Concaves . for as a Concave Miroir or Speculum burns at the distance of about half the Radius of the Concavity ; so a Concave-Glass being supposed a Reflecting Speculum , shall unite the Rays of the Sun , at the distance of about half the Radius of the Cavity .

(4) Before we proceed to the Centration of Glasses , Concerning the Centres of Glasses . we are to recollect the 18th . Definition of the First Part , wherein we define the Axis of a Glass . I say therefore , when the Axis of a Glass passes directly through the Centre of the Glasses Breadth , or roundness of its Aperture , that Glass is said to be truly centred . And this will always be so when the Glass is equally thick round the edges of its Aperture . But this will be more intelligible by a Scheme Tab. 40. Fig. 1. T. 40. F. 1. Let a g d e a be a Plano-Convex ▪ Glass , much thicker towards the Edge d e , than towards a ; let a g be equal to g d , g is the Centre of this Glass , for 't is the middle Point of its Aperture or Breadth . But then this Glass is not truly centered : For , to l the Centre of the Convexity a g d draw g l , I say g l is not the Axis of this Glass ; but if there may an other Line l k be drawn , whose Portion within the Glass i k is greater than h g ( as in this Case it may easily be demonstrated . For l k = l g and l h more than l i. For ∠ l i h = Rect. therefore h g less than k i ) and which being perpendicular to the plain Surface a e , as well as to the Convex Surface a k d ; l k must consequently be the Axis of this Glass . Wherefore k is the true Centre of this Glass . And because , to compleat this Glass , there is wanting the Portion d f e ; therefore to make the true Centre of the Glass k , coincident with the middle Point of its Breadth or Aperture ; we are to make k b equal to k d ; and then we are to cut off , or to cover the Portion of the Glass b a c equal to d f e ; and so we obtain the compleat and truly Centered Glass c b k d e c. The same may be understood of double Convexes , without farther Explication .

But because in Object-Glasses of even moderate Lengths , 't is impossible by the Eye , or any Admeasurement of their Thickness , to know whether they be truly Centered : Therefore we must have recourse to some other Methods , that may shew this . And these are various .

First , Holding the Glasses at a due distance from the Eye , let us observe the two reflected Images of a Candle ; and where these two Images unite or coalesce , there is the true Centre of the Glass ; if this be in the middle of the Glasses Breadth , the Glass is truly Centred ; if not , we are to rectifie it , shall be declared hereafter .

A second way is , By presenting the Glass before the Sun , and making it reflect the Light on a Plain nighly parallel to its Surface , at a proper distance ; and we shall perceive two sorts of Light reflected ; one smaller , but much more strong and vigorous , within another more faint and large . Then by a due posture of the Glass ( found by Tryals ) both these Lights are to be projected as round as possible ; and at a proper distance from the Wall on which they are reflected ; the round brightest Spot is to be brought into the smallest compass that it can ( Tryal will make all this plain ) . When the Glass is in this posture , if the bright Spot be projected just in the middle of the fainter Light , the Glass is well centred . If it be projected to the Left Hand of this middle , the Glass is thickest towards the Left Hand Edge . And so to whatever side of the faint Light , this bright Spot is projected , on that side is the Glass thickest ; and on that side lies the true Centre . The reason hereof I shall explain in a Plano-Convex-Glass , and is the same in a double Convex ; mutatis mutandis . For the bright Spot is the Image of the Sun projected by the curve Surface of the Glass consider'd as a reflecting Speculum ( whereof more hereafter ) , and the faint Light is the Reflection of the Sun from the other plain Surface . Tab. 40. Fig. 2. T. 40. F. 2. a d e is a Plano-Convex-Glass , thicker towards the side d e than towards a. Let the Curvity a d ( whose Centre is c ) be exposed directly to the Sun : By the known Laws of Catoptricks , the Parallel Rays ( from the middle Point of the Sun , for instance ) falling on the Curvity ( which parallel Rays in the Figure are expressed by continued Lines ) , are united in the Focus at f , distant from the Curvity about half its Radius , there causing a brisk Light and Heat . In the mean time these parallel Rays do fall on the plain Surface ae obliquely , and are reflected thereby alongst the prickt Lines ; and these are they which cause the faint Light . Now 't is manifest , that if a Plain at f , parallel to the plain Surface a e , received these two Reflections , the bright Light at f would not be found in the middle of the faint Light : For here we see the faint Light is thrown much to one side . And the bright Light f is projected upwards from the middle of the faint Light ; for the Glass is thickest upwards towards its Edge d e.

The third Way of Examining the Centres of Glasses is yet more compleat than the former ; for it does not only discover the Fault ( if there be any , as in long Object-Glasses 't is very rare but there is ; especially if they be wrought in the Form by the unguided Hand , and not by Engine ) , but withal , it rectifies the Fault . 'T is thus ; Cover the Surface of the Glass with a thin piece of Paper , in which there is cut a round Hole of about an Inch diameter , and round about this Hole there are to be struck two or three Concentrick Circles ; move this Paper upon the Glass , till you see , on the plain that receives the reflected Light , that the bright Spot is exactly in the middle of the other fainter Light round it . This also one may measure by a Pair of Compasses , having , to that end , slightly fixed the Paper to the Glass , that we may more nicely determine , whether this bright Spot be exactly in the middle . This therefore being carefully adjusted by gently sliding the Paper on the Glass ( if it be requisite ) , we are , without the least altering this true Position of the Paper , to fix it more firmly to the Glass . And laying it thus on a Table , let us mark on the Glass ( by the Point of a Diamond ) three Points in one of the Circumferences Concentrick to the round Hole in the Paper . And sticking a small piece of Cement on the Glass about the middle of the round Hole ; by means of the three marked Points , let us find the exact Centre of this round Hole . Then uncovering the whole Glass ( except only the Cement in which the Centre is marked ) , with a Diamond-pointed Compass , let us strike as large a Circle on the Glass , as its Breadth will bear . Then round the Glass according to this Circle , and 't is as exactly centred as the Sense can judge .

But note , That whereas I have said that the brighter Spot is smaller than the fainter ; and that the brighter Light is to be reflected into the middle of the fainter . This is to be understood , supposing the Breadth of the Glass will allow it . For the Glass may be so narrow , that the Projection of the bright Image of the Sun may be broader than the Breadth of the Glass . But this happens so seldom in Practice , that I pass it over .

Pere Cherubin , who is often very nice in matters of little moment , and loose enough in those of greater weight and absolute necessity , describes an implicated Contrivance for true Centring of Glasses . Vision Parfait . Tom. II. p. 109.

( 5. ) The same Frier lays down a Way of Examining the Regularity and Goodness of an Object-Glass , For trying the Regularity and Goodness of an Object-Glass . pag. 25. which it may not be amiss here to insert . After we have centred the Object-Glass as well as we can , by the foregoing Method : To try the Regularity of its Form to the greatest exactness , says he , We must do thus , On a Paper strike two Concentrick Circles ; one whose Diameter is the same with the Breadth of the Object-Glass ; t'other of half that Diameter . This inward Circumference divide into six equal Parts , by the known way of applying the Radius six times in the Circumference , and making six fine small Holes therein with a Needle . Let us cover one side of the Glass with this Paper ; and then exposing it to the Sun , we are to receive the Rays that pass through these six Holes on a Plain at a just distance from the Glass . And by withdrawing or approaching this Plain from or to the Glass , we shall find , whether the Rays that pass through these six Holes unite exactly together at any distance from the Glass ; if they do , we may be assured of the Regularity of this Glass , that is , of its just Form . And at the same time we obtain exactly the Glasses Focal Length .

But after all , there is no better way for trying the Excellency of an Object-Glass , than by placing it in a Tube ; and trying it with small Eye-Glasses at several distant Objects . For that Object-Glass that represents the Objects the brightest and most distinct , and bears the greatest Ap●rture , and most Convex or Concave Eye-Glass , without colouring or Haziness , is surely the best . The most convenient Object to try them at , is the Title Page of a large Book ; wherein there are generally Letters printed of divers Magnitudes , and therefore affords variety of small Objects ; whereby the comparative Excellency of Object-Glasses may be nicely estimated . This the Celebrated Mons. Cassini , the French King's Astronomer , shew'd me when I visited him at the Observatory in Paris , Ann. 1685. who tryed all his Glasses by the large Title-Page of a Book , fixt inverted on the Jaume of a Steeple Window more than ● of a Mile distant from the Observatoire .

(6) The next Piece of Mechanick-Dioptricks , which I shall mention , is , The Managing Great Glasses . Manageing great Glasses . And herein I shall not swell this Volume with describing those sumptuous Contrivances and costly Machines invented for this purpose : It shall suffice me to refer the Reader to the Original Authors , where he may find them described at large .

Hevelius Hevelius . in his Machina Coelestis , Part. I. Cap. 19 , 20 , 21 , 22. describes the Engines he used for his Telescopes . And amongst others , a Contrivance for managing his Tube of 60 Foot , and another of 150 Foot long .

The deservedly Celebrated Mons. Hugens , Huge●s . one of the chief Mathematick Luminaries of the present Age , has publish'd a small Tract , Astroscopia Compendiaria , designed only for Describing his way of Managing great Glasses with very little trouble , and without a Tube . This I am sure is no barren Speculation of the Ingenious Author's , but successfully practised by him ; as I can gratefully testifie , having had the favour of being shewn the whole Contrivance by the Excellent Author himself in his Garden at the Hague , Ann. 1685. at which time I had the happiness also of seeing his Planetary Clock , Planetary Clock . or Moving Ephemeris , a Machine that cannot be sufficiently admired .

Mons. Cusset , Cusset . an ingenious French Man of Lions , has publish'd his Contrivance for managing great Glasses , in the Iournal des Scavans , Ann. 1685. May 18.

Mons. Cassini , when I was with him at the Observatoir in Paris ( amongst other Curiosities , which according to his usual Candour and Civility he communicated to me ) shewd me two very pretty Contrivances for managing great Glasses ; which , because not yet publick , I shall describe as well as I can by Memory at this distance of time . The first was a plain Piece of Clock-work , moved by a Spring and regulated by a Pendulum Vibrating half Seconds . This carried an Arm that stood something prominent from the Body of the Work ; which Arm at its extremity carried the Object-Glass fixt in a Ring . This Arm and the Object-Glass , by means of graduated Arches in the Clock-work could be turned ad Libitum directly to any Star . Thus suppose Saturn were to be observed ; by a common Ephemeris , knowing his Longitude and Latitude , together with the Time of Day or Night , the Arches of the Clock being put to such and such Divisions , and the Machine it self placed with such or such a part horizontal or perpendicular ; the Object-Glass was of course directly exposed to the Star . Then the Pendulum being put in motio● , the Machine kept the Glass constantly exposed directly to the Star in its diurnal Motion . This whole Machine then , being placed upon an Height , carried the Object-Glass in its due position ; and the Observer below managed the Eye-Glass by his free Hand , assisted with a Rest. Tho I cannot retain so exact a Remembrance of this Engine , as to venture at a Scheme of the particular Parts ; yet this Description perhaps will be sufficient to give the ingenious Astronomer an Idea thereof , so as to apprehend the Contrivance in general . Something much of the same kind may we find described in Mr. Hooks Animadversions on Hevelius Mach. Coelestis . p. 66 , 67 , 68 , &c.

The other Contrivance he mentioned to me , if I forget not , he or Mons. Borelly told me , was due to Mons. Azout . It is thus ; From the Tube of a small Telescope there stands out an Arm perpendicular to the side of this smaller Tube : This Arm carries the great Object-Glass ; then an Observer upon an Height manages this small Telescope , following therewith the Motion of a Star ; by which means the great Object-Glass ( being parallel to the Object-Glass of this lesser Telescope ) is kept constantly in prosecution of this same Star : Then the other Observer below manages the Eye-Glass as before .

These two Contrivances are indeed pretty Thoughts ; but I cannot promise that they can be so easily practised ; unless the Machines that carry the great Object-Glass be made to rise and fall at pleasure , as the Star rises or sets . For otherwise , the Observer that manages the Eye-Glass , shall soon lose the sight of his Object ; unless he have the opportunity of rising and falling , by some such Contrivance as the forementioned Mons. Cusset proposes in the fore-cited place . But this is vastly chargeable .

'T is now above seven Years since Mons. Boffat Boffa● . of Tholouse has promised the World his Contrivance for managing great Glasses ; of which he has given a small Specimen in the Iournal des Scavans 1682. Dec. 28. but we hear nothing farther of it ; perhaps because the Contrivance requires reflecting Speculums , which much weaken the light of the Object , and are therefore found useless .

( 7. ) I may reckon another Piece of Mechanick Dioptricks , The proportioning of the Glasses in Telescopes and Microscopes . Proportioning of Glasses in Telescopes and Microscopes . We have said before , that , of two or more Object-Glasses of the same Focal Lengths ; that is the best , which will bear an Eye-Glass of the greatest Convexity ( this is usually called the Deepest Charge ) : But yet there are some Proportions to be observed , which Experience has found out , as the most convenient and best adapted for most Mens Eyes , that are well disposed . For so a good Object-Glass of 12 or 13 Feet , will bear a Charge of 3 Inches , better than a Charge much deeper or shallower .

But moreover , In adapting an Eye-Glass to an Object-Glass , respect is likewise to be had to the Object we contemplate ; for Objects of a sedate Light , as Saturn , Iupiter , &c. will allow deeper Charges , than those of a more brisk and strong Light , as Venus , &c.

Wherefore this whole Affair being only the Subject of Experiment , to that I shall refer , and only hint by the bye ; That for Telescopes of three Convex Eye-Glasses , Cherubin advises ( Dioptrique Oculaire , III. Par. Sec. 2. Cap. VII . pag. 188. ) that , of the three Eye-Glasses , that next the Object-Glass should be of the deepest Charge ; the middle Eye-Glass ought to be something shallower ; and the immediate Eye-Glass the shallowest of all .

For Proportioning Glasses in double Microscopes , we may consult the same Author . But 't is tedious to transcribe .

The LV. Prop. of the First Part , relates to the Apertures of Object-Glasses . After which , we have nothing to add in this place ; which otherwise might have been challenged by a Discourse thereon , as being of a Mechanick Consideration .

( 8. ) The last Piece of Mechanick Dioptricks I shall mention , is an ingenious Thought of Mr. Hooks , M. Hooks Contrivance to make a Glass of a small Sphere serve a long Tube . for making a short Object-Glass perform the part of one formed on a much larger Sphere .

Prepare ( says he ) two Glasses , the one exactly flat on both sides , the other flat on the one side , and Convex on the other , of what Sphere you please . Let the flat Glass be a little broader than t'other . Then let there be made a Cell or Ring of Brass very exactly turned , into which these two Glasses may be so fastened with Cement , that the plain Surfaces of them may lye exactly parallel , and that the Convex-side of the Plano Convex-Glass may lye inward , but so as not to touch the flat of the other Glass . These being cemented into the Ring very closely about the edges : By a small Hole in the side of the Brass Ring or Cell , fill the interposed space between these two with Water , Oyl of Turpentine , Spirit of Wine , Saline Liquors , &c. then stop the Hole with a Screw : And according to the differing Refraction of the interposed Liquors , so shall the Focus of this compoud Glass be longer or shorter . Vid. Philosoph . Trans . Num. 12. pag. 202.

This , I must confess is an ingenious Hint : But I doubt the desired Effect will not be so successfully attained thereby , so as to constitute an Object-Glass for a Telescope . For certainly , were it effectual ; 't is so easie and withal so useful , that before this time it would have obtained , and been practised universally . And this makes me question , whether it would be of any better effect , than a Meniscus-Glass , or a Combined Glass of Prop. XVII . Part. I.

CHAP. V. Of Telescopick-Instruments .

(1) Controversie between Hevelius and Hook concerning Telescopick Sights . ( 2. ) Hevelius's Objections against them . His Mistake concerning them . ( 3. ) Their Fabrick or Contrivance . ( 4. ) Adjusting them to plain Rulers or Tubes . ( 5. ) To Quadrants , Sextants , &c. ( 6. ) Dioptrick Reason of their Performance . ( 7. ) Adapting the Micrometer to a Telescope .

(1) THE Fame of Iohannes Hevelius , Controversie between Hevelius and Hook concerning Telescopick-Sights . Consul of Dantzick , is deservedly celebrated by all that delight in Astronomy . His Performances herein are highly extoll●d by all ; and the sumptuous Volumes of his Labours and Studies , which he has published , have procured him an immortal Name of Honour amongst the Literate . But notwithstanding all his commendable Endeavours , he has not yet arrived at the height of perfection ; but something is yet wanting and deficient even in his most costly Machines . Whoever peruses the large and elegant Volume of his First Machina Coelestis , will admire at the vast Treasure he has expended on Astronomical Instruments of all sorts ; when he sees even the very Description of them so very sumptuous . And yet , at the same time , whoever peruses a small Book of Animadversions on this Machina Coelestis , ●by the ingenious Mr. Hook , will find one grand Defect does attend the noble Hevelius Instruments , which renders them ( I will not say , useless , faulty , or no better than Ticho's , yet ) not so compleat and perfect , as otherwise they had been by the Addition of Telescopick Sights . For Hevelius wholly used Plain Sights , which certainly are not so accurate as Telescopick . And tho I must confess ingeniously , that this renouned Astronomer , by his extraordinary Diligence , great Care , and perpetual long-continued Practice , but chiefly by his peculiar sharpness of Sight , had arrived to a great exactness of Observation by plain Sights ( as I find by comparing the Observations made by the most curious Astronomers of our Age , Flamsteed , Halley , Cassin , &c. by Telescopick Sights , with those Observations made by Hevelius ; ) yet this we are to attribute more to the peculiar acuteness of his Eye , and to his extraordinary Diligence and Care in Observation , than to the exactness of plain Sights . For to me it seems manifest , from what the Learned Mr. Hook lays down in the forementioned Book , that the naked Eye cannot ordinarily perceive an Angle ( or Object that subtends an Angle ) less than a Minute , or half a Minute at the smallest . For tho we perceive Stars of that magnitude that their Diameters are not half a Minute ; yet this is by a sort of adventitious or glaring Light , that is caused by the Refraction of their Rays in the Air ; which makes them appear to us much bigger than really they are ; as is manifest , when we come to look at them with a Telescope that takes off this glaring Light .

( 2. ) The want therefore of Telescopick Sights is what Mr. Hook chiefly insists upon , as defective in Hevelius Hevelius Objections against them . costly Astronomical Apparatus : But yet , in his whole Book of Animadversions , he takes no notice of the chief Objections , which Hevelius uses against them . And I am perswaded the Candour of that Noble Astronomer ( whose Memory must now be sacred ) was so great , that upon the removal of these Difficulties , he would have given up the Cause ; for it seems the Controversie was long agitated between them .

These Objections we shall find in the First Part of the Machina Coelestis , ( ap. XIV . pag. 296. Accedit , si quando Observator non aequè directè & precisè semper , ut saepius , crede , contingeret , per Centra lentium collineat , facile diversitas aliqua aspectûs observationibus possit induci , quae suo tempore Coeli scrutatores jugiter seduceret . Caeterum , cum Acus vel Fila adeo prope lentem Ocularem ad observatoris oculum vix in remotione aliquot digitorum subsistunt ; dubito an Dioptra haec oculo tam propinqua , multo accuratius Stellas quasvis minimas , quam Pinnacidia nostra , ad ●ex novemve pedes ab invicem remota , possit detegere . Nam etiamsi objectum distinctius videas ; in eo tamen , quod Dioptra tua oculo propius adheret , plus à vero deflectere poteris , quam nos circa nostra Pinnacidia , quae tanto spatio ab invicem removentar . Ut taceam , quod intersectio filorum minimas Stellas tibi tegat , &c.

For English Readers thus ,

Add to this , That if at any time the Observator chances not to look directly and precisely through the midst of the Glasses ( as believe me it may often happen ) some Varieties may easily intermingle with the Observations , which in time may egregiously deceive the Astronomer . Moreover , seeing the Needle or cross Threads , do stand so close to the Eye-Glass , and near the Eye of the Observator ; I question whether these Sights , so near the Eye , can discover the smallest Stars much more accurately , than our plain Sights , which are distant from each other Six or Nine Feet . For , tho by these Telescopick Sights , one may see the Object more distinctly ; yet because they are so nigh to the Eye , one may err , more than ●tis possible by our plain Sights , that are so far asunder ; so that I shall take no farther notice of another Inconvenience , which is , that the Intersection of the Threads shall cover the smallest Stars from your Sight .

That Hevelius did not rightly apprehend the Nature of Telescopick Sights , is manifest by this Objection which he makes against them , from the shortness of the Line of Collimation , which he imagins no longer , than between the Eye or Eye-Glass , and cross Hairs ; but is really as long as between the Object-Glass and cross Hairs : As shall be evident from what I shall now lay down .

Wherein I shall briefly explain their usual Fabrick or Contrivance ; their adjusting to a plain Ruler , Cylindrick , or square Tube ; their adjusting to Quadrants , Sextants , and other Instruments ; and the Dioptrick Reason of their Performance and Exactness .

( 3. ) And first , the Fabrick or contrivance of these Telescopick Sights is briefly thus , Tab. 39. Fig. 1. Their Fabrick or Contrivance . T. 39. F. 1. Choosing an Object-glass g c l and convex-Eye-glass o p proper for the length of the Ruler or Tube● g o p l which we are to use . Let us take care that the Object-glass be pretty well centred ( by Chap. True Centration of Glasses not absolutely requisite . 4. Sect. 4 ▪ of this part ) but in this particular the greatest exactness is not requisite ( whatever Pere Cherubin d●Orleans may say to the contrary , in the second Tome of his Vision Parfait . Paris 1681. fol. in his description of Levels . pag. 23 , 81 , 106 , 108 , 109 , &c. but chiefly pag. 107. wherein the Friar is most grosly mistaken ) 't is sufficient , if the Glass be pretty nigh the matter , as usually most Glasses are , immediately out of the Workmans hands . This Object-glass and Eye-glass are each to be fixed strongly on a brass Ring in the Ruler at their proper distance . And exactly in the Focus of the Object-glass f m d i in an other brass Ring are strain'd the finest cross-Hairs f d , i m ; This Ring is contrived to be moveable to the Right and Left hand , towards f , or towards d , and also ( if the nature of the Instrument , to which we affix these Sights , require it ) upwards and downwards ; and to be steadily fixed in any posture by screws or otherwise . The Mechanick contrivance where of is obvious enough , and needs not here be described , every one pleasing himself in his own way .

By the Doctrine in the first part 't is manifest , that this Tube being thus disposed and presented before a Distant Object ABC , the Picture or Image of the Object is projected in the Focus of the Object-glass f e d ; and this Image in the distinct Base is at the plain of the Cross-hairs . Wherefore all the Rays that compose this Image , which escape , or do not fall on , the Cross-hairs , shall arrive at the Eye freely , and distinctly . But the Points in the Image , which are projected , and fall just on the Cross-hairs , are hid by the Cross-hairs from the Eye : and the Hairs themselves appear as if they were really stretch'd upon the very Object . For they are extended in the distinct Base , which , in this kind of Telescope , is the Locus apparens of the Object , by prop. 50. schol . At the same time the Hairs themselves appear very distinctly to the Eye q in the outward Focus of the Eye●glass by prop. 32 , 33. schol .

We may then conceive , that there is some one Point in the Object , as suppose B , which sending a Cone of Rays on the Object-glass , the Principal Ray of this Cone , or the Axis thereof , after passing the Object-glass , runs parallel in ce to the side of the Ruler or Tube l p. Wherefore , if the intersection of the Cross-hairs , e , without removing or stirring the Object-glass in the Tube , be brought to meet with this Line , or to cover this Point B in the Object , and be there strongly fixed : Whatever Point , in any Object , shall hereafter be found covered by this crossing of the Hairs ; we may be assured that this line of Collimation , viz. the line from the Eye to this point in the Object or the line from this Intersection e to the point in the Object , runs parallel to the side of the Ruler or Tube , and therefore the side of the Ruler is directly pointed towards that mark in the Object . Respect being had to the Breadth of the Ruler .

In like manner , supposing the sides of the Tube were in the lines D E , F G ; and the Object-glass fixed upon it in the posture expressed in the Figure . We may conceive some point A in the Object , the Axis of whose Cone of Rays A c d after passing the Object-glass , runs parallel to the sides D E , F G. If then the Intersection of the Cross-hairs e , without stirring the Object-glass in the Tube , be brought downwards to d , so that it may meet with the line c d , and cover the point A in the Object , and the Ring of the Cross-hairs be there fixed . Whatever point in an Object shall hereafter be found covered by this crossing of the Hairs , the line from the Intersection of the Hairs to this point in the Object runs parallel to the sides of the Tube or Ruler D E , F G. And therefore we may be sure , the sides of the Ruler are directly pointed towards the mark A in the distant Object . Respect being had to the Rulers Breadth .

For from whatever point on the inner surface of the Object-glass ( how thick soever it be , or how ill soever centred ) the Ray c d emerges ; no other Ray can emerge from that same point , and fall on the point d , but it must necessarily be a principal Ray or Axis of some Cone , and must run parallel to the side of the Ruler D E. For whatever Optick Angle the length A B in any Object subtends ; that length shall be projected by this Object-glass in d e subtending the same Angle d c e.

(4) Wherefore we now come to shew how to find out the Ray c d , Adjusting them to plain R●lers or Tub●s . that runs parallel to the side of the Ruler D E ; or how to rectifie the Cross-hairs on the Ruler .

And first for , Exact●y determining the Focus of the Object-Glass adjusting the Cross-hairs at their exact distance from the Object-glass , that is , in its exact Focus . This is easily performed thus , Let us look at some Object distant 3 or 4 miles ; and moving or shaking our Eye before the Eye-glass upwards and downwards , or to one and t'other hand , let us observe whether the Cross-hairs seem to move , or dance , upon the said Object : for if it do , then the Cross-hairs are not at their exact distance from the Object-glass ; but they must be moved farther from or nigher to the Object-glass ; till the Eye , looking at such a distant Object , and moving before the Eye-glass , perceives the Cross-hairs , as it were , fixed and immoveable on the Object .

( Note . This is the way for exactly determining the Focal length of an Object-glass , to which I have referred in Chap. 4. Sec. 3. )

If in raising the Eye , the Object seems to rise on the Croshairs ; or in depressing the Eye , the Object seems to fall down on the Cross-hairs , or if in depressing the Eye , the Object seems to rise on the Cross-hairs , then are the Cross-hairs too nigh the Object-glass : but if in raising the Eye , the Object seems to sink or fall on the Cross-hairs ; then are the Cross-hairs too far from the Object-glass . All which will be evident from Tab. 39. f. 2. wherein let AB be a distant Object , whose middle point C is projected by the Object-glass , D at k. Let m n 1 be the Cross-hairs too nigh the Object-glass and m n 2 the same too far from the Object-glass e , f , g , the Eye placed at three different stations . In the case of the first Cross-hairs , if the Eye rise from e to f , it perceives the point k depressed from 1 to ● , or if the Eye fall from e to g it perceives the point k raised from 1 to l : and here the Cross-hairs are too nigh the Object-glass . But in case of the second Cross-hairs ; if the Eye rise from e to f , the point k seems to rise on the Cross-hairs from 2 to r ; or if the Eye fall from e to g , it perceives the point k fallen from 2 to s : and in this case the Cross-hairs are too far distant from the Object-glass . But if the Cross-hairs are exactly in the Focus at k , let the Eye rise or fall , the Cross-hairs seem fixed and steddy on the Object . And this is the first thing requisite for adjusting these Sights .

This I have borrowed from my own Sciathericum Telescopicum , Published at Dublin 1686. quarto . And I hope , one may be allow'd to transcribe from himself without being called a Plagiary .

When this Affair is well adjusted ; we may proceed to the second Rectification , which consists in making the line of sight , mire , or collimation , exactly parallel to the Sides of the Tube or Ruler , to which the Telescopick Sights are to be adapted . And for the easier obtaining of this , we are first to be ascertain'd , that even the two sides of the Ruler or Tube are exactly parallel . And hereof we may be informed after this manner . T. 39. P. 3. Tab. 39. Fig. 3. On an even board draw the right line D H I B , let A B C D be a Ruler , to which the Telescopick Sghts are to be fitted , E the Ring carrying the Object-glass , F the Ring carrying the Cross-hairs , G the Snout carrying the Eye-glass . To the line B D apply the side B D of the Ruler , and looking through the Glasses observe the point in an Object distant a mile or two whereon the Cross-hairs fall . Then remove the Ruler , and apply its other side AC to the line BD , and observe whether the Cross-hairs fall on the same point of the Object , as before . If they do so , then are the sides of the Ruler A C , B D , parallel ; if no● , then the sides are not parallel . The reason that so remote an Object m●st be chosen , is , that the Breadth of the Ruler may subtend an imperceptible Angle in a circle whose Radius is the distance of the Object from the Object-glass .

Or otherwise , In the plain Board strike two round brass-wire Pinns . Suppose H , I , which having their roundness from their being drawn , must needs have their sides parallel . To these Pins apply one and t' other side of the Ruler , and observe as before .

Having thus found , or made the two sides of the Ruler ( or four sides of the Tube , if need be ) parallel ; the next thing is to make the line of Collimation L K parallel to these sides ; or to bring the Intersection of the Cross-hairs e to meet with the Axis LK of some of the Radious Pencils , which Axis , after passing the Object-glass , runs parallel to these Sides

To effect this ( Tab. 39. f. 4 , 5 ▪ ) Tab. 39 Fig. 4 , 5 ; we are to raise the plain Board A B edgwife on the Board of a window or table CD , so that we may rest or sustain the Ruler or parallelipiped Tube a b c d e f g h , on the round Pins i , k : then looking through the hole in the end g h d c designed for the Eye , let us observe the point in a far distant Object , which falls exactly on the Intersection of the Cross-hairs . Afterwards , let us invert the Ruler or Tube ( as we have it in fig. 5. ) making the side a b c d , which in fig. 4. was uppermost , now undermost in this fig. 5. by which means , the side of the Tube a d h e , which in fig. 4. was farthest from the Board , in fig. 5. is next the Board . Then looking through the Tube , let us observe , whether the Cross-hairs fall now on the same point in the Object , as in the first posture : If they doe agree exactly , then is the line of collimation parallel to the sides a h , b g ; if they do not , but fall to the right hand apparently of the said point in the Object , then are the Cross-hairs to be removed ( by whatever Contrivance they are made moveable ) to the Left hand ( the contrary requiring the contrary ) , so that the Tube continuing in this latter posture , the cross-Hairs may cover a Point in the Object , middle between the Point covered in the posture of Fig. 4. and in the posture of Fig. 5. at the first sight . And thus by frequent Repetitions and Tryals , we at last bring all to rights . After the same manner that we have rectified the Line of Collimation to run parallel to any two parallel Sides of the Tube , we may rectifie it to a Parallelism with the other two parallel Sides of the Tube ( supposing the Ring that carriers the cross-Hairs to have all the Motions requisite to such Rectification ) . And so we fix all strongly , chiefly the Object-Glass and cross-Hairs ; and the Operation is compleat .

By this Method the Line of Sight of any Cylindrick or square Tube may be made to run parallel to its Sides , for many Operations and Observations Mathematical and Natural : Amongst others , for finding the Declination of the Magnet , according to the Methods lately proposed by Mons. Hautefeville , and M. Sturmius Sturmi●s Mistake . in the Iournal des Scavans , 23. Aug. 1683. And in the Acta Eruditorum , Lipsie , Ann. 1684. Decemb. And for want of this Method ; what Mons. Sturmius says in the foresaid Act. Lips . pag. 579. is very defective . For thus he , Sola Tubi locatio , ut Axis Visionis per medias Lentes excurrens Meridianae Lineae exacte respondeat , difficulties quippiam habere videbatur ; verum & huic infirmitati praesens , uti credo , inventum est Remedium , &c. And the Remedy he tells us is , That the Tube be made a Parallelipped of Wood or Brass ; for then , says he , Applying the Side of your Tube to the Meridian Line , the Axis of Vision will be parallel to the said Meridian Line . But with the Leave of so Great a Man , I deny this ; unless first it be rectified ; so that this Axis runs parallel to the Side of the Tube . And let us take what care soever possible for truly centring the Object-Glass , and placing it , and the cross-Hairs exactly in the Tube ; we must after all rectifie these Sights by some such Method as I have laid down , or else we may be egregiously deceived . And on this account , Cherubins Gross Error . all the Levels and Instruments , to which Pere Cherubin D'Orleans has adapted Telescopick-Sights , and which he has so neatly and sumptuously described by curious Schemes , and a large Volume , La Vision Parfait . Tome II. A Paris 1681. Fol. are deficient and useless . For he places the whole Rectification of this Line of Collimation in the true Centration of the Glasses , pag. 107. And rejects the Right Rectification by moving of the cross-Hairs as erroneous , pag. 170. But in this the Friar betrays his Ignorance ; for tho the true Centration of the Object-Glass be of good Convenience and Advantage ; yet it does not perfect the Instrument without farther Rectification ; as being impossible to be obtained to sufficient accuracy ; and therefore we must have recourse to some such Method as foregoes .

I have hitherto mentioned only two of the finest cross-Hairs to be extended as a Mensurator in the Focus of the Object-Glass : But for some Uses , perhaps the finest Silver , or Gold Wire , is better ; as not being disordered by Heat and Cold : Or else , See the end of this Chapter . the Point of the smallest and most curious Needle , on whose Ex●remity , the smallest Telescopick-Star may be visible .

When these Telescopick Sights Constancy and Security of these Telescopick-Sights . are rightly adjusted in the Tube , and strongly fixt in their due Posture by Screws , and all covered over from outward Injuries and Accidents , they are of all Sights the most constant and lasting , and the least subject to be disordered : So that , when one finds the Great Hevelius objecting against them , their Aptness to be out of order , one would think the most commodious Fabrick of them was never explained to him ; tho I am sure , his Instructor Mr. Hook was as able , as any in the World , to inform him rightly in this Matter .

( 5. ) I come now to the Rectification of these Sights on Quadrants and Sextants , To Quadrants , Sextants , &c for taking Angles . This is done either before or after the Divisions into Degrees , &c. are made on the Limb of the Quadrant . If it be done before , then we suppose the Telescope T L ( Tab. 39. Fig. 6 , 7. Tab. 39. Fig 6 , 7. ) fixt to the Quadrant , which we suppose continued a little farther than the Fourth part of a Circle . Choosing then an Object pretty near the Horizon ; let us look through the Telescope , in the usual Posture of Observation , as Fig. 6. and observe the Point in the Object marked by the cross-Hairs ; and at the same time we are to note most nicely the Point c , which the Plumb-Line f c g , hung from the Centre f of the Quadrant , cuts on the Limb. Then we are to invert the Quadrant into the Posture of Fig. 7. ( which is easily done by the usual Contrivances for managing great Quadrants , by tooth'd Semicircles and endless Screws ) keeping still the Telescope T L nighly upon the same height from the Ground , as before ) unless the Object we look at , be so far distant , that the Breadth of the Quadrant subtends but an insensible Angle . But yet for certainty , 't is better to keep the Telescope , as 't is said , upon the same height from the Floor ) ; then direct the Telescope T L , that the cross Hairs may cover exactly the same Point in the Object , as before in the Posture of Fig. 6. And hanging now the Plumb-Line a f g on the Limb of the Quadrant ; let us remove it to and fro , till we find out the exact Point a , from which the Plumb-Line being hung , shall most nicely hang over the Centre of the Quadrant . f. Then carefully marking the Point a , let us divide the Arch c a into two equal Parts in b ; and drawing b f , the Point b is the Point from which we are to begin the Divisions of the Quadrant : And the Line of Collimation through the Telescopick-Sight , stands exactly at Right Angles to the Line b f. So that the Quadrant b f d being compleated and divided , the said Line of Sight through the Telescope runs exquisitely parallel to the Line f d.

In the next place , supposing the Quadrant b f d truly compleated and divided ; and that we designed to fix thereto the Telescopick-Sight T L ; so that the Line of Sight may run exactly at Right Angles to the Line b f , or parallel to the Line d f. We are to do as in the foregoing Praxis . And if in dividing the Arch ac , we find its half exactly coincident with the Point b , we have our desire . But if it differ from the Point b , and fall between b and d , then the Line of Collimation through the Telescope stands at an obtuse Angle with the Line b f ; and the Instrument errs in excess : If this half Arch fall without b and d , then the Line of Collimation makes an acute Angle with the Line b f ; and the Instrument errs in defect . And by often Tryals , we are to remove the cross-Hairs within the Tube , so much , as is requisite to correct this Error . And when we have thus rectified them to their due place , there they are to be strongly fixt . Or else , in Observations taken by this Instrument , we are to make allowance for this Error ; by subtracting from ( if it be in excess ) or by adding to ( if it be in defect ) each Observation so much , as we find the Error to be .

Then reason of this Rectification is most plain ; for 't is manifest , that c f d ( Fig. 6. ) wants of a full Quadrant , as much as a f d ( Fig. 7. ) exceeds a Quadrant . So the difference of the two Arches in the two Postures being a c ; half this difference b c added in Fig. 6. or a b subtracted in Fig. 7. makes b d a compleat Quadrant .

If we find our Instrument err in taking Angles , and we desire to know the Error more nicely , than perhaps the Divisions of the Instrument it self will shew it : We are to do thus ; Let us observe diligently the Object pointed at , in the Posture the Instrument discovers its Error ; and the Object pointed at when the Instrument lies truly . Then , with a large Telescope and Micrometer ( as is used in taking the Planets Diameters , as shall be declared hereafter , Sec. 7. ) : Let us take the Angle subtended at the Object-Glass of the Quadrants Telescope by the length between these two Objects , and we obtain the Error of our Instrument most nicely . Thus for Example ; Supposing the Quadrant b f d already accurately divided , and that the Plumb-Line , Fig. 6. plays over the Point c : And upon the Inversion of the Instrument , Fig. 7. we find that before we can get it to play exactly over the Centre f , we must hang it over the Point e ; so that the Arch e b exceeds b c by the Arch e a ; 't is plain that the Angle e f a is the Error of the Instrument : For had the Plumb-Line hung over a , and over the Centre f in this latter Posture , the Instrument had been exact ; because a is as much on one side b , as c is on t'other side b. Wherefore e f a being the Angle , by which our Instrument errs in observation : Let us turn the Instrument into the usual Posture of Observation , as in Fig. 6. and hanging the Plumb-Line on the Centre f ; let us bring it to play nicely on the Point e , and observe what distant Object is covered by the cross-Hairs : Then let us bring it to play exactly on the Point a , and observe likewise what distant Object is pointed at by the Telescope-Hairs . Lastly , by a large Telescope and Micrometer , let us measure the Angle between these two Objects , and we shall have the Angle of Error much more nicely , than 't is possible the Angle e f a should be given by the Divisions on the Limb of the Quadrant e a. And thus much for adjusting a Quadrant .

A Sextant is rectifi'd in like manner ; If we consider ( Tab. 39. Fig. 8. ) T. 39 F ● . Rectification of a Sextant . that if from the Centre f to the beginning of the Divisions d there be drawn the Radius f d ; and it be divided equally in c ; and from c there be suspended the Plumb-Line c b : When the Plumb-Line hangs over the 60th Degree at b ; then the Line f d lies horizontal : And consequently , if the Line of Collimation through the Tube be parallel to f d , this Line also lies horizontal . To try which , Whilst the Sextant stands in this Posture , observe the Object marked by the cross-Hairs ; then invert the Sextant ; and over the Point b hang the Plumb-Line ; and when from the Point b the Plumb-Line hangs over the middle Point c , then again is the Line f d horizontal in this Posture . Mark then , whether the cross-Hairs cover the same Object as before : If they do , then the Line of Collimation is parallel to f d : If they do not ; but the Point in the Object marked in this latter Posture be higher than the Point marked in the first Posture , the Instrument errs in excess ; if it be lower , the Instrument errs in defect . And either we are to remove the cross-Hairs , till we bring all to rights , and there fix them : Or by the Methods before laid down in the Rectification of the Quadrant , we are to find the Quantity of this erroneous Angle , and to allow for it in Observation .

In Instruments furnished with two pair of Telescopick-Sights , Rectification of a movable Sight . one on a fixt Arm , and t'other on a moveable Arm ( by the Ancients termed an Alidade ) ; 't is easie rectifying the Sights on the moveable Arm thus : After the Sights on the fixt Arm are rectifi'd by what foregoes ; bring the Index of the moveable Arm to the beginning of the Divisions on the Limb of the Instrument , be it Quadrant or Sextant , &c. 't is then manifest , that the Line of Collimation through the movable Telescope ( if it be right ) should lye parallel to the Line of Collimation through the fixt Telescope . Observe therefore , whether the cross-Hairs in both Telescopes do at the same time cut the same Star , or fall on the same Point in an Object distant three or four Miles . If they do , then the movable Telescope agreeing with the fixt , and the fixt being supposed rectifi●d to the Divisions on the Instrument , the movable is right likewise . But if the Hairs in the movable Telescope do not agree in making the same Point with the cross-Hairs in the fixt Telescope ; then the Hairs in this movable Telescope are to be removed ( by whatever Contrivance there is for that purpose ) and brought to rights , and there fixt .

There are other Methods propounded for rectifying Telescopick-Sights on other sorts of Instruments , by means of Observations towards the Zenith , as our former Methods have been imployed towards the Horizon . But 't is sufficient here to lay down only what foregoes , as being of the greatest and most frequent use : Referring for the others to M. Picard● s Treatise of the Measure of a Degree of a great Circle of the Earth ; publish'd at the end of Memoirs for a Natural History of Animals , &c. By the Academy Royal at Paris ; lately translated into English , and printed at London , 1688. Fol.

Before I quit this Point , Further Vse of a Telescopick-Ruler it may not be amiss to intimate one Use , to which a plain Ruler furnished with Telescopick-Sights ( such as is expressed Tab. 39. Fig. 3. ) may be apply'd ; and that is , not only for trying the exquisite straitness of either of its own Edges , and ▪ parallelism of its own two Sides ; but also , for the ready Tryal of the same in any other Ruler : For 't is but affixing ( by a little Cement , or otherwise ) this Telescopick-Ruler over the Ruler to be try'd , and resting the Edge of this latter against the Pins H , I , and gently sliding the Edge alongst these Pins , and always touching them ; looking all the while through the Telescope , observe whether the cross-Hairs do steadily adhere to the same Point in an Object : For if the Edge of the Ruler have the least irregular Crookedness , th● cross-Hairs will move from the Point first observed . And this shall detect the least Curvity in the Edge of a Ruler ( especially if the Ruler be long , and the Distance of the Pins be considerable ) that shall escape the most exquisite Eye of a Workman . The way of trying the Parallelism of the two Sides of this latter Ruler , is the same with what foregoes for the Telescopick-Ruler it self : For when the Telescopick-Ruler is adjoyned over the other , they may both be taken but as one Ruler with Telescope-Sights affix'd .

( 6. ) I come now to the last thing proposed concerning Telescopick-Sights ; Dioptrick-Reason of their Performance ▪ and that is , To shew the Dioptrick-Reason of their Performance and Exactness . But herein there will be little requisite to be added to what foregoes , both in the First Part concerning Telescopes in general , and to what is laid down in this Chapter concerning Telescopick-Sights . 'T is manifest by Experiments , that the ordinary Power of Man's Eye extends no farther than perceiving what subtends an Angle of about a Minute , or something less . But when an Eye is armed with a Telescope , it may discern an Angle less than a Second . The Telescope that magnifies distinctly the Appearance of Body , magnifies also distinctly the Appearance of Extension , Space , and Motion through this Space ; so if the Minute-Hand of a Watch , which can but just be perceived to move , be looked upon with a Magnifying-Glass , we shall see it give a considerable Leap at every Stroak of the Balance . And thus likewise the slow diurnal Motion of the Sun or Stars , which is hardly perceivable by the bare Eye , unless assisted by an Instrument of a vast Radius , is most easily perceived through an ordinary Telescope of 18 Inches long : Insomuch that we may determine to the greatest Niceity and Exactness , when a Star passes just over the cross-Hairs , even to the single Beat of a Second-Pendulum . And let an Object in the Heavens rise never so little , the Image in the Distinct-Base falls correspondently at the cross-Hairs ; and the Eye , by means of the Eye-Glass , perceives this Motion , be it never so small . Thus suppose ( Tab. 39. Fig. 1● ) that a Star rise from B to A , the Image falls at the cross-Hairs in the Distinct Base from e to d ; then by means of the Eye-Glass o p , the Space e d is mightly magnified , and consequently the Angle B c A , equal to e c d by which the Star is risen , is made most sensible to the Eye q. By whatforegoes in the First Part concerning the magnifying of this sort of Telescope .

By this we may perceive , how the Noble Hevelius Hevelius Mistake farther manifest . was mistaken in his Estimate of these Sights ; when he imagin'd the Line of Collimation therein was no longer than between the cross-Hairs and Eye-Glass : Whereas this Distance is not at all to be consider'd in their Performance ; the Line of Collimation being full as long as the Distance between the Object-Glass and cross-Hairs . I am perswaded , had he been rectifi'd in this particular , he would never have adhered so obstinately to the Use of plain Sights upon his most costly Instruments . Tho I must confess , 't is difficult to wean a Man from the Use of what he has been accustomed to for so many Years ; and upon the Exactness of which , the Accuracy of all his former Labors did depend .

As to all other Objections which he makes against them , His other Objections answe●ed . as that they are easily disordered , that the Glasses are easily vitiated by the Breath of the Observer , &c. They are not of any the least moment . For 't is manifest , they may be contrived so , as to be more secure , and less subject to Injuries , than any other plain Sights whatsoever : And in this particular , Telescope-Sights are so far from being obnoxious , that certainly they are preferable to the best contrived plain Sights ; for what can be more simple and easier preserved , than the forementioned small ( but strong ) Brass Rings defended by a Tin or Brass● Tube covering all ? When once these are adjusted and fixt , nothing can possibly injure them . 'T is true , the Breath of the Observer , if puft into the Telescope , will fully the Eye-Glass ; but how easily is this avoided ? Who is it goes purposely to make a speaking-Trumpet of a Telescope ? The other most considerable Objection against their Use is , That in dark Nights , at the smaller Stars , the cross-Hairs in the Telescope require a little enlightening , or else they are invisible , and cannot be seen when the Star just applies to them . This is so easily remedi'd , by admitting to them , through a small opening purposely left in the side of the Tube , the least glimmering Light of a Lanthorn ; or by placing a Lanthorn a little aside before the Object-Glass ; that 't is not worth mentioning as a Difficulty , much less is it to be made an Argument for their utter rejection . As to what he says of the Hairs being so gross as to cover the smaller Stars , this only relates to the Material we employ ; and the finest Silk-Worms Clue will be found small enough almost to bisect the smallest Stars : If not , let us use the finest Needle , on whose slender Point we may distinctly receive the most minute Star .

And thus much concerning Telescopick-Sights ; Farther Vses of Telesscopick-Sights . from whose application to Mathematick-Instruments , Astronomy , and Geography may expect their utmost Advancements . And even Natural Philosophy it self may hereby receive the greatest Help , when we consider how Telescopes may be apply'd to many Experiments therein ; amongst others , to make the most nice Hygroscope ; and has already been used for accurately determining the capricious Variations of the Magnet . Telescopick-Sights have been already successfully apply'd to most exquisite Levels ; wherein Mons. Picard in his Curious Treatise Du Nivellement has prevented any farther Explication : And I doubt not , but every Day will find new Uses for these Sights . Amongst others , I 'll presume to mention my own Telescopick-Dial already publish'd , Ann. 1686 : A Contrivance , which , without Vanity I may ●ay , has not displeased at Home , and has been well received Abroad .

( 7. ) The next Telescopick Instrument which I shall explain , Adapting the Micrometer to a Telescope . is the Micrometer . Concerning the Invention of this Ingenious Instrument , I have only this to say , That for the Honour thereof , there are several Competitors : Mons. Petit , Surveyor of the Fortifications in France , was the first that publish'd to the World the rough Draught hereof , 12. Mar. 1667 ▪ Vid. Iournal des Scavans , 16. May 1667. After him Mons. Azout , another Ingenious Frenchman , publish'd a Tract concerning the exact Mensuration of the Planets Diameters , wherein he seems to challenge the Invention of this Instrument to himself and Mons. Picard , Iourn. des Scavans , 28. Iuin . 1667. and Philosoph . Transact . Num. 21. pag. 373. But last of all a Candid Englishman of our own , Mr. Rich. Townley , does vindicate the first Contrivance hereof to its true and original Author , Mr. Gascogne an English Gentleman , who was kill'd in King Charles I. Service , Vid. Philosoph . Transact . Num. 25. pag. 457. wherein Mr. Townley ( who is of undoubted Credit ) asserts , Inventor of the Micrometer . that Mr. Gascoigne made and used this Instrument before the Civil Wars in England : And that Mr. Townley had then in his Custody two or three of these Instruments first devised by Mr. Gascoigne ; to which Mr. Townley himself had added some considerable Improvments . All which , with the exact Fabrick , and fitting of the Body of the Instrument to a Telescope , we shall find accurately described in Num. 29. p. 541. Philosoph . Transact . to which I shall therefore refer the Reader ; and shall hint only such things concerning it in this place ; as may be there wanting for the clearer Instruction of the unexcercised Beginner .

First therefore for a brief Description thereof ( as much as is requisite to maintain the order of our Discourse ) ; 't is in short this . In the Focus of the Object-Glass of a Telescope , there are placed two fine parallel Hairs , or smooth Edges of Brass Plates ; these are made by Screws to open or close at pleasure , as wide as the Telescope admits . The Turns of these Screws are reckon'd out by proper Indices ; so that in opening the Edges of the Micrometer , the Indices do shew , how many Revolutions of the Screws , and Parts of a Revolution are compleated in that Opening . Suppose therefore the Screws to be of so fine a Thread , as to contain 30. Threads in an Inch length ; then every Revolution of the Screw opens or closes the Edges of the Micrometer a thirtieth part of an Inch. By one Revolution of the Screw , the Index receives one Revolution : Then , the Circumference of the Plate , over which the Index moves ( as the Hand of a Watch over the Hour-Plate ) being divided into 100 Parts ; when the Index moves one of these Parts , the Screw moves the Edges a three thousandth part of an Inch ; ( or the one thirty six thousandth part of a Foot ; by which we find how easie 't is to divide a Foot into thirty six or forty thousand Parts ) And this Motion , tho every Minute , is made , by the Eye-Glass of the Telescope , perceivable .

The way of taking small Angles by this Instrument is thus ; Suppose it were the Diameter of the Moon ; Open the Micrometer till the two Edges do just clasp or touch the Moons Edges ; then observe by the Indices how many Revolutions and parts of a Revolution were compleated to this opening ; and by a proper Table ( the way of composing which I shall shew presently ) , convert these Revolutions and Parts into Minutes and Seconds . In like manner , for observing small Angles on the Earth , the Diameters of the other Planets , the Distances of Iupiter's Satellits from his Body , or the Moons Spots , &c.

But now for making the Table , First we are to fix the Micrometer exactly in the Focus of the Object-Glass ( by the Rules before given , Chap. 5. Sect. 4. ) if it be at very distant Objects we design to use it : Or otherwise in the respective Focus , if it be designed for nigh Objects . We may then compose the Table two manner of ways : The first is more easie , tho not so very certain and accurate , yet exact enough for most Uses . Measure by Inches and Decimal Parts the Distance between the Object-Glass and Micrometer , taking into the Account two Thirds of the Object-Glass's Thickness : Let us suppose the Distance 10 Foot , or 120 Inches , or 120000 Parts ; and we desire to know what Angle is shewn by the Micrometer , being open 2 Inches , or 2000 Parts . The Computation is plain ( Tab. 35. Fig. 4. ) T. 25. F. 4. e y = 120000 , f d = 2000 , then e d = e f = 1000. And As e y : To Rad. : : So e d : To Tang. ∠ e y d = ∠ e y f = 0 ° 28 ' 38 " , and therefore ∠ f y d is equal to 0 ° 57 ' 16 " . Then finding by accurate Admeasurement , how many Revolutions of the Screws or Index , are requisite to open the Edges 2 Inches ; the same compleats the Angle 0 ' 57 ' 16 " . Suppose therefore 60 Revolutions open the Micrometer 2 Inches ; then 60 Revolutions shew , that the Object , that just appears through the Edges at that opening , subtends an Angle of 0°57 ' 16 " . Then 30 ( viz. half 60 ) Revolutions give 28 ' 38 " , viz. half 57 ' 16 " . And one Revolution gives an Angle of 57 " 16 " . and the hundredth part of a Revolution gives 34 " + . And thus the Table is composed to any Number of Parts and Revolutions requisite . But this Way , depending on the exact Admeasurement of the Distance of the Micrometer's Edges ( which can hardly be obtained to sufficient Accuracy , unless we know most nicely what Number of Threads in the Screw there were in an Inch length ; for then we know what Number of Revolutions compleat an Inch ) , 't is not so accurate as what follows , which is ,

The second way for composing the Table , is this : Having fixt the Micrometer at its due Distance from the Object-Glass ; on the side of a Wall or House far distant mark out two conspicuous Objects , that may both at a time be received into the Telescope : Measure nicely the distance of these Objects from each other ; and also the distance of either of them from the Object-Glass ( which we suppose directly before the Point in the Wall middle between the two Objects ) . And by Trigonometry calculate the Angle , which the distance between these two Objects subtends before the Object-Glass . Then looking through the Telescope , open the Micrometer , till the two Edges thereof exactly meet with or embrace these two Objects ; and observe , how many Revolutions and parts of a Revolution are performed in this opening ; for so many compleat the Angle before calculated . And having the Revolutions and Parts that compleat any one Angle , we may easily find all the rest , as aforesaid . For in these small Angles , the Angles and Revolutions are proportional ; that is , if a certain Number of Revolutions give a certain Angle ; half this Number gives half this Angle ; and the hundredth part of this Number gives the hundredth part of the Angle , &c.

In the first Method that I proposed for adapting the Micrometer , and composing the Table , I have allowed for the Object-Glasses Thickness in measuring its distance from the Micrometer . But this Nicety is hardly requisite ; unless it be in short Tubes . For at the Radius of 10 Foot , 1 Inch is the Tangent of 28 ' 38 " ; and at the Radius of 10 foot + one tenth of an Inch , 1 Inch is the Tangent of 28 ' 37 " ; so there is but one Second difference ; tho we should err one tenth of an Inch in admeasuring the distance between the Object - Glass and Micrometer .

I might now mention the Application of a Lattice of fine Hairs in the Focus of the Object-Glass of a Telescope , Other Telescopick-Instruments . as an help to draw distant Objects in Perspective : And of applying there a pretty contrived Parallelogram for the same purpose . But the first is obvious enough by the least intimation thereof ; and the latter is so amply described by Pere Cherubin d'Orleans in his Dioptrique Oculaire ; that 't is needless to add any thing farther in this place .

I conclude this Chapter with a brief hint of what I have found very commodious for many purposes ; Instead of cross-Hairs . that is ; instead of the forementioned cross-Hairs , I have often used a curious piece of clear , thin , flat Glass , whereon there are drawn two very fine cross-Lines by the curious Point of a Diamond , smaller than the most fine Wyre or Hair ; not easily disturbed by a sleight Touch ( unless we break the Glass ) , nor alterable by Heat and Cold. Thus also may we make a Lattice .

CHAP. VI. Of the Invention , Discoveries made by , and other Applications , of Optick-Glasses .

( 1. ) Optick-Glasses unknown to the Ancients . ( 2. ) Pretended Passage in Plautus . ( 3. ) An other Passage in Pliny . ( 4. ) Probably invented about 1300. ( 5. ) Friar Bacon's Pretence . ( 6. ) Inventers of the Telescope . ( 7. ) Optick-Glasses long known before the Telescope . Remark thereon . ( 8. ) Celestial Discoveries by the Telescope . ( 9. ) In the fixt Stars . ( 10. ) In Saturn . Examination of Gallets Hypothesis . ( 11. ) In Jupiter . Motion of his Satellits diligently prosecuted by Cassini and Flamsteed . Satellits all disappearing . ( 12. ) Reflection on the Motions of Saturn's and Jupiter's Satellits . ( 13. ) In Mars . ( 14. ) In the Sun . ( 15. ) In Venus and Mercury . Hence the Falsity of the Ptolemaick Hypothesis . ( 16. ) In the Moon . ( 17. ) Planets whether inhabited . ( 18. ) Telescopes Use on Earth . ( 19. ) Uses of the Celestial Discoveries of the Telescope . ( 20. ) Microscopick Discoveries and Writers . ( 21. ) Viewing nigh Objects with a Telescope . Use thereof in Maniature-Painting . ( 22. ) Measuring Distances at one Station by the Telescope .

( 1. ) THat the Ancients had no knowledg of Optick-Glasses , Optick-Glasses unknown to the Ancients . is most evident from their universal silence in this Matter : Their most learned and inquisitive Philosophers makeing no mention , or the least hint thereof , in their Writings . And doubtless a Contrivance of that universal Use , beneficial to all old Men , both in Reading and Writing , could never have been so concealed , as that not the least Footsteps thereof should remain to Posterity . The only Reliefs they had for their decayed Sights were certain Collyria or Eye-Salves ; and when these fail'd them , they were left almost in the dark for minute and close Objects .

We hear indeed mighty Stories of Archimedes burning the Ships of Marcellus , at a great distance from the Walls of Syracuse . But whether the Matter of Fact be true or false ( as I am very inclinable to believe it false ) , yet there is no mention of his performing this admirable Effect by Optick-Glasses . Perhaps , if there were any such thing done at all ; it was performed by Concave Speculums : And no one denies the Ancients the knowledg of Catoptricks . For Archimedes himself writ a Book ( as 't is said ) De Speculis Ustoriis Parabolicis ; but it has never yet seen the Light .

And yet there are in the World a sort of Men , so devoted to the past Ages , that they will not allow any Improvements of Arts in the modern Generation , unknown to the Ages some Centuries before us . Of this Class was he , ( whoever he was ) that , rather than the Ancients should be ignorant of Optick-Glasses , would forge a Passage in Plautus ( which really is not at all to be found in him ) , for Confirmation of his Opinion .

( 2. ) Pancirollus ( who surely was too candid a Person to be the first Author of this Fiction ) in the Second Book De Rebus Inventis , Pretended Passage in Plautus . Tit. 15. quotes this Passage from Plautus , Cedò Vitrum , necesse est Conspicilio uti : Which , says he , cannot possibly be meant of any other thing but of the Glasses which we call Spectacles . And his Commentator Salmuth takes some pains to cite Christianus Becmannus ( I suppose in his Oratio de Barbarie & Superstitione superiorum Temporum ) for clearing this Passage of Plautus : But yet he is so hard pressed with it , that by no Art , but by main strength he breaks through it , and says , That notwithstanding that Passage , yet certainly Optick-Glasses are a modern Invention .

Whereas , had he been aware , Passage out of Plautus forged . that that Quotation from Plautus is a mere Fiction ; and that no such Passage can be found in all his Writings ; he might easily have avoided its Force , without all that stir . For so we shall find it answered in the Lettere Memorabili del Abbate Michele Giustiani Parte Terza , Let. 16.

( 3. ) Another place cited for the Antiquity of Optick-Glasses ▪ Passage in Pliny . is that of Pliny , Lib. 7. Cap. 53. Hist. Nat. wherein we find the word Specillum . To this Passage we have this Answer in the forementioned Letters of Giustiani ; that Specillum cannot possibly be here meant of a Spectacle-Glass , seeing we find the Expression , Inungit Specillum ; which , says he , cannot be understood of Spectacles , which we rather wipe and cleanse , than anoint and grease . But this Construction of the Learned Authors is much forced and unnatural : For the plain sense of that Passage in Pliny is this . Pliny in that Chapter is giving Instances of the sudden Deaths of many Men ; and telling how they were seized , whilst they were doing so or so , and wholly thoughtless of that fatal moment . Amongst many other Examples , Specil●um ● a Chyru●geon's Probe . he has this ; Super omnes C. Iulius Medicus dum inungit , Specillum per Oculum tra●ens . The meaning whereof is no more , than that the Physician C. Julius was on a sudden seized by Death , whilst he was applying an Unguent to his Patients Eye , and drawing his Probe ( called Specillum ) through it . Whereas , to joyn ●ungit and Specillum , spoils the Grammatical Sense of the whole , and renders it unintelligible .

'T is evident therefore , Optick-G●●sses probably invented about 1300. that from neither of these Passages can we draw any Argument for the Antiquity of Optick-Glasses .

( 4. ) Wherefore seeing we must necessarily allow this Invention due to the Modern Age of the World ; our next Enquiry shall be , Where first to fix it . But herein we shall find but faint Traces to direct us .

Monsieur Menage a learned and ingenious French-man , in his Origini della Lingua Italiana , Menage`s Opinion . Genevae , 1685 , commenting on the Word Occhiali del Galilaei , discourses there of the Time of the invention of Spectacles : And after relating the known Story of Frier Iordan , ( of which more anon ) he has this notable Passage ; That Monsieur du Cange had told the Authot ( Monsieur Menage ) of a Greek Poem , the Manuscript whereof is now in the French King's Library , wherein the Poet , who lived An. 1150 , Jesting on the Physicians of those Times , says of them to this Purport in French , Qu`ils tatent le Poux , & qu'ils Regardent les Excremens du Malade aver une Verre . That they observe the Excrements of their Patients with a Glass . But Mons. Menage is of Opinion , that this was a Transparent Glass , whelm'd over the Vessel , more for the Relief of their Nose against the Stench , than of their Eyes .

But however we may doubt of Spectacles being so ancient as 1150. We may 〈…〉 that about the Thirteenth Century , they were commonly known and used . For ( beside what we shall say hereafter of our Country-man Frier Bacon ) the most learned Mons. Spon in his Recherches Curieuses D' Antiquitè , Dissert. 16. inserts a Letter of Signior Redi to Paulus Falconerius , concerning the Time when Spectacles were invented ; and this he fixes between 1280 and 1311. from the Testimony of a Manuscript Chronicle in Latin , in the Library of the Friers Preachers of St. Katherine at Pisa , Fol. 16. Wherein 't is said , that Frater Alexander de Spina , Vir modestus & bonus , Spina's Pretense . quaeacunque vidit aut audivit facta , scivit & facere . Ocularia ab aliquo Primo facta , & communicare nolente , ipse fecit & communicavit corde hilari & volente . And this Alexander de Spina was a Native of Pisa , and dyed there , An. 1313.

Signior Redi has in his Library a Manuscript written An. 1299. Another Authority . Di Governo della Famiglia de Scandro di Pipozzo . In which there is this Passage ; Mi truovo cosi Gravoso di Anni che non arei Valenza Di Leggere e Scrivere senza Vetri appellati Okiali , Truovati novellamente per Commodità delli Pouveri Veki , quando affiebolano del Vedere . Thus in English , I find my self so pressed by Age , that I can neither read or write without those Glasses they call Spectacles , lately invented , to the great Advantage of poor Old Men , when their Sight grows weak .

The Italian Dictionary , Frier Jordan's Authority . de la Crusca , on the Word Occhiale , makes this remark , That Frier Iordan de Rivalto , who dyed at Pisa , An. 1311. in a Book of Sermons which he writ An. 1305. tells his Auditory in one of them , that it is not Twenty Years since the Art of making Spectacles was found out , and is indeed one of the best and most necessary Inventions in the World .

About the same time viz. 1305. Gordon . Bernard Gordon a famous Physician of Montpelier , in his Lilium Medicinae , thus commends a certain Eye-Salve : Et est tantea Virtutis , quod decrepitum faceret legere Literas minutas absque Ocularibus . And An. 1363. Guido de Chauliac , Chaueiac . in his Book entituled Grand Chiruigery , after proposing several Collyria , saith ; If these or the like will not do , you must make use of Spectacles .

From all which we may be pretty certain , That Spectacles were well known in the 13th . Century , and not much before . But who the Happy Man was , that first hirt upon this lucky Thought , may yet be questioned . 'T is true indeed , if we credit the forementioned Chronicle of the Convent at Pisa , Frier Spina makes as fair a Challenge to the Invention , as the first Author , who refused to communicate it . But I am apt to believe , That , whoever this close Man was that would not impart to Spina , He was a Frier ; and that these Monkish Men , and Iordan amongst the rest , had this Invention whispered amongst themselves , before it was publick ; and that they all had the First Hint thereof from our Country-Man Frier Roger Bacon .

(5) That this learned Frier Bacon who dyed An. 1292. 〈…〉 and lyes buryed at Oxford ) did perfectly well understand all sorts of Optick-Glasses , shall be plainly made out , from the natural and easie sense of his own Words , in his Book of Perspective : Whereby we shall find , that he not only understood the Effects of single Convex and Concave-Glasses ; but knew likewise the way of combining them , so as to compose some such Instrument as our Telescope . This perhaps will be looked upon as a Great Paradox , and as great Partiality in an English Author to his Country-Man ; especially considering , how universally the contrary has prevail`d ; the Votes of most learned Men having conferr'd the Honor of this Invention on other Pretenders . But if , from the unconstrain'd Words of his Books , we plainly make out this Assertion , I hope the Attempt may not be counted unreasonable or partial .

And First in his Book of Perspective Part III. Dis. 2. C. 3. he has these words ; Si vero Corpora non sunt plana ( having treated of them before ) per quae Visus videt , sed sphaerica ; tunc est magna Diversitas , nam vel Concavitas Corporis est versus oculum , vel Convexitas , &c. By which 't is manifest , he knew what a Concave and Convex-Glass was . Moreover , in the same Place Dis. ult. he proceeds thus ; De Visione fractâ majora sunt , nam de facili patet , maxima posse apparere minima , & è contra ; & longè distantia videbuntur propinquissimè , & è converso : Sic etiam faceremus Solem & Lunam & Stellas descendere secundum Apparentiam hic inferius , &c. Thus in English , Greater Wonders than all these are performed by refracted Vision ; For thereby , 't is easily made appear , that the Greatest Object may be represented as very little , and contrarily ; And so likewise , the most distant Objects as just at hand , and contrarily . Hereby also may we bring the Sun and Moon and Stars down here below in Appearance , &c. This , I think , is so express in the Point , that it leaves no room to doubt , but that he had some admirable Secret in Optick Glasses . Add to this what he has in his Epistle ad Parisiensem , of the Secrets of Art and Nature , Cap. 5. Possunt etiam sic figurari Perspicua , ut longissimè posita appareant propinquissima , & è contrario ; Ita quod ex incredibili Distantia legeremus literas minutissimas , & numeraremus Res quantumcunque parvas , & stellas faceremus apparere quò vellemus . Glasses or Diaphanous Bodies , says he may be so formed , that the most remote Objects may appear as just at hand , and contrarily ; So that we may read the smallest Letters at an incredible Distance , and may number things though never so small , and may make the Stars appear as near as we please .

And that these Things may not seem incredible of this Great Man ; who , in that dark , ignorant Age could be master of these admirable Inventions ; I shall refer the Reader , for a more compleat Account of him , to Ant. a Wood Hist. & Antiquit. Universit . Oxoniensis , Lib. 1. Pag. 136. and to Dr. Plott's Nat. Hist. of Oxfordshire , Cap. 9. Sect. 2 , 3 , &c. and Sect. 39 , 40 , 41. Where we may find , how he was persecuted by the ignorant malicious Friers of his Order , as practising Magick and Necromancy : for which they cast him into Prison , and there detain'd him for a long time , some say to his Death , in the 78th . Year of his Age. There we shall find , how he was the first Promoter of the Emendation of the Calendar . compleated afterwards in the Time of Pope Gregory II , But above all , Bacon invented Gunpo●der . his Pretense to the first Invention of Gunpowder seems as well founded , as possible , on this Passage in his Epistola ad Parisiensem , Cap. 6. ( a Hundred years before Barthold . Swartz . lived ) In omnem Distantiam quam volumus , possumus artificialiter componere Ignem comburentem , ex sale Petrae & Aliis ; ( These Alia , in another Manuscript Copy , are , Sulfur & Carbonum Pulvis ) And soon after he adds , Praeter haec ( i. e. Combustionem ) sunt alia stupenda Naturae , nam soni velut Tonitrus & Coruscationes possunt fieri in Aere , imò majore Horrore quam illa quae fiunt per Naturam : Nam modica materia adapta , sc. ad Quantitatem unius Pollicis , sonum facit horribilem , & Coruscationem ostendit violentem , & hoc fit multis modis , quibus Civitas aut Exercitus destruatur . : Igne exsiliente cum Fragore ●●estimabili . Mira haec sint , si quis sciret uti , in debita Quantitate & Materia . By which last Passage we may guess , he had not the way of applying it to a Gun ; though 't is manifest , he was sensible that some such Use might be made of it . But the particular Manner did not offer it self to him at first .

I Confess , Note . I have not by me at this time the Originals , from whence these Passages are quoted ; the present Distractions of our miserable Country having separated me and my Books ; and the Place , where I am , affords not the Copies : Therefore , if in these Quotations I am any wise mistaken , I must not be blamed , acknowledging that I have them at second hand from the forenamed Authors .

But to return to our Optick-Glasses . 'T is evident that Bacon was acquainted with them ; and probably knew how to adapt them in a Telescope . But the long and close Imprisonment he suffer'd before his Death ( for t is said no one was permitted to speak to him ; and that all his Writings , Books and Instruments were seized and burnt ; except only those few Fragments of his which we have saved accidentally ) was the Reason , that we have no farther Advancements of his in this kind transmitted to Posterity . But 't is very probable that the use of single Glasses in Spectacles , as being an Invention of immediate Advantage to Human Life , and in it self very easie and simple , might therefore be presently catched at by the World , and put into Practice : Whilst his other more curious Combinations of Glasses might be lost and forgot . And this I am the more inclinable to believe ; First , because Frier Bacon's Time agrees so well with Frier Iordan's forecited Testimony An. 1305. That it was not then twenty years since the Invention of Spectacles : And secondly , because we find this sort of Monkish Men first take notice of the Invention , before all other Men ; which shews , they had it delivered amongst themselves only , for a while before others .

( 6. ) And thus much concerning Frier Bacon's Pretense . ( 6. ) More Modern Inventors of the Telescope . But that I may not seem altogether partial , I shall here add the Opinions of others , concerning Other Inventors of the Telescope . For I find no other Pretenders to the Invention of single Convex and Concave Glasses , but the forenamed . Borellus has written a small Tract purposely on this Subject , De vero Telescopii Inventore : Wherein , Cap. 12. he seems to give the Invention to Zacharias Ioannides of Middleburg in Zeland , Zacharias Johnson . An. 1590. Another Candidate for this Discovery , he names Iohannes Lipperhoy , or La Prey , Jo. Lipperhoy . An. 1609. A Dutchman also , whom Surturus calls Lippersein . Adrianus Metius Mathematick Professor at Franequer says , Ja. Metius . his Brother Iacobus Metius of Alkmaer was certainly the first Inventor of the Telescope . And if we believe the Italians , we shall have the Honour of inventing this Instrument conferr'd on the incomparable Galileo . But he himself in his Nuncius sidereus confesses , that the first Intimation he received of this Instrument , was , that a Dutchman had then lately made one ; which set him ( Galileo ) upon the thought how to effect it ; which , he says , he successfully discover'd by the consideration of Refraction , and found that a Concave and a Convex Glass rightly adapted would perform what he only heard in general of the Dutch Invention .

But certainly the first Publick notice of this Contrivance came from some of the forementioned Dutchmen ( for Frier Bacon's Hint mentions not the particular Combination of the Glasses ) and therefore the Instrument is deservedly called Tubus Batavus . Though we must confess at the same time , that Galileo , An. 1610. ( see his Nu●cius sidereus ) did first apply this curious Instrument to Celestial Observations ; and had then made such wonderful Discoveries in the Heavens thereby , that all his Philosophick Successors have ever since attempted to climb higher , by lengthening their Ladders , and advancing this Instrument by many Degrees . However I must not here conceal the Pretense of Baptista Porta , Baptista Porta . who , in his Magia Naturalis , Lib. 17. Cap. 10. Printed An. 1589. has these Words , Si utramque ( Lentem sc. Concavam & Convexam ) rectè componere noveris , & longinqua & proxima , majora & clara videbis . But Porta's Character is so well known , that we may easily imagine , he had got this Hint from Holland .

Franciscus Fontana Fontana . a Neapolitan , in his Observationes coelestium terrestriumque rerum , contends that he himself An. 1608. first invented the Telescope , composed of a Convex Object-Glass and Convex Eye-Glass : For the Tubus Batavus , and Galileo's Tube was furnish'd with a Concave Eye-Glass ; and Fontana confesses , it was before his ; and that An. 1618. he first invented the double Microscope . Rheita Rh●ita . in his Oculus Enoch & Eliae , Lib. 4. towards the end , pretends to be the first Discoverer of the erecting Telescope of three Convex Eye-Glasses , as also of the Telescope for looking with both Eyes , called Telescopium binoculum : Of which latter , Cherubin has writ his whole Volume , La Vision parfait , &c.

7 7 Optick Glasses long known before the Telescope . Thus we see , how long the Use of single Optick Glasses was common in the World ( even about 300 years ) before M●n rightly understood their due Application , in the Composition of this admirable Instrument . They had them in their hands , they look'd through them , now a Convex , then a Concave , and admired their Effects , and the Help they gave to disorder'd Eyes : but still were ignorant of the vast Advantage the most acute Eye might receive by them , even to the Increase of its Power , some Thousands of Degrees beyond its natural Abilities . This was reserved for some lucky Chance in a future Age , to be discovered by him that should first be so fortunate , as to adapt these Glasses at their due Distance : for to some such happy Hitt , I imagine the Invention is due ; and not to any profound Thought on the nature and properties of Glasses , that first suggested the Contrivance to the Dutch Mechanick , Remark thereon . Vses of Discoveries not immediately known . that was its Author .

And this does naturally suggest a Thought to us , of some incouragements in natural Enquiries , by the method of experimental Philosophy ; that perhaps we are every day ingaged amongst some particular Things , which we commonly see , handle , use , and are conversant with ; and which have in them some latent , hidden Properties , which , upon a right Application , ( to be discovered perhaps by some lucky Hitt ) may be of the most useful and surprising Effects . And that therefore , we should not despair of making the greatest Discoveries about even the meanest Things . Who could expect to see such Wonders from an easie Composition of three such plain , simple Bodies , Niter , Sulfur , and Charcole , as we daily see from Gunpowder ? And the Property of the Magnet's drawing Iron was commonly known many generations , before it was so happily applyed to guiding a Ship : Who could have thought , by looking upon that dark unpromising stone , that future Ages should use it to such a stupendous and advantageous a Purpose , far exceeding the Virtues of the most illustrious Gemms ? Hence may we learn , not to despise the Products of Nature , even of the meanest Appearance . And let us not say , that any Discovery is useless , since we know not what Time and Posterity may produce from the simplest Truth . And this naturally leads me to the discoveries made by Optick Glasses .

8 8 Celestial Discoveries of 〈◊〉 ●elescope . Galileo ( as is noted before ) is deservedly reputed the first that raised up this Gigantick Instrument , that ventures to climb Heaven and from thence brings down the Stars . He first , was surprized and struck with wonder , to see four little Moons dancing round Iupiter , that from their first Creation to the lucky Moment when he first discovered them , had never struck the eye of any mortal Inhabitant of this Globe . Were these then made for the Use of poor Man , from whose Knowledg they were concealed for 5000 years together ? Vain Man ! that thus presumes to confine the Designs of the Almighty Creator to miserable Dust and Ashes ; when his infinite Power can make Millions of intelligent Beings , and all intelligent after different ways , to serve and praise him : And these perhaps are the Inhabitants of these distant Worlds , Whether all for the use of Man . and of those again infinitely extended beyond these . 'T is true indeed , now these little Planets are discovered , we have happily applyed them to an advantageous purpose ( as shall be shew'd hereafter ) But this we are to esteem as a particular Benefit of Providence to these latter Generations ; and respects not all the general Race of Mankind , that lived and were busie for 5000 years together ; and knew nothing of them . But in this stupendous Enquiry I stop , as not being able to reach it with the longest Telescope .

To keep therefore to our Subject : I shall take the Heavens in order , as they lie ; considering first the uppermost , and so descend down to our Earth , and shall briefly declare the Discoveries made in each , and ( as far as I can attain it ) by whom and when ; with farther References to those Authors , where each particular may be found more fully treated of .

9 9 In the ●ixt Stars . And First , for the Fixt Stars : That whitish Band or Zone , the Galaxia or milky Way , that so irregularly incompasses a great scope in the Heavens , and of which the Ancients could give no tolerable Account , is found by the Telescope to be no other , than an heap of very minute Stars thickly set together ; which , by their great Distance , Smalness and Closeness , appear to the naked Eye , as one united whitish Cloud . In like manner , the Nebulosa Orionis , Praesepe Cancri , &c. are found to be a Congeries of small Stars closely set together , but easily distinguishable by the Telescope . The Pleiades or seven Stars ( tho scarce more than six appear ) are found by an ordinary Glass to be nigh forty . And in the single Constellation of Orion , the Telescope discovers more Stars than the naked Eye can number in all the Heavens . On this Account , the Seed of Abraham , that was to be made numerous as the Stars in the Firmament , may yet ( for ought we know ) admit of Propagations through many future Generations , before it comes up to its Limits . And the number , which Archimedes demonstrated greater than that of the Grains of Sand composing this Globe of Earth , may perhaps fall short of the Stars in the Heavens : For hardly any Corner of the Firmament so dark ; But the Telescope , turn'd towards it , descries Multitudes of glittering Spangles therein .

( 10. ) ( 10 ) In Saturn . From the fixt Stars let us contract our Prospect , and in a vast , long , and almost immense Course homewards , we first meet with Saturn . By his slow Motion he takes State upon him , as carrying about him something more weighty than ordinary . But the short sight percieves nothing thereof , and sees only a plain round Globe , as the rest of the Chorus dancing round the Sun . All his Equipage and Attendants are hid from our View , 'till surveyed more closely by the Telescope : And then behold a mighty Ring parallel to the Equator , bright as the Planets own Face , encompassing round his Body ; very thin , and separated in all Appearance on all sides from his Globe : sometimes appearing broader , sometimes narrower , and sometimes almost vanishing ; then again returning by a regular Period , and resuming by Degrees its former Shape ; which again by degrees it looses according to his own Periodical Motion . But this is not all his Equipage , for besides this Throne of Light , this Majestick Planet is constantly attended by a Guard of five Satellits , that follow his Motion and dance round him continually in a Circle .

Galileo Ga●ileo . was the first that observed any thing extraordinary in Saturns Appearance An. 1610. Octob. as he tells us in some of his Italian Letters : But his Glasses were too short to give the true Shape of this Planet . All that he descry'd was something appendent on each side of him , which he took to be two Globes much less than Saturns own Body ; and therefore he first publish'd ( and at the same time conceal'd ) this Discovery , by transposing the Letters of this Sentence , altissimum Planetam tergeminum observavi . But when the Telescope was better advanced , ( as what Invention is it , that receives not Advancements in Time ? ) the true and genuine Appearance of Saturn began to shew it self , and its regular Changes were taken notice of . But though several Authors writ Treatises of this surprising Appearance , and particularly the celebrated Hevelius Hevelius . ( de nativa Saturni facie ) Hodierna , &c. yet all their Observations were imperfect and deficient ; and chiefly for want of excellent Glasses : Till the incomparable Christ . Hugenius Hugenii Systema Saturnium . has put the last hand to this Affair ; and in his ingenious Treatise , Systema Saturnium , Hag. Comit. 1659.4 ● . has publish'd to the World a compleat History of all Observations of this Planets Appearances with a most ingenious Theory for their Explication . In the beginning of the year 1655. his excellent Person first discovered the biggest of Saturns Satellits with a Telescope of 12 feet , charged with an Eye-Glass of 3 Inches ; afterwards , An. 1656. he doubled that Length , retaining the same Eye . Glass . The Satellit he discover'd , is the Fourth from Saturn ; and in the forenamed Treatise , he gives us the Epochae and Tables of its Motion ; But our most ingenious Countryman , Mr. Halley , deservedly celebrated for his Astronomical Labours , discovered in the year 1682. that Hugenius's Numbers were considerably run out ; and therefore he set himself to correct the Period of this Satellit , which he has done accordingly , Num. 145. Pag. 82. Philosoph . Transact . And in Num. 187. Pag. 299. we shall find Mons. Cassini's Tables of the Motions of all Saturns Satellites , together with their distances from Saturn correspondent to their Periodical Times : Of which more hereafter .

The other four Satellites were all discovered by Mons. Cassini in the Order following . Cassini's Discoveries about Saturn . The third and fifth were first seen by him , An. 1671 , 72 and 73. by a 17 Foot Glass of Campani , and 36 Foot Glass of Divini , and by such another of Borelli . An Account whereof may be seen at large in Num. 92. of the Philosoph . Transact . But the innermost or first , and the second were not seen by him till the year 1684. at which time , having procured Glasses of an extraordinary length , as 80 , 100 , 150 and 200 Feet ; the vast distance and smalness of these Planets could no longer conceal them from his sight . Vid. Philosoph . Transact . Num. 181.

The last thing I shall take notice of , relating to this Planet , Examination of Gallet's Hypothesis . is , That Mons. Gallet , Provost of S. Symphorian at Avignon , in the year 1684 has advanced an Hypothesis for solving its Appearances ; which , as it relates to the Telescope , may p●operly be here considered . I shall therefore briefly propose some of the chief difficulties , that seem to attend this Theory : And that I may not be prolix , I shall suppose the Reader acquainted with what Mons. Gallet lays down in the Iournal des Scavans , An. 1684. May 15. & Iune 12. and in Latin in the Acta Lipsiae , An. 1684. Septemb. Pag. 421.

First therefore , he supposes Saturn and the other Planets , except the Moon , polite Globes , reflecting the Image of the Sun as a Convex Speculum . Which seems not at all to be founded on more than mere Conjecture : For we have no Reason to think them different in this particular from the Moon ; which is found of a rugged uneven Surface .

Thirdly , Mons. Gallet affirms , that the Reason why Iupiter , Mars , &c. are not projected by an Object-Glass , in its distinct Base , with a Ring or Ansae , is because these Planets are nearer to us than Saturn : And therefore in the Projection of Iupiter , the bright Image of the Sun reflected from its polite Surface , is represented by the Object-Glass in its distinct Base , equal to the Representation of Iupiters whole Body ; in the Projection of Mars it is less , &c. But the Distance of these Planets ( even of the nighest ) is so very great , ( and as it were infinite ) in respect of the small Breadth of an Object-Glass ; that in comparison to this small breadth of an Object-Glass , we can make no difference between the Distance of Saturn and even Mercury .

Lastly , the Experiments , on which Mons. Gallet founds his whole Hypothesis , seems not at all to confirm , or in the least wise to respect what he builds thereon . The Phaenomenon arising from reflecting the Sun-Beams by an Object-Glass on a Wall posited obliquely , proceeds from the Object-Glass being consider'd as a Concave Reflecting Speculum , having also another Surface either Plain or Convex besides the Concave , ( as I have noted before , Chap. 4. Sec. 4. ) and yet he superstructs hereon a Theory , for explaining the Appearances of Convex Polite Surfaces , such as he makes the Planets . This will be manifest by Tab. 40. Fig. 4. T. 40. F. 4. wherein , for ease sake , we take a Plano-Convex Glass a b c , and exposing its plain side a e c obliquely to the Suns Rays de , de , de , some of them shall be reflected by the plain Surface a e c into ef , ef , ef ; but others of them entring the Glass run on in ei , ei , ei , ( we do not here consider the Refraction they suffer ) and so falling on the Concave Surface a i b i c ( for so I 'll call it ) are reflected by it , according to the Laws of Spherick Catoptricks : But the Reflections of these immerged Rays I have not expressed , for avoiding Confusion in the Scheme . I acknowledge , the Physical Cause of this latter Reflection , from the Surface of the Glass a i b i c , is perhaps not to be accounted for by Human Understanding ; but the matter of Fact is certain . One should think , when the Rays are arrived at the extreme Points i , i , i , of the hindmost Surface of the Glass , they should , without any of them being reflected at all , emerge from the Glass : But 't is manifest some of them are reflected , and that too , just in the same manner , as if the Surface aibic were a Polite , Opake , Concave Surface ; and not covered by the Surface a e c. They that desire to enquire farther into the natural Cause hereof , may consult Grimaldi Physico-Mathesis de Lumine & Coloribus , Bonon . 1665. 4 ● .

'T is then by the Reflection from this Concave Surface aibic , ( give me leave so to call it ) that the similitude of Saturns Ansae are represented in Gallets Experiment ; and by the Reflection from the Plain Surface aeec , that the Similitude of his Body is represented in the said Experiment . And how this can be accommodated to the Reflection , which Saturn himself makes from his own Body , and to his Appearance through a Telescope , I confess I cannot apprehend . Moreover Gallet's Hypothesis gives no Account of the two dark Spaces on each side the Globe of Saturn , between his Body and the Ansae . For the Experiment , on which he founds his Fancy , shews no such Distinction ; all being inlightened therein : As will be visible to those shall try it .

'T were too tedious in this Place to consider particularly Mons. Gallet's Scheme , and his Particular System of Saturn ; which might easily be shewn defective . But thus much I thought requisite to say in this Place ; because the Theory he proposes is of a Dioptrical Consideration : Because it has never yet been taken notice of by any other : And because he advances it in Opposition to Mons. Hugens System , which carries with it so much Probability .

Iupiter 11 11 In Jupiter . next presents himself less incumbred than Saturn , yet not wanting a Courtly Train : For tho his Guards are but four in number , yet their size and brightness shew their Strength , and their quick Motion round him shews their Diligence .

Galileo Galileo . was certainly the first Inhabitant of this Globe , that ever saw these Satellites , Ian. 7 , 1610. And from that Moment to this , no more could ever be discovered about him : Though Vanity and desire of being the Author of some Novelty , made Frier Ant de Rheita Rheita . proceed so far , as to write a Tract of 5 more Satellits ( 9 in all ) about Iupiter . But Hevelius , in the fourth Chap. of his Selenography , has demonstrated the Frier to be mistaken , and has shewn the small fixt Stars ( only discoverable by the Telescope ) that deceived him .

These Satellites are easily seen by a 3 Foot Glass , and I have just perceived them with one of 15 Inches . But to make exact Observations of their Motions , t is requisite , we use Tubes of 10 and 12 Feet and upwards . From the time of their Discovery , many curious Astronomers have attended their Motions round Iupiter with a diligent Eye ; and have found , that sometimes falling into the Shadow of Iupiter Body , they disappear ; and thence emerging , they again become visible : sometimes they are hid behind the very Globe of their great Lord ; and sometimes being just in his Face , his Splendor overcomes theirs , and they become invisible , as a glimmering Lamp between the Eye and Sun .

Ioh. Alfons Borellus Borellus has publish'd a Tract of the Theoricks of these Medicea Sidera ( so named by Galileo in complement to his great Patron the Duke of Tuscany ) Theoricae Mediceorum siderum , Florent . 1666. 4. But none have laboured more to reduce the Observations of these little Planets to something of Use and Advantage to the World , than the two celebrated Astronomers of the present Age , Cassini and Flamsteed : Cassini . Flamsteed . The former has taken great pains in Publishing Hypotheses , Tables , and Precepts for calculating their Appearances and Eclipses , ( in his Ephemerides Mediceorum siderum , 1668. Bonon . ) in order to setling the Longitudes of Places to a great Certainty . And the latter finding the Numbers of Cassini's Tables not so just to the present Time , from most accurate Observations of his own , taken by the Telescope and Micrometer , has fixt new Numbers , that agree about this time most exactly to the Phaenomena ; but with the Liberty to himself of altering these Numbers , as by future Observations he shall find Occasion ; For he is not so positive as to say , that what he settles ( for 15 or 20 years ) shall be perpetual . What he has hitherto published of this kind may be found dispersed in the Philosoph . Transact . wherein , he has given the World the Catalogues of these Satellits Eclipses for several years consecutively . In Num. 154. Pag. 404. he shews their Uses , and how ( by their Help ) the difference of Longitude betwixt any two Places on Earth , where they should be observed , might be determined : And teaches a Method of finding out , within what space on our Globe any of them are observable . These Directions he repeats in Latin , Num. 165. Pag. 7●0 . for the use of Forreiners . In Num. 177 & 178. with the Catalogue of Eclipses for the year 1686. he describes a small Instrument ; and shews how by the help of it , of the said Catalogue , and of the Tables of Iupiters Geocentrick Places and Parallaxes , the Appearances of the Satellites at any time in that year might be discovered , and delineated by Scale and Compass on Paper . But the Curiosities , which this excellent Astronomer has yet unpublished , relating to this useful Part of Astronomy , are very great and ingenious ; which I hope , in time , he will impart to the World ; as with much Freedom and Generosity , he now communicates them to his private Friends : In the Number of which I am very proud to reckon my self .

Before I quit this Article of the Satellites , Satellites all disappearing . I cannot omit taking notice of an Observation , which , by mere Accident , I made some years ago , of a Total Disappearance of all the Satellites . I had often attended their Motions with a good Telescope of 12 Foot ; and often had them all four conspicous at a time , very often three , frequently two , but never less than one , and this but very rarely ; till An. 1681. Novemb. 2. Hor. 10. p. m. Dublinii St. Vet. there was not one of them visible ; Iupiter there stood by himself , in all Appearance , without his Guards ; and a bold Lucian might have pull'd him from his Throne without Resistance . Some years after , I obtain'd from my learned Friend Mr. Flamsteed his Tables of the Motions of these Satellites ; And the Postures of these Iovial Moons , at that time , are found by them to be as is expressed in Tab. 40. Fig. 3. T. 40. F. 3. The first , third and fourth were just in his Face ; and were therefore drown'd by his Light , and the second was behind his Body . The rarity of this Appearance ( at least to me ) makes me note it so particularly : perhaps those that are more frequently imploy'd in watching their Motions may meet sometimes with the like Conjuctions ; but I believe 't is very seldom . Hevelius , in his constant Attendance on them , for more than a year and half , hit not upon such an Appearance ; as may be seen by the History of his Observations at the end of his Selenographia ; Nor Cassini , as is manifest from his forementioned Ephemerides .

Besides these four little Moons about Iupiter , Jupiter' s Belts . the Telescope discovers other Remarkables even in his Body . As first : his Face is not all of a Colour ; But there are in it brighter and darker Parts ; and these are drawn athwart him , like broad Zones or Belts almost parallel to the Ecliptick , as is expressed in Fig. 3. Tab. 40. T. 40 F. 3.

The last thing that has been observed in this Planet is a Spot , first seen by our Ingenious Mr. Hook May 9. h. 9. p. m. 1665. Jupiter's Spot and Rotation . By this Spot 't is manifest , that Iupiter turns round his own Axis in the space of less than 10 hours , or about 9 ● . 56 ● . Hence the Rotation of our Earth . A very strong Argument to prove , that our Earth may do so likewise ; since Iupiter , who is so considerably bigger than the Earth , has a Motion much more quick than ours in 24h. Kepler , upon the Restauration of the Pythagorean or Copernican Hypothesis , did conjecture , from the Motion of the Primary Planets about the Sun as their Centre , That the Sun moved about its own Axis ; but could not evince it , till future Observations by the Telescope discovered Spots in the Sun , and by them demonstrated , that the Sun revolves on its own Axis , in 25 ¼ days . Iupiter has four secondary Planets moving round him , and he himself in their Centre turns on his Axis : our Earth has a secundary Planet , the Moon , that moves round her once a Month : is it not therefore highly probable , that the Earth also revolves diurnally on its Axis ? For a farther account of this Spot in Iupiter , I refer to the Philosoph . Transact . N. 1. P. 3. N. 4. P. 75. N. 8. P. 143. N. 12. P. 209. N. 15. P. 246. N. 82. P. 4039.

( 12. ) ( 12. ) Reflection on the M●tions of Saturn's and Jupiter's Satellits , even●ing the Order of the C● e●tion . But before I leave Saturn and Iupiter , I cannot but take notice of one admirable Property , for the Knowledge whereof , we are beholden to the Telescope ; and that is , the wonderful Agreement which is found in all the several Systems of our Vortex ; as well between the General System of the Sun , and Primary Planets with the particular System of Saturn's or Iupiter's Planets , as between the particular Systems themselves , in this single Property , That the Periodical Times of the Planets Revolutions are in a sesquialtera Ratio of their Distances from the Centre of the Planet about which they revolve . That is , As the Square of the Period of the first Satellite ( for instance ) : To the Square of the Period of the second : : So the Cube of the Distance of the first from Iupiter's Centre : To the Cube of the Distance of the second from his Centre . This holds most exquisitely true in Iupiter's Satellites , as is noted by the admirably learned Mr. Newton , in his incomparable Treatise , Philosophiae Naturalis Principia Mathematica , Lib. 3. Hypoth . 5. And the same Law of Motion is strictly observed by the five Primary Planets , and the Earth about the Sun . As he notes , Hypoth. 7 , 8. This is also verifyed by Mons. Cassini in the five Satellites of Saturn ; as appears by his Account of them in the Philosoph . Transact . Num. 92. P. 5178. N. 133. P. 831. N. 181. P. 79.

And from hence may we justly fall into the deepest Admiration , that one and the same Law of Motion should be observed in Bodies so vastly distant from each other , and which seem to have no Dependence or Correspondence with each other . This does most evidently demonstrate , that they were all at first put into Motion , by one and the same unerring Hand , even the infinite Power and Wisdom of God , who has fixt this Order amongst them all , and has establish'd a Law , which they cannot transgress . Chance or dull Matter could never produce such an Harmonious Regularity in the Motion of Bodies so vastly distant : This plainly shews a Design and Intention in the first Mover . And with Submission to the Reverend and Learned Divines , I am apt to think , that one Argument drawn from the Order , Beauty and Design of Things , is more forecible against Atheism , than Multitudes of Notional Proofs drawn from Ideas , Apparitions of Specters , Witches , Be●●ty Order and Design of natural Bodies strong Proofs of a 〈◊〉 &c. ( not that these should lose their due Strength ) For besides the Heavens , even the little Globe we inhabit affords us infinite Variety in this kind : And for my own part , I must confess , I can read more Divinity in Mr. Charlton's admirable Musaeum , on a Box of beautiful Shells , of delicately painted Plants , curiously adorned Insects , Serpents , Birds , or Minerals ; than in large Volumes of Notional Writers . For Animals , Plants , and Minerals do yield us abundant Instances , which visibly shew a Design or End proposed ; which , as it cannot possibly consist with Chance , so neither can it be apprehended to have been so ab+aeterno : For 't is absolutely unconceivable , that a thing designed for some End or Purpose , should not be so designed in time , by some designing Being . But I beg Pardon for this Digression , in which I am thus ingaged before I was aware . To return therefore to our Subject .

Mars 13 13 Mars offers himself next ; who , trusting in his own Strength , is attended by no Guards ; But the Prying Telescope discovers in his Face Scars , Spots , and Ruggedness ; as we may find in the Philosoph . Transact . Num. 14. P. 239. &c. By these Spots the acute Cassini has determin'd , Rotation . that he turns on his own Axis once in 24h. 40● . tho others assign his Revolution performed in just half that time ( a Mistake easie enough ) vid. ibidem . The fiery Face of this Planet requires a very good Telescope to view him , and a small Aperture on the Object-Glass : or else this Glaring Light makes but a confused Appearance . But however furious his Beams are , he is beholden for them ( as all the rest of the Planets ) to the great Fountain of Light and Heat the Sun . For what the great distance of Saturn and Iupiter , and their being so much above the Sun ( as I may so speak ) hinders us from seeing , Increases and Decreases . viz. their Increase and Decrease in Light like our Moon , is very visible in the Planet Mars ; who , in his Quadratures with the Sun , and in his Perigeon , may be seen almost bissected , but never corniculated or falcated as the other Inferiours , Vid. Hevelii Selenograph . Cap. 4. P. 66.

14 14 The Sun . S●n's Spots . The glorious Sun does next present ; in whose bright Face , we can hardly expect to find dark Spots . yet such there are , and frequent too . Scheinerus in his Rosa Ursma has published a large Book in fol. of nothing else ; and Hevelius , at the end of his Selenography , has many Observations of these Maculae ; as also of some brighter Spots in the Sun , called Faculae . The Way of observing them is taught at large , in the foresaid Authors ; and is in short , either by admitting the Light of the Sun through a Telescope upon a white Paper , in a dark Room ; or by arming the Eye with a small thin Glass smoaked over a Torch , Lamp , or Candle , and with it looking through a Telescope at the Sun's Body . Sun's Rotation . The only Discovery that has been made by these Maculae , is , that the Sun revolves round his own Axis , in the Space of about 25 ¼ days . But for a compleat and succinct Account of the Theory of these Maculae and their Motions , I refer the Reader to the excellent Mathematician Andrew Tacquet , Astronom . Lib. 8. Tract . 3. Num. 7. 'T is only to be noted , that for these several years past , the Appearance of these Maculae has been much more rare , than when Galileo ( who certainly first discovered them ) Scheinerus , Hevelius , attended their Observations , Sun's Spots rare of late . viz. about 50 or more years ago . About that time , one should seldom see the Sun ●s Face ( no more than now our brighter Beauties here ●elow ) free from one or more black Patches ; but now ( as if they were grown out of Fashion ) he seldom wears any : One in 5 or 7 years hardly appearing : As if now he put them on , more of necessity , to cover an odd Pimple , that may otherwise disfigure his Countenance , than to adorn his Face . How far the Fair Sex should follow his Example , I dare not venture to determine . But from them we naturally fall to Venus .

Venus , 15 15 Venus and Mercury . the brightest Planet in the Heavens . She fears not sometimes even at Noon-day to display her Beauty ; and in this Armour reposing an entire Confidence , performs her Course alone , and free from all other Attendants .

Mercury's Wit and Quickness secures him , therefore he has no Train , but generally shelters himself under the Beams of his potent Lord the Sun .

But both these Inferiour Planets are found by the Telescope to increase and decrease , ●ncrease and Decrease . as our Moon . For sometimes they appear corniculated , sometimes falcated , sometimes gibbous , and sometimes full even on , or nigh to their Conjunctions with the Sun . F●lsity of the Ptolem●●ck Hy+pothesis . By which last Phaenomenon , 't is manifest they move about the Sun , sometimes farther from us , sometimes nigher to us than he : and consequently the Ptolemaick Hypothesis is absolutely false . ( whatever Hyothesis be true . ) And for the Demonstrable Detection of this Error , we are beholden to the Telescope : And I doubt not but Posterity may , by the same Instrument , discover some Hypothesis as positively true : For the Probabilities of the Copernican System are already so strongly confirm'd thereby , that there seems no Room left for any farther Doubt ; But Time and Labour will yet discover farther Proofs . How successfully Mr. Hook has applyed the Telescope to prove the Motion of the Earth , I leave the Reader to judge upon Perusal of his Attempt .

( 16. ) ( 16 ) Discoveries in the Moon . And thus at last are we arrived at home to contemplate our Neighbour the Moon . Her may we properly call our own , as making us the Centre of her Periodical Motion . For , as the Satellites about Saturn or Iupiter move round them ; so moves the Moon as a Satellite about our Earth . Galileo with his Telescope first discover'd great Ruggedness in the Moons Face , after him Langrenus the King of Spain's Cosmographer , attempted to draw her Picture . But the noble Hevelius in his curious and costly Work of Selenography , has perfected this Affair , perhaps beyond Amendment . There may we see the Moons Countenance distinguished in an admirable difference of Parts , both for Shape and Colour . We may there see greater Parts that resemble our Seas , Lakes , Rivers , Islands , Peninsulas and Continents ; other lesser Spots ( almost infinite in number ) that resemble our Mountains , Hills and Vallies . Of the greater Parts , those that are something obscure , may we reckon Seas and Lakes ; and the brighter may we account Land . For just so does our Earth appear , when , from a distant Height we look upon a Mixture of Land and Water enlightened by the Sun . Of the smaller Spots , those that are brightest and shine , are Mountains and Rocks ; and the darker Parts , which are usually encompassed with these brighter Verges , may we esteem Vallies .

Now that some Parts of the Moon are much higher than others , Mountains in the Moon . is as manifest by the Telescope , as that some Parts of our Earth are higher than others . For if we look upon it about the Quarter-days , we shall plainly see the Edge , towards the dark Part , broken and cragged ; and many little bright Spots , that are clearly separated from the rest of the enlightned Part. Which is an evident Proof that these are the high Tops of Eminencies , which receive the Suns Light , before the Parts below them are enlightned . Moreover the Moons Spots cast their Shadows opposite to the Sun , that is , to the Eastward , whilst the Moon is Increasing , and to the Westward , on her Decrease . That these Mountains are very high , is manifest from the way of Measuring them , delivered in Riccioli Almagest . 1. Pag. 208. And Tacquet Geom. Prac. Cap. 8. Prob. 2.

For the better distinguishing these Spots , Names imposed on the Spots . and making them more useful in the Observation of Lunar Eclipses , there are names imposed on them by Authours : Hevelius assigns to them the names of Places here on Earth : Grimaldus and Ri●●iolus give to them the names of famous Mathematicians and Astronomers .

By means of these Spots , Eclips●s accurately observed by t●em . Lunar Eclipses are now much more accurately observed than formerly ; to the great Advancement of Geography and Navigation , in setling the Longitudes of Places . For now the Immersions and Emersions of these Spots from the Shadow of the Earth are most nicely determined .

Moreover , by these Spots the Moon is discovered to have various librating Motions , from East to West , and from West to East , also from North to South , and from South to North. But hereof we cannot now enlarge , vid. Bullialdi Astrom . Philolaic . Lib. 3. Cap. 13. Hevelii Selenograph : Riccioli Almagest . 1. Lib. 4. Cap. 9. Neither is it needful to insist on the Moons Transits over , and Appulses to , fixt Stars and Planets ; which can never be accurately observed but by the Telescope . I cannot tell whether it be worth our while to take notice in this Place , that Mons. Isaac Vossius has published a fantastical Conceit of his own , for explicating the Appearance of the Moons Spots ; in his Liber va●iarum Observationum .

( 17. ) ( 17. ) Planets whether inhabited . And now perhaps we may be allowed to sit down , and think awhile , whether all these Celestial Bodies , that thus dance round our Sun , may not be inhabited . But this Disquisition has been already so ingeniously managed by several , ( particularly by the Reverend Dr. Wilkins Bishop of Chester , in his World in the Moon ; and by Mons. Fontenel his Plurality of Worlds ) that there is little left to be said on the Subject . I shall only add , that there is nothing in Nature , Morality or Religion , that contradicts the Affirmative of this Opinion . And 't is through a narrowness of Thought that some men deny it . They will not think on any other sort of Creatures , than what we see here on Earth ; and presently begin to ask , how should Men possibly live in Saturn's cold Climates , or in the scorching Heat that affects Mercury . But shall we thus confine the Great Creator to our poor Conceptions ? Cannot he that has made a Man , a Whale , an Elephant , a Fly , be able to create indefinite Varieties of Creatures , and all endowed with different Faculties , and various Ways of Perception ? Some adapted to one Planet , others to others ? And all these may be ingaged in different Ways of Life and Thought ; but should all be ingaged in Praising and Serving him that gave them all their Beings .

( 18. ) ( 18. ) Telescopes Vse on Earth . But here I quit these remote Thoughts ; and from viewing the admirable Extent , Beauty , Order and Variety of the Creation abroad , betake my self home to our own Globe . And here we shall not lay aside our Telescope as useless : We may imploy it on various Occasions and divers Concerns of Human Life . The Merchant may with this discern afat his rich-laden Vessels , whose Sides and Sails are swell'd , and look big with imported Wealth . The Seaman may discern his Friend or Foe . The wealthy Countryman may survey his distant Herds , Plantations , and Labourers ; and Generals may observe their wide-spread Troops . But endless would it be to touch on all ; the contriving Head will find it useful , and adapt it to his own particular Concerns on many Occasions , that cannot now be thought of .

19 19 Vses of the Telescopes Celestial Discoveries . And thus much shall suffice in short , concerning the Discoveries made with the Telescope . And now I hope it will not be asked , Cui Bono ? To what End are all these Discoveries ? What Advantage is there in them ? For , if the Advancement of Astronomy have any good in it ; if the furnishing us with a Contemplation from whence we may evince the Power and Wisdom of an Almighty Creator be any Good ; If affording an Opportunity of admiring the vast Extent , Order and Beauty of the Creation be any Good ; I am sure , hereby we reap all these Goods in an ample manner . But supposing that nothing of all these Advantages were at hand just at present , let not the inquisitive Philosopher therefore despond in his Enquiries . The consideration of the Magnet ( as I have noted before ) teaches us what Secret Virtues may lurk in the simplest Things : And what admirable Uses Posterity may raise out of them . The Torricellian Experiment was long apply'd only to Disquisitions concerning a Vacuum , before our incomparable Philosopher the Honorable Mr. Boyle , one of the chief Glories of the English Nation , discovered its Usefulness in predicting the Weather , by which 't is become one of the most pleasant Instruments in the World . But this I say , not so much to encourage men in the Prosecution of useless Enquiries ( for doubtless he is best imployed that can propose the best Advantages to Mankind from his Studies ) But to discourage some men from exclaiming against all Labours as absolutely useless , whose immediate Use they do not apprehend .

( 20. ) ( 20. ) Of the Microscope . And now that we are arrived at home , let us change our Instrument , and take into our hands a Microscope . And indeed with this , our Contemplations may be endless ; all things affording such admirable Appearances , such curious Contexture of Parts , and such delicate vivid Colours ; that the Contrivance of the Almighty Creator is as visible in the meanest Insect or Plant , as in the greatest Leviathan or strongest Oak . To touch upon all the Wonders this Instrument shews us , would be infinite ; I shall therefore only refer to those , who have prosecuted Enquiries therewith to great Exactness .

Franciscus Fontana Fontana . in his Observationes Coelestium Terrestriumque Rerum ( wherein he challenges to himself the Invention of the double Microscope , An. 1618. ) is the first ( that I can learn ) who published Microscopical Observations of some few Bodies . After him Borellus Borellus . at the end of his Tract , De vero Telescopii Inventore , An. 1650. does the same . Power . Next a learned Englishman Dr. Power , An. 1664. did the like . But all these went no farther than verbal Description ; they want those curious and lively Schemes , which the learned and ingenious Mr. Hook Hook . presents to the World in his Micrographia , An. 1665. a Book full of admirable Discoveries by the Microscope , and other curious Enquiries . The learned Dr. Grew , Grew . and the excellent Bononian Philosopher Marcel . Malpighius , Malpighius . have laboured most successfully in the Anatomy of Plants by the Microscope ; and the latter has used it much in his Books , de Ovo incubato , de Bombyce , de Viscerum structura , Lewenhoeck . &c. The Heer Le●enhoeck of Delft in Holland , has lately apply'd himself with great Diligence to the use of Microscopes : of which Instrument he thinks he has a better kind than was ever yet known . When I visited this Gentleman at Delft , he shew'd me several that indeed were very curious ; but nothing more than what I had ordinarily seen before ; being composed only of one single , very minute Glass-Sphere or Hemisphere , placed between two very thin pierced Laminae , or Plates of Brass , and the Object was brought to its due distance before the Glass by a fine Screw : But for his best sort , he beg'd our Excuse in concealing them . The Observations he has made with his Glasses are Printed in several Letters of his in Dutch ; but for the most part , they are to be found dispers'd in the Philosophical Transactions . The last Author that has professedly treated of Microscopick Observations , is Iohan. Fran. Griendeli●s Griende●●us . in his Micrographia nova Norimberg . 1687. wherein he has taken a great deal of pains in giving the genuine Representations of his Objects as magnify'd .

I have been often delighted with the curious Appearance of many Objects seen through the Microscope . Circulation of the Blood in Water-New●s . But none ever surprised me more , than the visible Circulation of the Blood in Water-New●s ( Lacerta aquatica ) to be seen as plainly as Water running in a River , and proportionably much more rapid . Of this I have formerly given the Account at large to the Royal Society . And 't is publish'd in the Philosophical Transact . Num. 177. P. 1236.

21 21 Vie●ing nigh Objects with the Telescope ▪ I shall conclude all , with two remaining Uses of the Telescope . The first is , To view nigh Objects therewith . The most apposite Telescope for our Purpose , is that consisting of a Convex Object-Glass and Convex Eye-Glass . But what is delivered hereof , is easily accommodated to the Telescope with a Concave Eye Glass ; but this latter , taking in but a narrow space of the Object , is not so proper for our Purpose .

Wherefore , suppose we have a Telescope , whose Object-Glass has its Focal Length for very distant Objects just 3 Foot , ( how to find this exactly , I have shewn Chap. IV. Sect. 3. ) This we 'll call the Solar Focus . And suppose the Focus of the Eye-Glass be just 2 Inches ; and that we were to view with this Telescope an Object 20 Foot distant from the Object-Glass . 'T is required to find the distinct Base of this Object-Glass exposed now to this nigh Object 20 Foot distant , which in the First Part is called the Respective Focus .

And this is done by Prop. V. of the First Part : By this Analogy ,

As the difference between the Distance of the Object and Glasses Focus :

To the Glasses Focus : :

So the Distance of the Object from the Glass :

To the Distance of the respective Focus , or distinct Base from the Glass .

In the Numbers of our Example thus ,

204. 36 : : 240. 42●35 + = equal to the distinct Base of this Object-Glass exposed now to this nigh Object . So that the Distance of the Object-Glass from the Eye-Glass , which , for viewing distant Objects , was 36 + 2 = 38 Inches ; must now be 42●35 + 2 = 44●35 Inches ; and so much is the Telescope to be lengthened to view this Object distant only 20 Foot .

The use of this Theorem is very pretty ; Viewing Pictures in Miniature . and they who draw Pictures in Miniature , may practise it to good Purpose . For the small Picture ( being inverted that it may appear erect , and placed in a strong Light , and thus looked at with a Telescope ) may be made to appear full as bigg as the natural Face , or bigger if we please . And by this means , the least Errors of the Painter may be easily discovered , which cannot be done so well by a single Convex-Glass as will be manifest to those who shall try and compare both Ways . And this naturally leads me to the last Use of the Telescope I shall here mention ; and 't is as it were the Converse of this I have just spoke of . 'T is ,

( 22. ) ( 22. ) Measuring Distances by a Telescope . To Measure the Distance of an Object at one Station by a Telescope .

This is the great Desideratum in Practical Geometry ; and always reputed impossible . Whatever Attempts have been made towards it have been always found to result at last to a double Station , tho some way or other disguised by the Contrivance . This is evidently shewn by Tacquet ( Geom. Pract. Lib. 1. ad Finem Cap. 5. ) concerning the Method proposed by Clavius . And may be shewn of any other , that I have ever yet heard of .

Towards the latter end of the year 1665. History of this Affair . ( as we may find Num. 7. P. 123. Philosoph . Transact . ) Mons. Auzout did propose to Mr. Hook , to exchange with him a Secret he had in Opticks , for another which Mr. Hook had . Mons. Auzout's was , Locorum Distantias ex unicâ statione , absque ullo Instrumento Mathematico metiri . And therein he declares the Instrument , he uses for this Purpose , to be a great Telescope , with some necessary Tables . Adding withal , That tho the Practice do not altogether answer the Theory of his Invention , because that the Length of the Telescope admits of some Latitude ; yet one comes near enough , and perhaps as just , as by most of the Ways ordinarily used with Instruments . But tho Mr. Hook discovered the Secret which Mons. Auzout desired from him , ( which is that I mention at the End of Chap ▪ IV. ) yet Mons. Auzout never ( that I know ) published any thing farther of this Invention of his own . And indeed I cannot see , how justly Mons. Azout could say , that his Performance was , absque ullo Instrumento Mathematico ; and at the same time tell us , that it was done by a great Telescope ; which surely is a Mathematick Instrument in the highest sense : Perhaps he means , 't is none of those Mathematick Instruments commonly used in this Practice .

Mr. Oldenburg , who then publish'd the Philosoph . Transact . adds Pag. 125. That the Secret of measuring the Distance of Places by a Telescope fitted for that Purpose , and for one Station , is a Thing already known ( if I am not missinformed ) to some Members of the Royal Society ; who have been a good while since considering of it , and have contrived Ways for the doing of it . Whether the same with those of Mons. Azout , I know not ; nor have I ( at the Distance that I am now from them ) Opportunity of particular Information .

This is in short the History of this Affair . Wherein ( for ought as ever I could learn ) nothing more has been done hitherto . So that what I shall propose therein is my own Thought and Contrivance . Whereof I shall first declare the Method ; and afterwards shall not conceal the Difficulties thereof : not doubting but more ingenious Heads may have Contrivances of the same kind far exceeding mine ; tho nothing herein has ever yet been publish'd .

Wherefore let the Distance of the Object from the Object-Glass be called d , The Author's Proposal . the Solar Focus of the Object-Glass , or its Focus at very distant Objects f , the respective Focus or distinct Base at a nigh Object r.

By Prop. V. and the Rule immediately mentioned :

It shall be — d − f . f : : d. r

And Compounding — d . f : : d + r. r

Permute — r . f : : r + d . d

Divide — r − f . f : : r . d

Which last Analogy is the Rule I give for finding the Distance of an Object by a Telescope , thus expressed in Words ,

As the Difference between the Respective Focus and Solar Focus :

To the Solar Focus : :

So the Respective Focus :

To the Distance of the Object from the Object-Glass .

It now remains to shew how to obtain exactly the three first Terms of this Analogy ; That thereby we may find the fourth required . And first for the Solar Focal Length of an Object-Glass , 't is shewn before in Chap. IV. Sec. 3. how to procure it exactly . Secondly for the Respective Focus , or distinct Base of any nigh Object we look at , I propose the Way to obtain it thus :

As the Micrometer is contrived to open and close in the Focus of the Object-Glass , and the Indices give the exact Measure of this Opening : So may we adapt an Instrument , which may advance or withdraw the curious Point of a slender Needle to or from the Object Glass . And an Index ( after the manner of the Micrometer ) may shew how much the slender Point is withdrawn from the Object-Glass . Then looking through the Telescope at the Object , whose Distance we measure , let us withdraw the Needle , till by moving the Eye before the Eye-Glass , we perceive the Needle , as it were , fixt upon the Object : ( as is taught Chap. V. Sect. 4. ) Then is the Needle in the Respective Focus . And by observing the Index aforementioned , we have the Measure of this Respective Focus from the Object-Glass : And consequently the Difference between it and the Solar Focus . With which we are to work according to the Rule , and we obtain what was required , viz. the Distance of the Object . Thus suppose , in the foregoing Example , the Glasses Focus be = 36 Inches , and the Respective Focus be measured 42 , 45 : The Analogy will then stand thus ,

42 , 35 - 36 = 6●35 . 36 : : 42●35 . 240 = to the Distance of the Object from the Object-Glass . And thus may we make a Table to any Telescope , that upon the first Sight of the Respective Focus shall give the Distance of the Object .

But now I shall not conceal the Difficulties , Difficulties and Uncertainty thereof . that attend this Method of observing Distances . And first , The Eye can never be justly certain , when the Needle 's Point is exactly in the Respective Focus ; for tho the Way I propose of examining it ( viz. by moving the Eye before the Eye-Glass , and observing whether or not the Needle seems to move on the Object ) be the best Expedient , and most certain that I can think of at present : Yet we shall find , that it admits of some Latitude ; and that the Needle may be moved a little more forward or backward , without shewing any visible Motion thereof on the Object ; and this too most especially , the longer the Telescopes are that we use , and the wider the Aperture . But for the Remedy hereof , 't is best to observe where the Needle ( being too nigh the Object-Glass ) begins first to move on the Object ; as also to observe , where the Needle ( being too far from the Object-Glass ) begins first to appear to move on the Object ; and to take the middle between these two Stations of the Needle for the true Respective Focus .

But if we believe the said Mons. Auzout , by this Way , ( if this Way which I propose be his , as I know not whether it be or not ) one comes near enough to Exactness , and perhaps as just as by most of the Methods ordinarily used . However , tho the Practice , through some accidental Difficulties , do not so exactly answer the Theory : Yet it cannot be deny'd , that the Theory is true . And perhaps farther Improvements may bring it to Perfection .

CHAP. VII . An Optick Problem of Double Vision .

IN Tab. 4● . Fig. 1. Tab. 41. Fig. 〈◊〉 A B are the two Eyes , C the nigher Object , D the farther Object ; If both Eyes open are fixt upon C , the Object D shall seem double , and then shutting the left Eye A , the left Image of D disappears ; and shutting the Right Eye B , the right Image of D disappears .

But if both Eyes open are fixed on D , then C shall seem double , and if the left Eye A be shut , the right Image of C vanishes , if the Right Eye B be shu● , the left Image of C vanishes .

This is the Declaration of the Phaenomenon , which any one may experiment by placing two Candles , D 3 Foot , and C 1 Foot distant from the Eyes , and then standing so that the Nose and two Objects may lie in or near a right Line , he fixing his Eyes on either Object , alternately open and shut them I choose two Candles , and at that Distance and Posture , because the Experiment thereby will be more sensibly evident ; tho it hold in any two Objects at whatever Distance , till the Distance be so great , that the Interval between the two Eyes bears no sensible proportion thereto , that is , till the Angle ACB ( and much more A D B ) is so very small , that the Lines AC , BC , may be taken to run as it were Parallel .

This being declared , I explicate the Reason of this Appearance , as follows .

In the first Case , both Eyes being fixed on C , if the Right Eye B be shut , the Object D will appear to the left hand of C ; then shutting the Left Eye A , and opening the Right Eye B , and looking at C , D will appear to the Right Hand of C ; therefore opening both A and B , and looking stedfastly on C , the Object D will appear on both sides C , that is , both to the Right and Left Hand of C , and therefore double . And 't is manifest , the Right Eye B receives the Right Image of D , and the Left Eye A the Left Image of D ; therefore in this Case , to the Right Eye being shut , the Right Image of D disappears , and to the Left Eye being shut , the Left Image of D disappears .

But in the second Case , fixing both Eyes on D , C seems double , for the Left Eye A being shut , C appears to B on the Left Hand of D ; then the Right Eye being shut , the Left Eye A sees C on the Right Hand of D ; so that in this Case , the Right Eye receives the Left Image of C , and the Left Eye the Right Image of C , and consequently the opening or shutting of either , does in this Case make the contrary Image of C disappear . And why C should seem double , is plain in this Case ; for the Right Eye sees it on the Left Hand of D , and the Left Eye on the Right Hand of D ; so that both Eyes see it on both Hands of D , and therefore double . But then in the first Case , the Object D , and not the Object C , seems double . And in the second Case , the Object C , and not the Object D , seems double . For in Vision , there is a Difference between looking and seeing ; whatever Object I look at with both Eyes appears single , and all others more remote or nigher , that I see , appear double ; for upon the Object , I look at , the Optick Axes do concur , but not so on those I only see . And this is the Reason that at any time I can make all the Objects about me seem confused , only by turning the Optick Axes so , that they may concur in the free Air ; as if there were a certain visible Object there before them , tho really there be none .

And that the Concurrence of the Axes Optici in a single Point or Object is sufficient to make that Object seem but one besides the Proof of the foregoing Experiments , I shall endeavour to evince , or at least to explicate , by an other known Affection of Vision ; the Explanation whereof is allowed by all men as satisfactory , 't is this , in Tab. 41. Fig. 2. ● . 41. F. 4. the Image a b of the Object A B is painted on the Retina inverted , and yet the Eye ( or rather the Soul by means of the Eye ) sees the Object erect and in its natural Posture ; Because the Mind takes no notice of what happens to the Rays in the Eye by Refraction or Decussation , but in its direction towards the Object ; it follows streight alongst the Rays as they by their Impulse and in their plain Course lead it , and consequently following the Rays a A , it is directed strait to the upper part of the Object ; and also following the Rays b B , it is directed to the lower part of the Object , and so of the rest : for suppose the Ball of the Eye taken out of its Socket , or Cavity in the Skull , and a Man receives in the Socket an impulse by a Stick coming in the posture of B b , and hitting him on the upper part of the Cavity , surely he would never look for the Original of this Blow at A , but would be certainly directed to hunt back as it were alongst the Stick b B towards the Place from whence the Stroak comes . So the mind does hunt back by means of each Pencil of Rays ( which are as it were a Stick giving the Retina a certain Impulse ) to the Point from whence it comes , and is thereby directed strait thereto . To apply this to what I intend , I say then , that the Mind or visive Faculty ( if I may have leave to use that Word for a thing we all understand and cannot better express ) takes no notice that there are two Axes Optici , or two Pictures made by those Axes Optici on each Retina , but following back , and hunting counter alongst these Axes , it is directed to , and determined in one single Point , and therefore it sees it as one .

And seeing this Speculation does naturally lead me to the Consideration of an Opinion , first as I think started by the celebrated Gassendus , and since embraced by many , viz. that we see but with one Eye at once one and the same Point of an Object , otiante alio , ( as they term it ) whilst the other is idle and does nothing . I shall not think it improper to subjoyn to my former Discourse something relating to that Opinion , confining my self only to what may something illustrate my former Explanations , for to enumerate all the Experiments that prove we see with two Eyes , would swell this far beyond the limits I design it . Therefore to the Matter .

Against our seeing with two Eyes at once one and the same Point of an Object , it is commonly objected , that if it were so , every Object would seem in two places at once , vide Gassendi Epist. 4. de Magnit . Solis humilis & sublimis , & Taqueti Opt. lib. 1. Prop. 2. Thus in Tab. 41. Fig. 3. T. 41. F. 3. If the Eyes A , B , look at the Object C , and both see it at a time , A would see it on the opposite Wall suppose at E , and B at D.

I am so far from thinking this an Objection , that I assert first , that we do see all Objects in two places , and that this is not taken notice of by us upon these Accounts . First , the common Objects of our sight are large , and the Axes of our Eyes directed to but one Physical Point thereof at a time , and then we cannot be expected to see such in two places at once ; for when I read on a flat broad Book , where is the opposite Wall for a single small Letter to be seen on at two places , the Letters themselves are fixt to the Surface that determines the Sight . What I Instance in Letters on a Book may be accommodated to most other Objects . Secondly , There are few Objects disposed fitly for shewing us that we see them in two places , for either their Bulk hinders the Experiment from appearing so plainly , or their distance from each other or from the Eyes . Thirdly . The Wall DE and the Parts thereof are seen so confusedly by the Eyes A , B , when fixed on C , that we cannot so clearly observe this Experiment ; and this happens to all Objects more remote or nigher to us than C , when the Eyes are fixed on C , still supposing that it self be but in a moderate Distance from us , that is , in such a Distance from us , as may bear some considerable Proportion to the Distance of the two Eyes from each other . Fourthly , the chief Reason why we do not perceive so plainly the Object C to cover both D and E is , because , though D be cover'd by C from the Eye B , yet it is not covered from the Eye A , and therefore we think it not covered at all . Also though E be covered by C from the Eye A , yet it is not covered from the Eye B , and consequently because we see E , tho but with one Eye B , we imagine it not covered at all , so that both the Points D and E being open to both the Eyes A and B , viz. the Point D to the Eye A , and the Point E to the Eye B , we think neither of them covered , whereas really they are both obscur'd , each to its proper Eye , as will be evident by winking . And from hence is manifest the ●alsity of Taquets Assertion in the forecited Place , viz. that opening both Eyes A and B ( Fig. 3. ) and looking at C , it shall appear only to cover E ( he imagining that most Men see generally with their left Eye ) whereas I say it shall appear to obscure neither E nor D , tho to each Eye respectively it cover each . Fifthly , whereas the Bulk of Objects ( as I have noted ) does hinder the Experiment from being so sensibly evident ; if by any Experiment I can shew how a large Object may be doubled , I think 't will be sufficiently plain . Therefore in Tab. 41. Fig. 4. ● . 41. F. 2. let A , B , be the two Eyes , before which at a convenient Distance place the two Candles C , D , then take a large piece of Paper E F G H K , in whose middle at K there is a small Hole . This Paper so place between the Eyes and Candles , that the Eye A may through the Hole K see the Candle D ; and at the same time the Eye B may see through the Hole K the Candle C ; the due Distance of the Paper that is requisite for this will be found by Tryals , and winking alternately with the Eyes . When all things are in this Posture , open both Eyes A and B , and direct them to look at either of the Candles , I say the Hole K shall seem double ; and what is proved of the Point K is true of all other Points in the Paper , so the whole Paper appears double ; but no Points thereof are so evidently doubled as the Point K , because they want the Advantage of Lights behind them to render the Experiment more sensible . And upon this Occasion I cannot but hint to all Persons that are desirous to make Experiments about Vision , that they always imploy the most luminous and vigorous Objects they can possibly , for many Experiments will be evident by them , that will not sensibly succeed with others .

But I assert secondly , that unless we saw with both Eyes , the two first mentioned Experiments would not succeed , and they may be reckoned amongst the greatest Arguments that can be produced for it . For suppose in Fig. 1. A and B to look stedfastly on C , I say they see C in two Places at once , for they see it both on the Right hand and Left hand of D. For t is the same thing to see C between two Ds , as to see it at two Places at once . And this I 'll declare more fully Tab. 41. Fig. 5. T. 41. F. 5. supposing the two Eyes A and B fixed on the Object C , I say C appears on the opposite Wall X Z in two Places , viz. at E and F ( tho neither E nor F are obscur'd thereby for the foregoing Reason ) for let us suppose the Object D of the first Figure to be placed duly on this Wall ; shutting A , the Object C shall appear to B on the left hand of D by the Angle D B E : then shutting B , the Object C shall appear to A on the right hand of D , by the Angle DAF ; wherefore to both open at a time and looking at it , it shall appear on both sides of D , to A on the right side , to B on the left side , and this happens by doubling of D ; so that from hence this Paradoxical Corollary arises , That an Object may be seen in two Places , and yet ●ot seen double .

They that assert that we see but with one Eye , whilst the other is idle and does nothing , assert likewise that all visual Spirits recede from the idle Eye , and only supply the Eye that sees ; but I see no Reason why the Eyes A , B , looking at C , either of them should be said destitute of Spirits in respect of C , which they see single , and yet both replenished with Spirits in respect of D , which they see Double . The Images of C and D both are painted on the Retina of A as well as of B , and therefore A and B both being replenished with Spirits to ●ee D , ( even by the Concession of our Adversaries ) why not to see C also , at which they stedfastly look ?

APPENDIX .

WHilst this Book was in the Press my Affairs were such , that I could not attend the Perusal and Correction thereof , but therein have made use of my Friend Mr. E. Halley , who was willing to do me that Service : He , after the first Part hereof was finished , sent me a Proposition of his own , which I took to be of that Consequence in Dioptricks , that I importuned him to permit it to be subjoyned by way of Appendix to my Treatise , it being of that Extent as to comprehend the whole Doctrine of the Foci of Spherical Glasses of all Sorts , exposed either to Diverging , Converging , or Parallel Rays . It is as follows .

PROPOSITION .

TO find the Focus of any Parcel of Rays Diverging from , or Converging to a given Point in the Axis of a Spherical Lens , and inclined thereto under the same Angle ; the ratio of the Sines in Refraction being known .

Let G L Tab. 42. be the Lens , P any Point in its Surface , Tab. 42. V the Pole thereof , C the Centre of the Sphere whereof it is a Segment , O the Object or Point in the Axis , to or from which the Rays do proceed , O P a given Ray : and let the ratio of Refraction be as r to s ; make C R to C O as s to r for the immersion of a Ray , or as r to s for the Emersion , ( that is , as the Sines of the Angles in the Medium which the Ray enters , to their corresponding Sines in the Medium out of which it comes ) and laying C R from C towards O , the Point R shall be the same for all the Rays of the Point O. Then draw the Radius P C if need be continued , and with the Centre R and Distance O P sweep a touch of an Arch intersecting P C in Q ; the Line Q R being drawn shall be parallel to the refracted Ray , and P F being made parallel thereto shall intersect the Axis in the Point F , which is the Focus sought Or make it as C Q : C P : : C R : C F and C F shall be the Distance of the Focus from the Centre of the Sphere .

Demonstration .

Let fall the Perpendiculars P x on the Axis , C y on the given Ray and C z on the refracted Ray. By the Construction P F and Q R are parallel , whence the ● Q R C and P F C are simular , and C R to Q R as C F to P F , that is , C R to O P as C F to P F. Now C F : P F : : C z : P x ob similia Triang . whence C R : O P : : C z : P x , and C R : C z : : O P : P x. Again C R is to C O as the Sines of Refraction , by construction , that is as s to r or r to s ; and as C R to C z , so C O = r● or ●r CR to r● or ●r C z , and so P O to P x : But as P O to P x , so C O to C y. Ergo C y = r● or ●r C z , that is , C y to C z is as the Sines of Refraction , but C y is the Sine of the Angle of Incidence , and C z of the refracted Angle . Ergo constant Propositio .

The several Cases of Rays Diverging or Converging as they enter the curve Surface of a Convex or Concave Lens , are for the Readers Ease delineated in the first four Figures of Tab. 42. as are in Fig. 5 and 6 thereof , and in Fig. 1 , 2. of Tab. 43. the like Cases of emerging Rays . All which are drawn with the same Letters to their respective Points , only in some the Point F falling far distant , is to be understood in the Intersection of the Line P F with the Axis .

This thus demonstrated in the most difficult Cases , will give all the Rules ●or the Foci of Rays parallel to the Axis as likewise for the principle Focus , where the Rays nearest the Axis do unite , all which Rules I shall collect in these following Corollaries .

Cor. 1. If O P be equal to C r , then the Points Q and C are coincident , and the Rays O P after Refraction run on parallel to the Axis .

Cor. 2. If the Point Q fall on the same side the Axis as is the Point P , then the Beams after Refraction do tend on , either diverging or converging as before : But if Q fall on the other side the Axis , as in Fig. 1. the diverging Rays are made to converge by a Convex , or the converging to diverge by a Concave Glass .

Cor. 3. If O P do exceed C R , the Focus is in all Cases on the same side of the Glass as is the Centre of the Sphere C. But contrarywise if O P be less than C R , the Focus falls on the other side of the Glass beyond the Vertex V.

Cor. 4. An Object may be so placed , that the Rays next the Axis of a Convex-Glass shall have an imaginary Focus , transmitting diverging Rays , when the more remote Parts thereof shall make them converge to a real Focus .

Cor. 5. If O V the Distance of the Object from the Pole or Vertex of the Glass , be taken instead of O P , then will C Q be the difference of O V and C R , and as that difference to C R , so the Radius C V to C F the Distance of the principal Focus from the Centre of the Sphere whereof the Glass is a Segment : or else as C Q to O P or R Q : : so P C to V F the focal distance from the Pole of the Glass . Whence follows a general Rule for the Foci of all Glasses , only according to Corol. 3. if O V do exceed C R , the Focus is on the same side of the ▪ Glass as is the Centre of the Sphere . But if C R be the greater , then the Focus is on the opposite side of the Glass , whence it will be determined whether the Focus be real or imaginary .

Cor. 6. What has hitherto been said of one Surface of a Lens is easily applicable to the other ; taking F the Focus of the first Surface as an Object , and using it as O in the Figures for emerging Rays , whereby the Focus of both Surfaces will be determined , as in Tab. 43. Fig. 3. where I have given an Example .

Cor. 7. Hitherto we have considered only oblique Rays either Diverging or Converging ; it now remains to add something concerning Rays parallel to the Axis : In this Case the Point O must be considered as infinitely distant , and consequently O P , O C , and C R are all infinite ; and O P and O C are in this Case to be accounted as always equal , ( since they differ but by a Part of the Radius of the Sphere G P V L , which is no part of either of them , ) wherefore the ratio of C R to O P will be always the same , viz. as s to r for immerging Rays , and as r to s for those that emerge . And by this Proposition C F is to P F in the same ratio . It remains therefore to shew on the Base C P , to find all the Triangles C P F wherein C F is to P F in the ratio given by the degree of Refraction . This Problem has been very fully considered by the celebrated Dr. Wallis in his late Treatise of Algebra , pag. 258. to which I refer ; but I must here repeat the Construction thereof , Tab. 43. Fig. 4 , 5.

Let G P V L be a Lens , V C or P C the Radius of its Sphere , and let it be required to find all the Points f , f , such as C f , may be to P f in the given ratio of s to r for immerging Rays , or as r to s for the emerging . Divide C V in K , and continue C V to F , that C K may be to V K , and C F to V F in the proposed ratio : Then divide K F equally in the Point a , and with that Center sweep the Circle FK F ; this Circle being drawn gives readily all the Foci of the Parallel Rays O P , O P. For having continued CP till it intersect the Circle in F , P F shall be always equal to V f the Distance of the Focus of each respective Parcel of Rays O P , from the Vertex or Pole of the Lens .

To demonstrate this , draw the prickt line V F , and by what is delivered by Dr. Wallis in the aforecited Place , V F and C F , will be alwayes in the same proposed ratio . Again V f being made equal to P F , C F and C f will be likewise equal , as are C P , V C ; and the Angles P C f , V C F being ad verticem are also equal : Wherefore P f will be equal to V F , and consequently C f to P f in the same ratio as C F to V F , whence and by what foregoes , the Points f , f are the several respective Foci of the several Parcels of Rays , O P , O P. Q. E. D.

That C F is to P F in the ratio of the Refraction , in the case of parallel Rays , will be yet more evident , if it be consider'd , that the Angle at C is equal to the Angle of Incidence , and the Angle at P to the refracted Angle ; wherefore PF the side opposite to the Angle at C , is as the Sine of the Angle of Incidence , and C F opposite to the Angle at P , is as the Sine of the respective refracted Angle ; whence in all Cases of parallel Rays , C F is to P F in the same constant ratio of Refraction .

If it shall be desired to effect in Numbers what we have here done by Lines , it will be most easie to adapt a Calculus to the foregoing Geometrical Construction . For if in the Triangle P O C there be given the Radius C P equal to Unity , C O the distance of the Object from the Centre of the Sphere , and the Perpendicular P x equal to the Sine of the Angle P C O , the side P O = Q R will be equal to in Then as Q R or P O to P x : : so C R to the Sine of the Angle C Q R , and the Complement to 180 gr. of the sum of the Angl●s C P O and C Q R is the Angle C R Q = C F P ; and as P x to P O so the Sine of the Angle C R Q to C Q ; and as C Q to C P so C R to C F , which is the distance of the respective Focus of all the Rays P O from the Centre of the Sphere C.

But the Foci of Rays parallel to the Axis may be more readily computed , following the Footsteps of the Construction delivered in Coroll . 7. ( Tab. 43. Fig. 4 , 5. ) for thereby it will appear , that the Radius of the Circle K F , viz. a F , is equal to C P , and C a = C P , for emerging Rays , as in Fig. 4 ; but for immerging Rays , as in Fig. 5 , Ca will be found to be C P : and supposing the distance of the Ray from the Axis = P x , in the Case of parallel Rays Emerging , the distance of the Focus will be found , P F = C P : that is , r to s being as 3 to 2 , P F = C P. And for immerging Rays , the Focal distance is found by a like Rule , P F = + C P : that is r and s being as 3 to 2 as before , PF is equal to + C P. These Canons are so easily deduced from the Constructions , that I shall not need to trouble the Reader with their Demonstration ; only I shall add two Tables which I computed from them , with little more work than a continual Addition ; which may by way of Example , serve to instruct and exercise the young Student in this part of Mathematicks .

Suppose CP the Radius of the Sphere of Glass 2 Inches , and the ratio of Refractio as 3 to 2 ; at each tenth of an Inch distance from the Axis , the Foci are as follows . ForEmergingRays. Px PF 0 √ 12,9600 + √ 5,7600 − 2 1 √ 12,9276 + √ 5,7276 − 2 2 √ 12,8304 + √ 5,6304 − 2 3 √ 12,6684 + √ 5,4684 − 2 4 √ 12,4416 + √ 5,2416 − 2 5 √ 12,1500 + √ 4,9500 − 2 6 √ 11,7936 + √ 4,5936 − 2 7 √ 11,3724 + √ 4,1724 − 2 8 √ 10,8864 + √ 3,6864 − 2 9 √ 10,3356 + √ 3,1356 − 2 10 √ 9,7200 + √ 2,5200 − 2

ForImmergingRays. Px PF 0 √ 2,5600 + √ 5,7600 + 2 1 √ 2,5536 + √ 5,7536 + 2 2 √ 2,5344 + √ 5,7344 + 2 3 √ 2,5024 + √ 5,7024 + 2 4 √ 2,4576 + √ 5,6576 + 2 5 √ 2,4000 + √ 5,6000 + 2 6 √ 2,3296 + √ 5,5296 + 2 7 √ 2,2464 + √ 5 ▪ 4464 + 2 8 √ 2,1504 + √ 5 ▪ 3504 + 2 9 √ 2 ▪ 0416 + √ 5 ▪ 2416 + 10 √ 1 ▪ 9200 + √ 5 ▪ 1200 + 2

But it is to be Noted , that these Foci for Immerging Rays , must not be taken for the Foci of a Plano-Convex , when the Convex Side is towards the Object , for the plane Side by its Refraction , does contract the Focal length by about a Semidiameter of the Sphere ; These suppose the Body of Glass continued , as in the First Proposition of this Treatise .

FINIS .

Errata .

Page Line For Read 3 26 V IV 4 12 Propositions Proportions 50 23 6 th . 16 th . 57 17 Convexity Concavity 58 5 Plano-Convex Plano-Concave 67 8 4 th . 5 th . 141 24 Breadth of the Object ½ Breadth of the Object 143 6 Dele XV 149 12 We cannot add We are to add 160 4 Lemma Lemma . I. 193 4 C F or F Z + F D C F ( or F Z ) + F D. 219 13 l h more than l i l h is greater than l i 219 14 h g less h g is less 220 1 shall be as shall be 264 22 his this

ADVERTISEMENT .

ALL the above-named Instruments as Telescopes of all Lengths , Microscopes single and double , Perspectives great and small , Reading Glasses of all sizes , Magnifying Glasses , Multiplying Glasses , Triangular Prisms , Speaking Trumpets , Spectacles fitted to all Ages , and all other Sorts of Glasses , both Concave and Convex are made and sold by JOHN YARWELL at the Archimedes and Three Golden Prospects , near the great North-Door in S. Paul's Church-Yard : London .

Notes, typically marginal, from the original text

Notes for div A51133-e180

Notes for div A51133-e1790

Notes for div A51133-e73750

Notes for div A51133-e100950